San Carlos City Council
May 23, 2022

C. All walls and floors:

1. Piping passing through walls and floors exposed to view shall be provided with chrome plated split-ring escutcheon plates in finished areas. Brass or galvanized escutcheon plates may be used elsewhere.

2.7 FLASHING
A. All flashing shall be 4 lb. sheet lead and all vents penetrating the roof shall be flashed and counter-flashed. Stoneman Co. roof flashing assembly with 10" skirt or equal may be used.

B. The flashing for vents penetrating a metal roof shall have a corrosion resistant aluminum base compatible with the roofing system. A rubber type flashing by "Tech Specialties" shall be installed between the flashing and pipe.

C. For single ply roofing, provide flashing per roofing manufacturer recommendations or installation instructions.

2.8 VALVE BOXES
A. Brooks Products Inc., Christy Co., or equal with the word "Water" cast in cover as applicable.

2.9 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts per Drawings and details on Drawings. Cleanouts as manufactured by J. R. Smith, Mifab, Wade, or Zurn are approved equals.

B. Cleanout tops to be installed with tamper-proof screws.

2.10 FLOOR DRAINS, AND FLOOR SINKS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 752 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 11 Plumbing
A. Provide drains as specified on the Plumbing Schedule. Drains as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Mifab, Wade, and Zurn will be acceptable provided they are equal.

B. Floor sinks by J.R. Smith, Mifab, Wade, Zurn, or Commercial Enameling are acceptable provided they are equal.

2.11 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Provide Wilkins Piston Model #1250XL, Sioux Chief #65X-X, Precision Plumbing Products, or equal, as sized on the Drawings or required by PDI.

Install per manufacturer’s instructions.

2.12 AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMERS
A. Provide Precision Plumbing Products, J.R. Smith, Mifab, or Zurn as specified on the Drawings. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Fixture locations, quantities, types, sizes and connections shall be as shown on both the Plumbing and Architectural Drawings. If a conflict in fixture location is noted between the Plumbing and Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall take precedence.

B. Fixtures shall be thoroughly protected against damage to the chrome plate or enamel, by chipping, scratching or other damage during the entire period of construction. Roof drains, floor sinks and drains, toilet and sink drains, plumbing vents, and all other similar fixtures shall be covered to prevent trash from entering the pipes until final installation of grates, domes, fixtures or other protective devices.

C. Provide fixtures as specified in the Plumbing Schedule. American Standard, Crane, Elkay, Kohler, or Zurn are acceptable substitutes provided they are equal if approved by Engineer.

D. Fixture carrier numbers listed are as specified on the Plumbing Schedule; however, carriers as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Mifab, Wade, or Zurn are acceptable provided they are equal.

2.14 CONNECTORS
A. Provide Brass Craft "Speedway" or equal heavy pattern iron pipe size brass stops, rigid or flexible supplies and chrome plated brass "P" traps.

Stops in "Public" areas are to have screwdriver slots and those in "Private" areas are to have all cross handles.

B. Provide Brass Craft or equal flexible stainless steel braided water supplies to appliances. They may also be used to fixtures as an option to rigid supplies. Aquaflo is an acceptable substitute.

2.15 ACCESS BOXES
A. See section 23 00 13 for access panels.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 753 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 12 Plumbing

2.16 PRESSURE GAGES AND THERMOMETERS
A. Provide Marsh Quality gages or equal with 3-1/2" dial, gage cock, in type required. For pump suction, provide compound type.

B. Provide Trerice 7" BX or 3" Bimetal Dial series thermometers or equal, straight, angle, or oblique as required, equipped with separable sockets and well. Provide extension necks as required on insulated line.

C. Arrange gages and thermometers for easy reading.

2.17 PRESSURE REGULATORS AND BACKFLOW PREVENTORS
A. Provide the pressure regulator(s) and backflow preventer(s) as specified on the drawings and/or as required by the governmental authority having jurisdiction.

B. Pressure regulators and/or backflow preventers by Febco, Hersey, Watts or Wilkins are considered equal when their pressure fall-off/loss is equal to or less than the specified regulators/preventer’s loss for the given flow rate.

C. Provide all potable water outlets with hose attachments with nonremovable hose bibb backflow preventers per the C.P.C.

2.18 WATER HEATERS
A. Provide water heaters as specified in Plumbing Schedule or approved equal of size, capacity, recovery, and KW input. Heater shall be A.G.A. or U.L. listed.

1. Heater storage tank shall be provided with magnesium anodes, approved standard pressure/temperature relief valve and all standard factory trim.

2. Provide approved flexible copper supplies for the water heater water connections.

B. Provide a Smitty Co., Benjamin Co. with 1” drain outlet or equal, water heater pan as specified in the Water Heater Schedule.

2.19 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE
A. Pressure-temperature relief valve shall be Wilkins TP220 or TP3000 Series or equal.

2.20 EXPANSION TANK
A. Expansion tank shall be Watts QS series as specified on the Drawings or approved equal in size and capacity. Amtrol and Wilkins expansion tanks are considered equal.

2.21 WATER HEATER SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Seismic restraints shall be Spacemaker restraint system Model E-50 or E100 as applicable for the water heater specified. Spacemaker Model

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 754 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 13 Plumbing
#TSE-25 or Seismik Model #SR-2 may be substituted when first approved by the Engineer.

2.22 PROTECTIVE INSULATION (ADA FIXTURES)
A. Provide approved manufactured, molded antimicrobial vinyl protective pipe and fitting covering for exposed waste and drain assembly and for hot and cold water supplies and stops. Protective system shall consist of preformed pipe or tubing sleeve and pre-formed fitting patterns for trap and stops. Assembly shall have integral snap fasteners.

B. Provide protective covering for off-set drain assembly and disposer at kitchen sinks.

C. Foam pipe wrap, duct tape, baggy-type covers, tie-strap fasteners are not acceptable.

D. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Truebro “Lav-Guard”

2. Plumberex “Pro-Xtreme”

3. Zurn #Z89XX-XX

2.23 INSULATION
A. All pipe insulation shall conform to Section 123 of the California Energy Efficiency Standards except to the extent that this Specification supersedes the minimum standards as established by the Code, in which case this Specification shall take precedent. Outside insulation shall be protected with a hard plastic or metal shell covering.

B. Insulation material shall meet requirements of flame spread not to exceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by Procedure ASTME-84, NFPA 255 or U.L.723.

C. Domestic cold water piping shall be insulated with a minimum 1" insulation in unheated areas of the building and where exposed outside of the building.

D. Domestic hot water piping shall be insulated with Owens-Corning Fiberglass heavy density pipe insulation 25 ASJ/SSL-II (All Service Jacket/Double/ Self-Sealing Lap). Insulation shall be UL rated noncombustible pipe insulation with a k factor of 0.24-0.28 @ 100 degrees F. mean temperature, an embossed vapor barrier laminated and pressure sealing lap adhesive. All lap and butt strips shall have integral pressuresensitive strips and shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Closed cell polyethylene foam by IMCOA or equal may be used at Contractor's option provided it meets the above requirements.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 755 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 14 Plumbing
E. Insulation thickness’ shown below are based on insulation having a conductivity range of 0.24 to 0.28 per BTU/inch per hour per square foot per qF temperature of 100 degrees F.

Temperature Range: Above 105qF
Pipe Size Minimum Insulation Thickness
Run outs* up to 2” 0.5”
1” and less 1.0”

1.25” – 2” 1.0”

2.5” – 4” 1.5”
5” and larger 1.5”
*Run outs are defined as being less than 2-inches in diameter, less than 12 feet long, and connected to fixtures or individual terminal units.

F. Insulation materials not meeting the specified conductivity range shall be submitted for approval and determination of the insulation thickness required.

2.24 CIRCULATION PUMP: (DOMESTIC)
A. Provide pump(s) per schedule. Bell and Gossett, Grundfos, or Laing are considered equal.

2.25 AIR COMPRESSOR
A. Air Compressor unit shall be a factory-packaged assembly, including 3 phase, 208 volt motor controls, switches, wiring, accessories, and motor controllers, in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure. Tank-mounted air compressors shall be manufactured to comply with UL listing requirements. Air compressors shall have manufacturer’s name and address, together with trade name, and catalog number on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Each compressor shall start and stop automatically at upper and lower pressure limits of the system. Each compressor motor shall be provided with an across-the-line-type magnetic controller, complete with low-voltage release. An intake air filter and silencer shall be provided with each compressor. Aftercooler and moisture separator shall be installed between compressors and air receiver to remove moisture and oil condensates before the air enters the receiver. Aftercoolers shall be air type. The air shall pass through a sufficient number of tubes to affect cooling. Tubes shall be sized to give maximum heat transfer. Cooling capacity of the aftercooler shall be sized for the total capacity of the compressors. Means shall be provided for draining condensed moisture from the receiver by an automatic float type trap. Capacities of air compressors and receivers shall be as indicated.

Compressors shall be two-state, V-belt drive, capable of operating continuously against their designed discharge pressure, and shall operate and discharge pressure indicated. Compressors shall be tank mounted.

The compressor main bearings shall be either roller or ball. The discharge

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 756 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 15 Plumbing
passage of the high pressure air shall be piped to the air receiver with a copper pipe or tubing. A pressure gauge calibrated to 15- psi and equipped with a gauge cock and pulsation dampener shall be furnished for installation adjacent to pressure switches.

B. Air Receivers: Receivers shall be designed for 200 psi working pressure.

Receivers shall be factory air tested to 1-1/2 times the working pressure.

Receivers shall be equipped with safety relief valves and accessories, including pressure gauges and automatic and manual drains. The outside of air receivers may be galvanized or supplied with commercial enamel finish. Receivers shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME BPV VIII Div 1 and shall have the design working pressures specified herein. A display of the ASME seal on the receiver or a certified test report from an approved independent testing laboratory indicating conformance to the ASME Code shall be provided.

C. Intake Air Supply Filter: Dry type air filter shall be provided having a collection efficiency of 99 percent of particles larger than 10 microns.

Filter body and media shall withstand a maximum 862 kPa (125 psi), 125 psi, capacity as indicated.

D. Pressure Regulators: The air system shall be provided with the necessary regulator valves to maintain the desired pressure for the installed equipment. Regulators shall be designed for a maximum inlet pressure of 125 psi and a maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. Regulators shall be single-seated, pilot-operated with valve plug, bronze body and trim or equal, and threaded connections. The regulator valve shall include a pressure gauge and shall be provided with an adjustment screw for adjusting the pressure differential from 0 to 125 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work shall be brought to the attention of the Architect before the installation of materials. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Incorrectly installed materials requiring changes will be at Contractor's expense.

B. All plumbing fixtures, appliances, and appurtenances furnished with manufacturer's installation instructions shall be installed per those instructions.

3.2 PLUMBING SYSTEM LAYOUT
A. Lay out the plumbing system in careful coordination with the Drawings.

Determine proper elevations for all components of the system and use only the minimum number of bends to produce a satisfactorily functioning system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 757 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 16 Plumbing
B. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings in all cases except where other Work may interfere.

C. Lay out pipes to fall within partitions, walls, or roof cavities, and to not require furring other than as shown on the Drawings.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Pipe sizes as shown on drawings are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) or Iron Pipe Size (IPS). Drawings and fixture schedule indicate pipe sizing per the CPC and Standard Engineering Practice. Pipe sizes shall be maintained to fixtures, appliances and equipment. Approved reducing fittings shall be installed at all points of connections.

B. Install piping generally square with building, free of traps or air pockets, and true to line and grade. Keep all piping tight to the building structure, unless pipe slope is required. Do not install piping in any locations where, in the Architect's opinion, it will interfere with the use of the building or create a safety hazard. Where space is inadequate, notify the Architect in time to avoid unnecessary Work. Install all exposed piping as high as possible without interfering with other trades.

C. Make changes in direction with manufactured fittings; use long radius elbows. Street elbows, bushings, close nipples and bending of pipe or tubing will not be allowed.

D. Provide "P" traps at sanitary sewer drainage devices without integral traps.

E. Underground plastic pipe will horizontally transition to metal pipe 5 feet before the above ground riser. Install plastic pipe with a minimum of 36" of cover when located under areas of possible vehicle traffic. Approved metallic pipe must be used if the minimum depth is not met. A tracer wire, terminating at each end at an exposed location, will be installed with all underground plastic pipe.

1. Piping may terminate a maximum of one foot above ground when encased in a listed metallic transition riser.

F. Use friction wrenches when installing brass, polished, or soft metal piping, and when installing piping exposed in finished areas. Replace piping showing wrench marks.

G. Attach escutcheon plates to pipes with set screws or spring clamps with concealed hinges. Continue insulation through escutcheon plates.

H. Compressed air piping shall be adequately supported in a manner that eliminates all sags and bowing of the line. All horizontal runs shall be straight and sloped at 1% to the indicated drain. All branch or individual drop lines shall be taken off the top of their supply line.

I. General:

1. Proceed as rapidly as the building construction will permit.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 758 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 17 Plumbing

2. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt until fixtures are installed and final connections have been made.

3. Cut pipe accurately, and work into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing windows, doors, and other openings.

Excessive cutting or other weakening of the building will not be permitted.

4. Show no tool marks or threads on exposed plated, polished, or enameled connections from fixtures. Tape all finished surfaces to prevent damage during construction.

5. Provide sufficient swing joints, ball joints, expansion loops, and devices necessary for a flexible piping system, whether or not shown on the Drawings.

6. Support piping independently at pumps, coils, tanks, and similar locations, so that weight of pipe will not be supported by the equipment. Support the equipment independently from the pipe.

7. Pipe the drains from mechanical equipment, drip pans, relief valves, air vents and similar locations, to an open sight drain, floor drain, or other acceptable discharge point, and terminate with an air break or air gap per C.P.C.

8. Securely bolt all equipment, isolators, hangers, and similar items in place.

3.4 PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Support pipes from structure with assemblies specified. Provide auxiliary members, anchors, guides, and sway braces necessary to maintain pipe alignment and prevent excessive movement or strain on piping system or components; allow for expansion and contraction of piping. Provide at least one hanger for each branch. Do not use powder driven fasteners, wire, perforated tape, nails, wood blocking, or other makeshift devices to support pipe.

B. Attach supports to structure with bolts, screws or concrete anchors, per support manufacturer’s requirements.

3.5 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Cut pipe shall be reamed to full inside diameter of pipe. Cut threads straight and true. Insure all filings have been removed from inside of the pipe. Apply liquid Teflon to male pipe threads and not inside fittings. Use graphite on cleanout plug threads.

B. Joints in cast iron "No-Hub" soil/waste pipe and fittings shall be made up with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bands conforming to CISPI 310, torque to the manufacturer's specification with an approved torque

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 759 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 18 Plumbing
wrench. Joints in hub and spigot shall be made up with compression gaskets conforming to ASTM C-564.

C. Joints in copper tube shall be made with 95-5 tin-antimony or lead-free solder, applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions.

D. Dissimilar metals shall be isolated with dielectric couplings, "EPCO" or approved equal. Provide access panels at all hidden couplings.

E. All plastic pipe shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for their pipe and IAPMO Installation Standard per the latest edition of the C.P.C.

F. Pipe Protection: Provide protection against abrasion where copper tubing is in contact with other building members by wrapping with an approved tape, pipe insulation or otherwise suitable method of isolation.

G. Penetration Protection: Provide allowance for thermal expansion and contraction of copper tubing passing through a wall, floor, ceiling or partition by wrapping with an approved tape or pipe insulation, or by installing through an appropriately sized sleeve. Penetrations of fire resistance rated assemblies shall maintain the rating of the assembly

3.6 SANITARY SEWER, VENT AND INDIRECT WASTE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal drainage piping at a minimum 2%, condensate 1%, slope unless otherwise noted. Where this is impractical notify the Architect before installing the pipes.

B. Install vent piping to drain back into the sewer system.

C. Provide cleanouts where shown on Drawings and where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

1. All cleanouts to grade shall be firmly secured by means of a concrete block 20" square by 5" thick, and shall be flush with finished grade, unless otherwise noted on the plans.

D. Provide automatic trap primers as specified at floor sinks and drains as indicated on Drawings or where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Provide access panels for all hidden mechanical trap primers.

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Provide valves in the water and air systems. Locate and arrange so as to give a complete regulation of apparatus, equipment, and fixtures.

B. Provide valves in at least the following locations:

1. In branches and/or headers of water piping serving a group of fixtures.

2. On both sides of apparatus and equipment.

3. For shutoff of risers and branch mains.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 760 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 19 Plumbing

4. For flushing and sterilizing the system.

5. Where shown on the Drawings.

C. Locate valves for easy accessibility and maintenance. Provide access panels for all hidden valves.

D. Unions shall be installed downstream of all screwed valves.

3.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR INSTALLATION
A. Provide water hammer arrestor on hot and cold water lines.

1. Install at all quick closing valves, solenoids, and supply headers at plumbing fixture groups.

2. Locate and size as shown on Drawings, and where not shown, locate in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard WH-201.

3. Install water hammer arrestor behind access panels.

3.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTION INSTALLATION
A. Protect plumbing fixtures, faucets, hose connections, and other equipment having plumbing connection, against possible back-siphonage.

B. Arrange for testing of backflow devices as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

3.10 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Connect plumbing services to fixtures as shown on Drawings and as specified.

B. Provide & install compression stops and flexible supplies per fixture manufacturer’s recommendation or as high as possible on wall directly below fixtures.

C. Install fixtures at right angles to, and tightly against, building surfaces, and in proper alignment. Fill gaps between fixtures and building surfaces with white grout. Mounting heights and locations shall be as shown on the Drawings, or, if not shown, as directed by the Architect.

3.11 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Ensure surfaces are clean and dry surfaces to application of insulation or adhesives.

B. Insulate piping, fittings, valves, and strainers. Leave unions exposed.

Where insulation terminates, bevel ends of insulation and continue jacket over insulation and secure to pipe. Do not interrupt insulation at hangers, supports, clamps, or penetrations through structure. Fittings shall be finished with "Zeston" or approved equal fitting closures. If fitting closures not available, use 8 oz. canvas dipped in "Seal-Fas".

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 761 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 20 Plumbing
C. Attach longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips with factory applied pressure sensitive adhesive. On concealed piping only, outward clinching coated staples at two inch spacing may be used. Cover elbows with one piece polyvinyl chloride covers. Secure with tack fasteners. Tape ends of covers with matching tape on exposed piping. Seal off all cut ends with canvas and Benjamin Foster 30-36.

D. Install closed cell polyethylene foam per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.12 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Provide personnel and equipment, and arrange for and pay the costs of, all required tests and inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. See Section 23 00 13 for test requirements.

B. Where tests show materials or workmanship to be deficient, replace or repair as necessary, and repeat the tests until the specified standards are achieved.

C. Adjust the system to optimum standards of operation.

3.13 CLEANING (FOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS)
A. Disinfection: The hot and cold water distribution system shall be disinfected prior to being placed in service. The system shall be disinfected within 3 weeks of occupancy in accordance with AWWA C651 or the following requirements:

1. The piping system shall be flushed with potable water until discolored water does not appear at any of the outlets.

2. The system shall be filled with a water chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours. Or, the system shall be filled with a water chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 3 hours.

3. Following the standing time, the system shall be flushed with water until the chlorine is purged from the system.

4. Provide bacteriological sampling and analysis results to the Engineer for review.

3.14 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warranty all of the systems for proper operation installed by the contractor for not less than one calendar year from date of project completion. This completion date shall be set by the Architect or owner.

END OF SECTION 22 00 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 762 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 1 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning SECTION 23 00 00

HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section and apply to this Section.

2. Division 1 - General Requirements and Section 23 00 13 apply to the Work of this Section.

3. Where requirements of the Section exceed those in other Contract Documents, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.

B. Codes and Regulations:

1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations, the more stringent requirements will govern when so directed by the Architect.

C. Included: Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following.

1. The Work covered by this Specification shall include furnishing labor, material, equipment and services to construct, install and place in operation, the complete Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems to the extent as indicated, and as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The Work covered under this Section shall hereinafter be referred to as the Mechanical System.

2. A system of temperature controls shall be furnished and installed complete as hereinafter described. Low voltage wiring and conduit, complete with electrical accessories and materials as required for the installation of the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed under this Section of the Contract, but shall conform to the Specification requirements as set forth under Division 16.

3. Roof Top Gas Heat/Mechanical Cooling A/C Units

4. Gas Fired Furnaces

5. Fan Coil Units

6. Cooling Coils

7. Condensing Units

8. Heat Pump Units

9. Centrifugal Exhaust Fans and Roof Exhausters

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 763 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 2 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

10. Supply, return, and exhaust duct systems complete with grilles, registers and diffusers.

11. Filter and Filter Boxes

12. Duct, Pipe and Equipment Insulation

13. Space Temperature Controls

14. Refrigerant Piping

15. Fire Dampers

16. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers

17. Vibration Isolators
D. Work Not Included In This Section:

1. Blocking, framing and wood supports required for the purpose of accommodating the Mechanical System unless specifically called for under this Division. The contractor is responsible for the correct location of such items and shall bear the expenses covering their omission or improper location.

2. Electrical connections to motors, electric starters, disconnect and overcurrent protective devices, unless specifically called for by this Section, or unless the equipment is furnished as an integral part of the Mechanical System Equipment, as hereinafter specified or noted on the Drawings.

3. Line voltage electrical wiring and conduit, except where specifically called for on the Drawings or hereinafter in this Section.

4. Painting, except when supplied as factory finish, or specifically called for in this Section or on Drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. If the heating and/or air conditioning units are substituted with a different brand than that specified on the Drawings the Title 24 Calculation may have to be rerun. This re-calculation will cost $500.00 payable in advance to 3C Engineering, Inc. If the revision is required by the local Building Department to verify the Title 24 Report still complies as originally run.

B. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Section.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 764 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 3 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning C. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of the following to the Architect for approval prior to acquisition:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section including, but not limited to heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment and mountings, air distribution equipment, ductwork and fittings, flexible ductwork, flue vent pipe, duct specialties, flexible connections, insulation, lining and adhesive, duct joint sealer, temperature controls, piping and accessories.

2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. All pieces of equipment shall be clearly identified on corresponding manufacturer's literature being submitted.

3. Shop Drawings or other data as required to indicate method of installing and attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.

4. Submittals for entire Project shall be submitted at the same time or may be rejected until all are included in one submittal package.

5. Submittals shall be in PDF format.

1.4 DESIGN CHANGES CAUSED BY PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Contractor shall pay costs of design and installation for changes resulting from substitution of alternate products.

B. Acceptance of alternate products by Architect does not change this requirement.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT A. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: Equipment shall be as specified on the Drawings. All other equipment shall be pre-approved by the Mechanical Engineer.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that any substituted equipment performs similarly to that which is specified and fits in the same area as specified. Cost of any additional Work caused by the substitution of equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.

2.2 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A. Grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers and other accessory equipment shown on the Drawings and "Grille, Register and Diffuser Schedule" shall be manufactured by Titus unless shown otherwise.

B. Any substitutions of the above equipment which may be proposed by the Contractor shall be re-sized to suit his equipment by the proposed manufacturer and submitted in tabular form listing components proposed for each location in

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 765 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 4 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning the System, identifying each as to location, design, air quantity passing through the devices, pressure drop, noise criteria data, velocities of air leaving the device and "K" flow factors for each item. Manufacturer's data sheets showing dimensions and recommended method of installation for each component must also be included.

2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. In all other locations provide Greenheck model VCD-23, class 1 @ 4”wg as scheduled on plans. Damper frame shall be stainless steel, formed into a 5” X 1” structural hat channel. Blades shall be 16 gauge stainless steel strengthened by three longitudinal 1” deep Vee grooves running the entire length of each blade.

Blade seals shall be Silicone. Jamb to be flexible stainless steel compression type. The linkage shall be concealed in the frame out of the air stream, stainless steel material. The Axle shall be stainless steel. Bearings to be stainless steel.

Finish shall be Hi-Pro polyester power coated.

2.4 LOUVERS
A. 4" deep louvers, Greenheck, Model ESJ-401, or approved equal. Deflection blades shall be spaced on 4" centers having 1/2" high vertical baffle and an additional lateral center rain hood. The edges of louver blades shall be folded or beaded to exclude driving rain. Louvers blades shall be oriented to minimize the entrainment of rainwater. Louver blades, heads, sills, jambs, braces and mullions shall be made of aluminum. Louvers shall be provided with flanges.

B. Provide 1/2" aluminum bird screen on outside air intake louvers and 1/4" aluminum insect screen on combustion air louvers.

2.5 RECTANGULAR SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
A. Rectangular supply, return, outside air and exhaust ducts, single leaf dampers and plenums shall be fabricated from prime grade galvanized steel sheets of lock form quality and shall be constructed in accordance with appropriate tables of the latest ASHRAE "Guide and Data Book" and SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" handbook and Chapter 6 of the 2019 CMC.

B. Transverse Duct Joints shall be made with The Ductmate System. When using The Ductmate System, construction of the duct such as gage, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the latest addition of the applicable SMACNA standards.

With proper data, an equal may be submitted, providing the corners have a downset and corner clips to insure airtight integrity. Testing must be done by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The standard Ductmate 35 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate 25 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "F" connection. The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the latest manufacturer’s printed Assembly and Installation Instructions.

C. Each duct or plenum shall be diagonally cross-broken for rigidity.

D. Duct bends, fittings, transitions, etc. shall be fabricated in accordance with Fabrication Standards as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with latest SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" where not shown on Drawings.

E. Support ducts to joists or similar structural members. Except where indicated otherwise, ducts with a side of 24" or more shall be supported on Ductmate

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 766 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning trapeze duct hangers consisting of 2" high x 1-1/2" wide x 18" gauge channel and 3/8" diameter hanger rods hung from support brackets bolted to structural members. See also Special Fabrications as shown on the Drawings. Duct supports shall be eight (8) feet maximum on center.

F. At branch ducts, provide manually operated dampers of the type and arrangement shown on the Drawings, two gages heavier than the duct (if single leaf type) in which installed, and equipped with locking quadrants and closed end bearings.

G. Sizes shown on Drawings are net inside dimensions. Enlarge duct to accommodate lining.

2.6 ROUND DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. 2-10" w.g. round duct through 61" in diameter shall be United Sheet Metal spiral lockseam unseal duct, or approved equal, manufactured from galvanized steel meeting the ASTM A-527-71 in the following gages:

Diameter Metal Thickness
3-13” 26 ga.
14-23” 24 ga.

B. Round duct shall be new and exclusively obtained for this project. Each piece shall be in 20’ lengths. Ducts shall be cut to length required with joints only at fitting locations, except on duct runs longer than 20 feet.

C. Spiral duct and fitting connections, 15" diameter and larger shall be Ductmate Spiralmate round duct connectors. The connector system shall consist of two mating round duct connector flanges roll-formed from hot dipped galvanized steel with an integral sealant and closure ring roll-formed from hot dipped galvanized steel.

D. Fittings shall be United Sheet Metal galvanized fittings in the following gauges:

Diameter Metal Thickness
3-13” 24 ga.
14-23” 22 ga.

E. Spiral duct fittings must be manufactured as separated fittings and shall not be saddle taps, stubs or tap-in fittings tapped into spiral duct, nor may they be dovetailed tap-ins into pipe or fittings.

F. Reducers shall occur after a branch tap occurs on the main portion of the fitting.

Divided-flow fittings shall be used unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

G. Joints on ducts and fittings shall be covered and sealed with 4" wide, 6 oz. canvas saturated with Arabol lagging adhesive, or Hardcast DT tape in conjunction with Hardcast FTA-20, non flammable, non-toxic adhesive, or GlenKote duct sealer or other approved mastic type sealer. Duct tape will not be allowed. Where exposed to weather, paint lagging strips with two coats of silver enamel paint.

H. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with appropriate tables of the latest ASHRAE “Guide and Data Book” and SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 767 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 6 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Standards” handbook and Chapter 6 of the 2019 CMC. Duct gauges to be in accordance with 2.6.A and 2.6.D of this section.

I. At branch ducts, provide manually operated dampers of the type and arrangement shown on the Drawings, two gages heavier than the duct (if single leaf type) in which installed and equipped with locking quadrants and closed end bearings.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible air duct shall be Hart & Cooley Model F218. Duct shall consist of an inner core having two layers of polyester film encapsulating a steel wire helix surrounded by a blanket of fiberglass insulation and sheathed in a metalized polyester vapor barrier reinforced with fiberglass scrim. All air ducts shall be UL listed under the UL-181 standard as a Class 1 Air Duct also conforming to NFPA standards 90A and 90B. This air duct shall have a certified thermal resistance rating of R-8 in accordance with ASTM C518 at 750
F and carry the ADC
“Thermal Performance” seal.

B. Use only the minimum length required to make the connection. In no case shall any section of flexible duct exceed 5 feet in length.

C. Use two layers of UL listed 181 duct tape to connect flexible duct to the metal duct if flexible duct does not have S.M. collars.

D. The number of bends shall not exceed a combined total of 90 degrees. 90- degree bends will not be allowed at diffuser connections.

2.8 FLUE VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Type B double wall vent pipe with UL label shall be used for gas burning appliances, except gas wall furnaces and gas appliances with power burners.

Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Flues or vents shall terminate above the roof with flashing and a listed vent cap installed in accordance with its listing and the manufacturer's instructions. Flues or vents shall terminate as required per current CMC.

C. Vent cap shall be of the same manufacturer as the flue pipe.

2.9 DUCT SPECIALTIES
A. Damper Regulators and Bearings: Duro-Dyne "Specline" SR-Series or approved equal, lever type with matching end bearing. Regulator set shall include rubber gasket between regulator and duct, spring washer between core and housing, wedge pin, dial indicator and handle. Matching end bearing shall be closed end with rubber gasket:

Model Size
148 10” and Under
388 20” and Under
B. Access Panels: Access panels shall be located at all points where adjustable mechanisms are installed internal to or on the surfaces of the ductwork. Where adjustable mechanisms are concealed by walls or ceilings, "Elmdor" or approved equal access doors shall be installed. Size shall be suitable for convenient

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 768 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 7 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning servicing. Tile Walls: Doors and Frame: Stainless Steel. Other areas: recess type to receive ceiling or wall finish in order to provide "Blind Finish".

C. Fire Dampers: Fire dampers shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and/or required, and shall be of a type approved by the U.L. Laboratories, Inc. and the State of California Fire Marshal. Dampers shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions. Provide access door in duct at each fire damper such that damper is easily accessible.

D. Volume Dampers:

1. In rectangular ducts greater than 1.5 sq. ft., provide Pottorff Model CD42, or equal, factory fabricated opposed blade damper, 16 gauge blades, and brass bearings. Blade width shall not exceed six inches.

2. In rectangular ducts 1.5 sq. ft. and less, provide single leaf dampers as described in Section 23 00 00, 2.3 (a. and g.).

3. In round ducts 15" in diameter and less, provide shop fabricated galvanized sheet metal plate dampers. Plate shall be 18 gauge or shall be two even gauges heavier than duct; minimum thickness 22 gauge.

Provide stiffening beads at 1/3 points in dampers lighter than 18 gauge.

4. In round ducts 16" and greater, provide Pottorff opposed blade damper Model CD22R or approved equal.

5. In round ducts 4” – 24” in diameter, above “hard” ceilings, provide DuroZone Cable Operated Damper. Cable length to be between 3 and 15 FT long. Contractor to determine proper length to be use.

E. Provide 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal escutcheon plates at duct penetrations of finished building surfaces. Install tight against surface and securely attached to duct. Continue insulation through openings.

F. Duct Mounted Access Doors:

1. In rectangular duct provide, DuroDyne Model IAD, Ductmate "Sandwich", or equal, insulated, duct mounted access doors with Cam-Lock operated latches where shown on drawings or required for access to duct mounted equipment. Doorframe shall be 24-gauge with double wall door and 1/2" glass fiber insulation. Size doors to provide easy access to equipment.

2. In round ducts, provide Ductmate - METU round duct access doors, fully insulated, with attached gasket and springs between inner and outer door. Access doors shall be as large as practical as duct size will allow.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide fireproof, insulated, non-porous, flexible connections between fans and ducts or casings and where ducts are of dissimilar metals. For round ducts, securely fasten flexible connections by zinc coated steel clinch-type drawbands.

Flexible connections shall be DuroDyne "Insulfab" or "Insulflex" or approved equal.

B. Provide a duct support next to each flex connector to prevent any strain on connection.

2.11 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 769 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 8 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning A. HVAC systems rated at 2000 CFM or greater shall be equipped with a duct smoke detector to automatically shut off the HVAC system if smoke is detected.

B. The detectors shall be installed in the main supply duct downstream of any filters, in the main return air duct after the last terminal connection and the any exhaust duct after the last terminal before the fan.

C. The detector shall be System Sensor Innovairflex D4120 4-wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector. Provide with Factory NEMA 4 enclosure if mounted outside.

2.12 DAMPER ACTUATOR
A. Actuators shall be Belimo. Substitutions will not be acceptable. Actuator shall be direct coupled over the shaft, spring return type, unless specified otherwise

2.13 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for motor control specified. Mount starter adjacent to equipment. See electrical drawing. Maintain minimum of 3' clearance to front of device.

B. Motor Starters: Shall be NEMA I or III as appropriate, general purpose, weatherresistant, with watertight enclosure where required.

2.14 INSULATION
A. General: Insulation and lining material shall meet requirements of flame spread not to exceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by Procedure ASTM-E-84, NFPA 255 or U.L. 723 and shall conform to NFPA 90A and 90B.

B. Heating and cooling duct and related heating and cooling equipment insulation shall conform to 2015 Building Energy Efficiency Standards, Administrative Regulations, Title 24, Part I, Section 124, except to the extent that this Specification supersedes the minimum standards as established by the Code, in which case this Specification shall take precedent.

C. Unless noted otherwise, insulation shall be Fiberglass, or approved equal material. Application Work shall be performed in accordance with the best accepted practice of the trade and the manufacturer's recommendations. The performance of insulation Work shall be by experienced insulation applicators.

Insulation shall be installed after the specified tests have been applied to the piping and duct systems, and the systems have been inspected and approved.

Fiberglass trade names and/or numbers have been used to establish a standard of quality.

D. External Duct Insulation – Outdoors, in a space between the roof and an insulated ceiling, in a space directly under a roof with fixed vents or openings to the outside or unconditioned spaces, in an unconditioned crawlspace; or other unconditional spaces: Shall be applied to concealed heating and cooling, supply and return duct except duct that is internally lined. Insulation on duct shall be Manville Microlite FSK duct insulation, 3" thick, minimum installed R value of 8.0 or greater, FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass, scrim laminated to U.L. rated Kraft, or approved equal. Adhere to duct surfaces with Foster's 85-62 or approved equal, adhesive applied in strips of 6" wide on approximately 12" centers. Circumferential seams shall be butted together and sealed over joints

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 770 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 9 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning with 3" wide pressure sensitive foil vapor barrier tape. Longitudinal edges shall be lapped 2" and secured with outward clinching staple 6" on center then sealed with pressure sensitive foil vapor barrier tape. Duct wrap shall be installed to allow maximum fullness at corners (avoid excessive compression) minimum thickness at corners shall be 1". Where ducts are over 24" in width, the duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the rectangular ducts with mechanical fasteners spaced on 18" centers (Max.) to prevent sagging insulation.

E. External Duct Insulation – All other locations not listed above: Shall be applied to concealed heating and cooling, supply and return duct except duct that is internally lined. Insulation on duct shall be Manville Microlite FSK duct insulation, 2" thick, type 100, minimum installed R value of 6.0 or greater, FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass, scrim laminated to U.L. rated Kraft, or approved equal.

Adhere to duct surfaces with Foster's 85-62 or approved equal, adhesive applied in strips of 6" wide on approximately 12" centers. Circumferential seams shall be butted together and sealed over joints with 3" wide pressure sensitive foil vapor barrier tape. Longitudinal edges shall be lapped 2" and secured with outward clinching staple 6" on center then sealed with pressure sensitive foil vapor barrier tape. Duct wrap shall be installed to allow maximum fullness at corners (avoid excessive compression) minimum thickness at corners shall be 1". Where ducts are over 24" in width, the duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the rectangular ducts with mechanical fasteners spaced on 18" centers (Max.) to prevent sagging insulation
F. Internal Duct Insulation - Outdoors, in a space between the roof and an insulated ceiling, in a space directly under a roof with fixed vents or openings to the outside or unconditioned spaces, in an unconditioned crawlspace; or other unconditional spaces: Shall be applied to all heating and cooling supply and return duct and plenums on roof or where shown on Drawings. Manufacturer shall be Manville Microlite, or approved equal. Duct Liner shall be Linacoustic R, 2" thick, 1.5 pcf, with a "K" value of 2.2 in. for a total "R" installed value of 8 or greater. Insulation shall withstand velocities of up to 5000 FPM and temperatures up to 250 degrees F.

G. Internal Duct Insulation – All other spaces not listed above: Shall be applied to all heating and cooling supply and return duct and plenums where shown on Drawings. Manufacturer shall be Manville Microlite, or approved equal. Duct Liner shall be Linacoustic R, 1 ½” thick, 1.5 pcf, with a "K" value of 2.2 in. for a total "R" installed value of 6 or greater. Insulation shall withstand velocities of up to 5000 FPM and temperatures up to 250 degrees F
H. Portions of duct receiving Duct Liner shall be completed with transverse joints neatly butted with no gaps or interruptions. The duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with 100% coverage of adhesive and exposed leading edges and transverse joints coated with adhesive. Adhesive shall be a water based product.

In addition, this shall be secured with mechanical fasteners which shall compress the liner sufficiently in place. The liner shall be cut to assure overlapped and compressed longitudinal corner joints. Application procedures shall comply with the recommendations of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association's Duct Liner Application Standard, Second Edition.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 771 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 10 Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
I. External Duct Insulation Exposed to Weather: Shall be applied to heating and cooling supply and return ducts and plenums exposed to weather if not noted to be internally insulated. Insulation shall be Knauf Type ASJ, or approved equal, rigid board fiberglass, 3.0 # per cubic foot minimum density, 2" min. thickness,

8.0 min. R value. The board shall be neatly cut and fitted to the surface with joints tightly butted together and against standing seams. The insulation shall be secured to the duct with adhesive and mechanical fasteners starting 3" from butt joints and 18" on center each direction. Vapor-barrier tape shall be then applied over joints, seams, breaks and any penetrations of the insulation vapor barrier jacket. A weather-barrier mastic compound reinforced with fabric or mesh shall be applied as a finish coat. Finish by painting with two (2) coats of aluminum paint.

J. Ducts: Ducts shall be constructed, installed, sealed and insulated in accordance with the 2019 CMC. The above paragraph(s) shall supersede if more stringent.

2.15 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Temperature controls shall be furnished as indicated in schematic Drawing on Plans including room thermostats, relays and other necessary combustion, operating and safety controls.

B. Wiring and Conduit

1. Control wiring and conduit shall be the responsibility of this section and be installed as follows:
a. In equipment rooms/attics – Conductors shall be run in conduit.

Final connection to equipment shall be flexible conduit. b. Concealed in building construction (wall/inaccessible ceilings) - Conductors shall be run in conduit.
c. Roof mounted/exterior equipment yards – Conductors shall be in conduit. All flexible conduit shall be seal-tite with weatherproof connections. Equipment on grade and detached from the building a distance greater than 36” shall have underground control conduit routed to equipment.
d. Above accessible ceiling spaces – Control cable will be allowed to be installed without conduit in accessible areas above ceilings as follows:

1. Cable is an approved type for the application.

2. Cable is bundled/organized in management devices routed square with building lines (no diagonals) and kept clear of electrical devices (i.e., ballasts, transformers, etc.) that could cause interference.

3. Conduit sleeves are provided between accessible ceiling spaces (i.e., across soffits, gypboard ceilings, etc.) as required to maintain future access to cable.
e. Cable routed in accessible ceiling spaces shall comply with EIA/TIA standards for communications cabling. Communication

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 772 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 11 Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
bus wire shall be W183C-2058Y Connect Air, yellow shielded cable.

C. Electric wiring, conduit and other electric devices required to complete the installation of the temperature control systems shall comply with requirements as set forth in the Electrical Section of this Specification.

D. After completion of the installation, the Contractor shall adjust thermostats, motors and other equipment provided under this Contract. He shall place them in complete operating condition subject to approval of the Architect.

E. The Control System herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If, within twelve (12) months from date of acceptance by the Architect, any of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, it will be adjusted, repaired or replaced free of charge by the Contractor.

F. The final connections and supervision of control wiring and interlock wiring shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

G. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, the required number of shop drawings of the entire control system before starting Work.

H. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor will provide diagrammatic layouts of the Automatic Control Systems specified herein. Layouts shall show control equipment and the function of each item shall be indicated.

I. The temperature control system shall be installed by persons in the direct employment of the temperature controls manufacturer(s) exclusive contracting representative. The Mechanical Contractor shall not install the temperature controls unless pre-approved by the Mechanical Engineer.

2.16 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Refrigerant piping shall be flushed clean with nitrogen and the ends capped prior to installation. Refrigerant piping shall be Type L copper with wrought copper fittings. Use 45% minimum silver brazing alloy with melting point higher than 1100 F. for making the joints.

B. Insulate refrigerant suction line with 3/4" thick Owens-Corning Fiberglass or Armstrong Armaflex foamed plastic flexible tubing insulation applied with No. 500 adhesive. Use multiple layers and miter insulation to cover joints and all other items as required to prevent condensation.

C. VRF and Heat pump systems: Insulate all refrigerant lines with 3/4" thick OwensCorning Fiberglass or Armstrong Armaflex foamed plastic flexible tubing insulation applied with No. 500 adhesive. Use multiple layers and miter insulation to cover joints and all other items as required to prevent condensation.

D. When piping & insulation are installed outside of building, insulation shall be aluminum jacketed. Jacketing shall be minimum 0.016” thick, 3105 or 3003 alloy aluminum with moisture barrier & stucco embossed finish. Provide aluminum elbow covers at all pipe bends equivalent in construction to jacketing.

2.17 REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIES

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 773 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 12 Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
A. Stop valves shall be Henry Type 622, 500 psi pressure rating brass, soldered, packless diaphragm, globe shut-off pattern.

B. Solenoid valves shall be Sporlan Type MA14, 450 psi rating, brass body.

C. Filter dryer shall be Sporlan "Catch-All" with soldered connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the Work of those trades for interface with the Work of this Section.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Holes in concrete:

1. Provide sleeves, accurately dimensioned and shaped to permit passage of items of this Section.

2. Deliver such sleeves, with accurate setting drawings and setting information, to the trades providing the surfaces through which such items must penetrate, and in a timely manner to assure inclusion in the Work.

B. Flashing:

1. Where items of this Section penetrate the roof, outer walls, or waterproofing of any kind, provide under this Section base flashing and counterflashing required at such penetration.

2. Provide on each pipe passing through the roof a 4 pound seamless lead flashing and counterflashing assembly.

3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Conceal piping, ductwork, and equipment in spaces provided unless specifically shown otherwise. If spaces are inadequate, notify Architect in time to avoid unnecessary Work. Do not cut or notch structural members without specific approval of the Architect.

B. Follow manufacturer's instructions on items not specifically covered in drawings and specifications. Report discrepancies to Architect for clarification before starting Work.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INTERFACE
A. Provide required shut off valves, unions, and final connections of piping to the Work of this Section.

B. For electrically operated equipment, verify the electrical characteristics actually available for the Work of this Section and provide equipment meeting those characteristics.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 774 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 13 Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning

3.6 PAINTING
A. Paint inside of air outlets and connecting plenums with one coat of black paint, or provide all such items factory prepainted.

B. For roof-mounted equipment, provide factory pre-finish on exposed surfaces.

C. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK
A. Ductwork shall be delivered to the Project site with surfaces clean and free of loose dirt and rust. Special care shall be exercised by the Contractor to store the duct in a clean area to prevent the accumulation of dirt prior to installation.

Fabricated or partially fabricated duct sections shall not be stored in open fields or on dirt areas surrounding the construction site. Paved areas may be used, if available, provided adequate protection is provided to prevent the accumulation of dirt on duct surfaces. If possible, the Contractor should arrange to deliver duct to the project site and store on the floor of the area in which it is to be installed.

B. Before installation of ductwork, the Contractor shall inspect each section of duct and wipe internal surfaces clean. At the end of each Work period, or when ends of duct are left installed for future extension, the open ends shall be tightly closed off with a plastic sheet and taped securely to the open end of the duct.

C. Construct and install sheet metal in accordance with latest SMACNA recommendations. Provide variations in duct size and additional duct fittings as required and approved by the Architect at no extra cost to the owner.

D. The throat radius of bends shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Provide turning vanes in any mitered turn greater than 45 degrees.

E. Transition slopes shall be no less than one to five where space permits.

F. Abrupt offsets in the duct system greater than 30 degrees will not be allowed.

3.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROL INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring and tubing parallel to walls and floors and securely clipped to structure or mechanical system components. Group parallel runs for neat appearance.

B. Install room thermostats and other control devices at 48 inches above finished floor unless a lower mounting height is required for access by handicapped.

C. Install outside air sensor in a location where it is not directly effected by radiation from the sun or any heat generating device or by a conditioned air stream or any other location that would produce a false reading.

D. Upon completion of the installation calibrate all equipment and adjust controls for proper operation.

3.9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGING PROCEDURE
A. Pressurize the system with refrigerant and hold for 24 hours with no drop in pressure; test joints and equipment for evidence of leaks after satisfactory pressure test.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 775 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 14 Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
B. Provide 1/2" angle type charging and purging valves adjacent to high and low side of the condensing unit to accomplish the procedure described hereinafter.

Connect the vacuum pump to both the high and low side of the system. Do Work when ambient air temperature is above 60 degrees F during the evacuation process.

C. Operate the vacuum pump until the system is evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute.

Break the system vacuum with nitrogen or refrigerant.

D. After the system has been evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute, close the vacuum pump suction valve and stop the pump.

E. Charge system to required capacity with specified refrigerant.

3.10 CONTROL DEVISE IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Thermostats and Exhaust fan switches shall have labels mounted on or just above the control device labled with the equipment being controlled. As an example, for an exhaust fan controlled by a switch the lable would read “EXHAUST FAN # 1” or if a thermostat the label would read “AC-1”.

1. Labels shall be 2" x 1" x 1/8" thick Formica/plastic engraving stock beveled on both sides and with two 3/16" diameter holes near the top uppermost tag corners.

2. Labels shall be white with 3/8" high red engraved letters.

3. Labels shall be attached to the equipment with adhesive.

3.11 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warranty all of the systems for proper operation installed by the contractor for not less than one calendar year from date of project completion. This completion date shall be set by the Architect or owner.

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings covering duct systems, equipment and Mechanical Room piping systems. The drawings shall be prepared in 3/8" scale and shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to any fabrication.

In preparing the shop drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate the location of duct, piping and equipment with the Work of other trades.

3.13 MECHANICAL SYSTEM START-UP RESPONSIBILITY
A. Start up Mechanical Systems, and perform any such Work as may be required to adjust the systems to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Air distribution balancing shall be performed in accordance with Article "MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BALANCING".

B. Install new clean specified filters in equipment containing filters immediately prior to owner occupancy. Contractor to bear all costs for this work.

3.14 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BALANCING
A. Testing and air balancing shall be performed by an independent balancing company certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). Testing and balancing shall be

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 776 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 00 - 15 Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
performed by a company other than the mechanical system installers/contractor.

The name of the firm that the Contractor proposes to engage to perform this Work of balancing the system shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing the Work.

B. Conduct tests in presence of Architect/Engineer.

C. After Systems have been tested as outlined, air and water flow rates shall be balanced, and control devices adjusted. Balance and testing shall not begin until systems have been completed and are in full working order. Upon completion of the balancing operation and prior to final acceptance of the systems, the balancing firm shall submit a report, with six (6) copies, certifying to the proper performance of the system for approval by the Mechanical Engineer.

1. The following information shall be included in the Air Side Report:
a. Fan speeds.
b. Motor current readings and voltage readings.
c. Air quantities in CFM at supply, return, exhaust terminals, and outside air intakes, both at design value and actual measured value. Test and adjust each terminal to within +10% of design requirements.
d. Air velocities in FPM at supply, return, and exhaust terminals at design value and actual measured value.
e. Positive static pressure, negative and total pressures and total air quantities for each fan system.
f. Equipment nameplate data.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 777 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 1 General Mechanical Requirements
SECTION 23 00 13

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section.

2. Division 1 - General Requirements applies to the Work of this Section.

3. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other Contract Documents, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.

B. Codes and Regulations:

1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Included: Work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and System Balancing

2. Plumbing

3. Fire Protection

4. Carpentry and metal Work required for Work of this Section and not specifically shown under another Section. Openings in concrete or masonry construction shall be either core drilled or saw cut unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

5. Excavation and Backfill

6. Coordination Drawings
D. Related Work:

1. Painting (Division 9)

2. Cutting and Patching (Division 1)

3. Low voltage electrical control (Division 16)

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to job site in new condition.

B. Install: Receive and store at job site until required; place secure and connect; furnish required appurtenances.

C. Provide: Furnish and install as defined above.

D. Section: Refers to a Section of these Specifications.

E. Standards: The issue in effect as of the date of the contract documents.

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 778 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 2 General Mechanical Requirements
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections (Division 1).

1.4 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS
A. When Work of this Section requires temporary shutdown of existing systems for connections, the shutdown shall be made only during pre-arranged time agreeable to the Owner.

1.5 CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Mechanical Drawings are, in general, made to scale and the Contractor may obtain approximate distances and dimensions by scaling the Plans. It is distinctly understood, however, that it is done entirely at the Contractor's responsibility.

Refer to Architect's Plans and Specifications for construction details, which will affect the Work and equipment. Examine the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Landscape, Irrigation, Data, Fire Protection and Plumbing Plans and Specifications to ensure that this work does not conflict with the above trades. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Plans are diagrammatic and, therefore, do not necessarily represent the exact installation. However, pipe sizing for utility services and ductwork are calculated per their respective codes and Standard Engineering Practice and shall be installed as sized from point of origin to terminal point. It shall remain the Contractor's responsibility to submit Shop Drawings if he/she has any questions about the final arrangement. Nothing on these Plans or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all applicable codes and regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS PANELS
A. If not called for under other Sections, furnish Milcor, Elmdor, or Jay R. Smith access panels where shown on the Drawings or required for maintenance access to completed Work of this Section. Submit size, type, and location of proposed access panels not specifically shown, for review by Architect.

B. Access panels shall be constructed of 16 gauge prime coated steel or stainless steel with screwdriver operated cam latch, concealed hinges, and fire rating equal to adjacent construction.

C. Provide flush type doors with:

1. Stainless steel finish for tiled surfaces.

2. Prime coated finish for other surfaces.

2.2 FLASHING
A. Provide watertight flashing at all openings through exterior walls and roof. Refer to Architectural Drawings.

2.3 BELT DRIVES
A. All belts shall be "Vee" type, or approved equal. Sheaves shall be adjustable and shall be sized to drive fan at scheduled RPM when set at midpoint of adjustment range. All belt drive assemblies shall be rated at 150% of drive motor horsepower. OSHA approved belt guards shall be provided over all drive assemblies. The Contractor shall change any belts and drives as required to produce the specified CFM.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 779 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 3 General Mechanical Requirements

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL
A. All fans, heating and ventilating units, air conditioning units, blowers and similar equipment shall be securely mounted to and/or supported from the structure.

B. Isolate all bare water piping from structural members or hangers with "Trisolators" or submitted and approved equal insulating sleeves. Install hangers on outside of insulated jacket on all insulated lines.

2.5 WEATHERPROOFING
A. All equipment exposed to weather shall be protected by means of a suitable finish (i.e. paint). All fan cabinets, roof-mounted equipment, and ductwork shall be fabricated in such a manner to prevent leakage through seams and joints.

Water rated, exterior hoods shall be provided over motors, belts, and other devices to insure against damage by water. At all locations where pipes and/or ducts penetrate exterior walls, or roofs, suitable rain tight flashing shall be provided.

2.6 PIPE WRAPPING
A. All pipe, metal components, and joints buried in ground shall be primed and protected with 10-mil tape double wrapped or approved equal per IAPMO IS 13- 2006. Before tape application, all bare pipe and fittings to be wrapped must be coated with pipe wrap primer. Stretch first layer of tape to conform to the surface while spirally half-lapping, apply a second layer, half-lapped and spiraled as the first layer with spirals perpendicular to first wrapping. In lieu of tape wrap, heat shrinkable 10-mil minimum thick polyethylene sleeve may be used.

B. When applying tape, use only enough pull to cause the tape to properly conform to the irregular surfaces of the item. The proper amount of pull is reached when the tape surface is smooth without any wrinkles. Continue tape 4" above grade.

End overlaps should point down. Tape shall be applied per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2.7 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES
A. All Electric motor current characteristics are as shown in equipment schedules on drawings and as specified hereinafter in this Specification. The Contractor shall refer to the Electrical Plans and shall confirm all motor voltage, amperage and phase characteristics before processing submittals or ordering equipment. If any equipment is installed different from the supplied electrical power, it is the contractor’s responsibility to correct equipment to the required electrical characteristics.

B. All electrical devices of a type normally listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall bear U.L. label of approval.

C. Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for motor control specified. Mount starter adjacent to equipment. See electrical drawing. Maintain minimum of 3' clearance to front of device.

D. Motor Starters: Shall be NEMA I or III as appropriate, general purpose, weatherresistant, with watertight enclosure where required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 780 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 4 General Mechanical Requirements

3.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide neat appearance, required manufacturer’s access, and required space to allow replacement or maintenance. Provide bases, supports, anchor bolts, and other items required to install equipment. Installation shall be level and braced per CBC.

B. Equipment shall operate quietly and without objectionable vibration. Excessive vibration, other than from specified equipment operating at optimum conditions, shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be eliminated as directed by Architect.

3.2 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections to avoid conflicts. If required, provide shop drawings and submit to Architect for approval.

B. Insure that Work of other Sections is suitable to accommodate Work of this Section.

3.3 ADEQUACY OF FURRING
A. Conceal piping and ductwork in spaces provided unless specifically shown otherwise. If spaces are inadequate, notify Architect prior to ordering materials and fabrication of components.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect equipment from dirt, moisture, and mechanical damage during construction. Restore or replace damaged equipment to original condition.

B. Keep interior of piping and ductwork free of foreign material during construction.

Flush piping systems with test medium specified under Piping Tests before installing equipment and appurtenances or making final connections.

3.5 CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Do not conceal or cover Work before tests and observations are completed.

Uncover Work prematurely closed in and repair resulting damage to all Work, if requested by Architect, Engineer, or Project Inspector.

3.6 DAMAGE
A. Repair or replace items damaged by leaks or overflow from Work provided under this Section and for any damage to any part of the project site, for a period of 1 year after notice of completion date. This is in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the contractor under the Contract Documents.

3.7 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTING
A. Furnish all test pumps, gauges, and equipment. Test all safety controls and devices.

B. For air tests, install a calibrated test pressure gauge in the piping system to observe any loss in pressure. Calibrate the test pressure gauge with a dead weight tester within 15 days before use and certify by initial and date on a sticker applied to the dial face. Maintain the required test pressure for the time indicated.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 781 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 5 General Mechanical Requirements
Brush joints with a soapy water solution to check for leaks if the required pressure cannot be maintained.

C. After any test, repair all leaks found as directed and re-test as necessary until the system is proven tight.

D. Before applying test pressure to any piping systems, the Contractor shall be responsible for isolating all equipment e.g. control valves, regulators, relief devices, tanks and any other line accessories, which would otherwise be damaged by the test pressure.

1. Soil, Waste, Vent, Roof, and Condensate Drainage:
a. Entire System: Tightly close all openings except the highest one.

Fill to overflowing with water.
b. Sections of System: Tightly close all openings except the highest opening of the section under test. Fill section with water to test each section with a minimum 10-foot head of water except for the uppermost 10 feet of the system.
c. Allow to stand for (4) hours or longer, as required to complete the inspection.

2. Domestic Water: Fill with water and test at 150 psig. Retain for (4) hours.

3. Gas Piping: Air test to pressure equal to one and one-half times the design pressure, but in no case less than 50 psig. Retain for four hours.

4. Refrigerant: Pressurize the system with nitrogen to 150 psig and hold for 24 hours with no drop in pressure; test joints and equipment for evidence of leaks after satisfactory pressure test.

E. After all Systems have been tested as outlined, all flow rates shall be balanced, and all control devices adjusted. See Section 15600.

F. The equipment and installations shall be operated by the Contractor and he shall demonstrate that all Systems are performing according to the requirements of the Plans and Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Architect, Engineer and Owner.

G. Acceptance Testing Requirements: For applicable mechanical acceptance tests see the T24 plan sheets. All forms, regulations, and requirements are available online at www.energy.ca.gov/title24.

3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor shall do all cutting and patching which may be required for the installation of the Work under this Division of the Specifications. Patching shall be of the same quality, materials and finish as, and shall match accurately, all surrounding construction. No cutting of the Structure shall be permitted without the approval of the Architect.

B. Wherever concrete or paved surfaces are cut to provide for the installation under this Section, the Contractor shall restore the surfaces to their original condition.

Subgrade materials, concrete, and paving materials, along with the placement of

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 782 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 6 General Mechanical Requirements
same, shall be in accordance with the respective Sections of this Specification as they apply to the installation of such material.

3.9 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: (BURIED PIPES WITHIN THE BUILDING WALLS AND TO 5 FEET FROM THE BUILDING.)
A. Dig trenches straight and true to line and grade; bottom shall be left smoothed of rock points. Pipe shall be supported for the entire length on undisturbed, original earth. The minimum trench width shall be 16" and all pipe shall be 2 feet below the finished grade, minimum, wherever conditions permit. Sewer pipes to be below grade a s necessary to meet the slope and invert on the Drawing.

Whenever substantial variations of pipe bury is indicated by field conditions, the proposed changes in depth of bury shall be submitted, in writing, to the Architect for approval.

B. All piping shall be laid on a bed of clean dry sand not less than 6" thick. The space between the pipe and the sides of the trench shall be backfilled with clean dry sand to a point 6" above the crown of the pipe. Both sides of the pipe shall be filled at the same time.

C. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled with native soil in lifts no greater than 12" and shall be mechanically compacted by tamping so to maintain a minimum relative dry density of 95%, determined by California Impact Test Method No. 216.

D. All backfilling shall be brought flush with finished subgrade.

E. Excess material shall be removed from the site. Trenches shall be backfilled immediately after approval.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
A. The installation of piping, ductwork, and equipment shall be made in such a manner to clear beams and obstructions. Do not cut into or reduce the size of plates or any load carrying members without approval of the Architect. Check Drawings and Work of others to prevent interference. Deviations of the Work determined by the Architect shall be installed by the Contractor without additional cost.

B. Install piping and ductwork promptly, cap or plug open ends of pipe. No piping shall be permanently covered by construction before inspection and approval.

Piping and ductwork shall be installed in accordance with best practice and recommendations of the manufacturer.

C. Conceal piping and ductwork unless indicated otherwise. Inspect each piece of pipe, tubing, fittings, and equipment for defects and obstructions. Remove defective material from site. Install piping generally level, free of traps and unnecessary bends to conform with building requirements, and provide space for other work. Piping to be free of unusual noises. Avoid any possible galvanic action by isolating dissimilar metals with suitable Dielectric Insulating Fittings.

D. Unless called for otherwise, hereinafter in this Specification or by specific detail on the Drawings, all water pipes in contact with structure and/or hangers shall be suitably isolated. In the case of uninsulated pipe, "Trisolators" or equal shall be used.

E. Protect enameled or polished equipment from damage, tool marks, etc.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 783 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 7 General Mechanical Requirements

3.11 STERILIZATION OF PIPES
A. After preliminary purging of the Systems, the entire domestic potable water system pertaining to Work under this Contract shall be chlorinated in accordance with American Water Works Association, State of California Health and Safety Code procedure for disinfecting water mains. A thorough flushing operation shall be run upon completion of sterilization. Contractor shall then arrange with local health authority for test on mains and water systems and provide three (3) copies of test results to the Architect.

3.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Major pieces of equipment shall include, but are not limited to: water heaters, air conditioners, unit heaters, supply and exhaust fans, and shall be tagged.

1. Tags shall be 2" x 2" x 1/8" thick Formica/plastic engraving stock beveled on both sides and with two 3/16" diameter holes near the top uppermost tag corners.

2. Tags shall be white with 3/8" high red engraved letters.

3. Tags shall be attached to the equipment with bolts, screws or chains as per valves.

4. Tags shall have the following information:
a. Equipment number and nomenclature corresponding to the information on the mechanical contract drawings.
b. Examples:

WH EF AC
1 2 3

3.13 SEISMIC BRACING
A. It shall be required that pipes, ducts and conduits be supported and braced per the SMACNA "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems", 1998 Edition.

B. When the SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" does not specifically address the size of duct or pipe to be braced, the following shall apply:

1. All ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing to the satisfaction of the Architect, Engineer, and State Inspector.

2. All pipes shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing to the satisfaction of the Architect, Engineer, and State Inspector.

Absolutely, no "Plumber's Tape" shall be used anywhere on this project.

C. The SMACNA Manual can be obtained through SMACNA (VA) at (703) 803- 2989. Contractor shall obtain manual prior to the start of any work.

3.14 OPERATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish competent Technicians to supervise start-up operations of equipment specified by the Architect or Engineer and to instruct

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 784 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 00 13 - 8 General Mechanical Requirements
Owner's operators. The Contractor shall furnish six complete sets of operating instructions and service manuals to the Architect.

B. Instruction period shall be started after instruction books and service manuals have been submitted to and approved by the Architect and shall be at hours (regular and non-regular) arranged by the Architect.

C. Service manuals shall include oiling, cleaning, and servicing data, compiled in clearly and easily understood form and in a durable binder. Data shall show all serial numbers of every piece of equipment and complete list of replacement parts.

3.15 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warranty all of the systems for proper operation installed by the contractor for not less than one calendar year from date of project completion. This completion date shall be set by the Architect or Owner.

END OF SECTION 23 00 13

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 785 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 1 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
SECTION 23 25 16
Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
PART 1 - General:

1.1 SCOPE:

A. The bidder shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary, to put in working operation a complete system to remove both diesel and automotive exhaust gases, and particulate of operating vehicles within the confines of specified fire station(s). All necessary controls, fan, ductwork, labor and all other equipment and materials specified shall be part of the bidder’s work.

B. All items of equipment and materials described in these specifications are to be furnished installed and placed into proper operating condition in accordance with good practice and manufacturer’s written or published instructions.

C. All workmanship and materials shall be in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. I.e., SMACNA, BOCA, NEC, ASTM, UBC, UMC, NFPA, AMCA and IMC. Such codes and regulations are to be considered part of these specifications.

D. The bidder shall warranty all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the completed job, against original defects of material and workmanship, improper or insufficient maintenance, excessive wear and deterioration. Repairs shall be made at the bidder’s expense.

E. Bidder shall install a complete automatic disconnect Diesel Exhaust Removal System, that addresses the problem of diesel fumes in the fire department station house that will not interfere with normal day-to-day operations. The system shall be a Plymovent Sliding Balancer Track type system and Plymovent VSRX Rail type system that has the following performance criteria.

1. The exhaust removal system must provide approximately 100% complete evacuation of all diesel fumes at the source from start up to exit of the apparatus from the fire station. The diesel exhaust removal system shall be capable of reaching to the undercarriage of the vehicle tailpipe located anywhere from 10 to 75 feet away from the exiting door. The system must be able to accommodate drive through and back in bays to meet all the needs of the fire department.

2. The system must not affect personnel boarding the apparatus.

Hose loops shall not hang any lower than seven feet from the bay floor. The hose assembly shall not touch or drag on the bay floor.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 786 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 2 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System

3. The exhaust system shall not block doorways, exits, and aisles in the apparatus bay, which could endanger the welfare of fire personnel visitors.

4. To protect the apparatus electrical system from any possible damage, the system bid shall not incorporate any type of electromagnetic device that requires the apparatus to be utilized as and electrical ground for the systems operation.

5. Due to the harmful effects of diesel exhaust, the system must be designed and capable of capturing approximately 100% of the exhaust gas and particulate even in the event of a complete power failure. The system shall not detach itself from the apparatus for any reason during a power failure other than normal exiting of the apparatus bay. No exception to this requirement will be allowed.

6. Vehicle must be able to perform pump checks while connected to the system and capture approximately100% of the diesel exhaust.

7. Connection of the system to the vehicle must be made from a standing position. No exception to this requirement will be allowed.

8. Manufacturer must be I.S.O. 9001 certified

1.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS:

Equipment and materials provided for the system installation shall be a standard product of manufacturer’s currently engaged in the manufacturing of automatic vehicle exhaust removal systems. Where the requirement calls for a packaged exhaust system to be provided, all items shall be the product of the manufacturer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

All workmanship, manufacturing procedures, airflow design, and materials shall be performance guaranteed. If any findings or test studies reveal improper materials, defective components or inadequate performance as outlined in the performance/technical specifications, the bidder shall remove and replace the materials in question.

1.4 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY:

The bidder shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance of the
completed job against original defects of material and workmanship, or excessive wear or deterioration. Defects shall be made good at the bidder’s expense with no cost or obligation to the Owner.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

The bidder shall be solely responsible for the delivery, storage, and handling of all products. Any equipment placed in storage shall be protected from weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 787 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 3 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System

1.6 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS: Bids will only be accepted from companies that have an established reputation in the field of manufacturing and installing Diesel Exhaust Removal Systems. The bidder must be established in the business of Diesel Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less then eight- (8) years.

Bidder shall show proof that their system has been field tested and proven by supplying a list of not less than 10 fire department references (3 within the state the municipality is going to bid) to include a phone number and contact name.

Bids will only be accepted from companies that have a local (within 100 miles of the job site) inventory of spare parts (a minimum of $10,000) and factory certified and trained service technicians to perform the required service maintenance and to ensure there is no interruption if field service due to a lack of certified parts locally.

Any company offering a bid including a manufacturer other than the one specified is required to have a written letter from the owner stating the substitute manufacturers product is considered an equal. This letter must be signed by the owner, and dated a minimum of 30 days prior to the bid date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. PlymoVent Corporation/Plymovent Industrial Ventilation Systems or approved equal.
115 Melrich Road
Cranbury, New Jersey 08512
USA Toll Free: (800) 644-0911
FAX: (609) 655-0569
WEB: [email protected]

B. LOCAL CONTACT
Air Exchange, Inc.
495-A Edison Ct.

Fairfield, CA 94534
Contact Name: Chris Koss
Toll Free: (800) 300-2945
Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]
A. Substitution: Under provisions of Section_______.

B. Any company offering a bid including a manufacturer other than the one specified is required to have a written letter from the owner stating the substitute manufacturers product is considered an equal. This letter must be signed by the owner, and dated a minimum of 30 days prior to the bid date.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 788 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 4 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
C. Any company offering a bid including a manufacturer other than the one specified is required to have submitted that manufacturer’s product submittals to the architect for approval 10 days prior to the bid date.

2.2 AIR MOVING DEVICES:

A. Centrifugal Fans:

The fan shall be a direct drive centrifugal type, high pressure, single width, single inlet as required or indicated. Impeller wheels shall be of a radial design for high static pressure performance. Impeller wheels shall be spark resistance and made of aluminum material to prevent static electricity build up. The impeller shall be dynamically and static balanced, and of the non-overloading type to provide maximum efficiency while achieving quiet, vibration-free operation.

The fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame for durability in any type of weather conditions. The base shall have four (4) pre punched openings at bottom of fan base for field attachment to either an exterior wall or roof structure.

B. Fan motor and bearing:

All 1 to 10 horsepower motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The bearings shall be self-aligned, ball bearing type permanently sealed and lubricated. Fan shafts shall be steel and rotate in a nonsparking TEFLON seal to prevent hot gases coming in contact with the motor bearings. The exhaust discharge outlet shall be in compliance with ACGIH recommendations and EPA requirements (min. of 40 ” above roofline). Air intakes, windows, cascade systems, prevailing currents, communication equipment and building aesthetics shall be considered in the final location of the fan. Silencers shall be provided when fan sound decibels exceed 64 Dba.

C. Performance:

The Fan Capacity shall be sized as such as to deliver the required CFM at each hose drop the vehicle engine exhaust (based on an airtight connection at tailpipe), lengths of ductworks, elbows, branches, shut down. wyes, etc. which accumulate the static pressure at the field inlet.

The manufacturer’s provided fan(s) shall be performance guaranteed.

2.3 ELECTRICAL CONTROLLERS:

A. Controller type:

The controller shall be manufactured and delivered as an Operating System with one series controller manufactured by the bidder or an equal to the specifications to follow.

B. Electrical controllers:

The electrical controller offered shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as a complete electrical system for enclosed industrial control panels.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 789 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 5 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
No exceptions.
(1) Electrical controllers shall be UL listed/approved and manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard
UL-508 enclosed industrial control panels. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed as Type 12. The electrical enclosure shall be provided and mounted in an electrical enclosure to restrict access to internal components of controller by only authorized entry.

C. Electrical Contactors:

Contactors shall be Allen Bradley Industrial Electrical Contactors, provided with the appropriate adjustable overload relays to meet the proper full load amperage of motor that is outlined in these specifications. The contactor shall conform to the following standards: BS-5424, VDE0660, and be approved by UL Certification as an approved component.

D. Control Transformer:

Shall be UL listed industrial control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fuse blocks. Transformer shall be provided with multi-tap primary 208V through 480V, AC, and 24V through 120V secondary.

E. Electrical Timer:

Shall be solid state five- (5) minute adjustable timer. The operating logic shall complete this cycle. Input voltage shall be applied to the timer at all times. Upon closure of a normally open isolated start switch, the load energizes and remains energized as long as the switch is closed. When the start switch opens, the timing cycle shall start. At the end of the preset time delay, the load de-energizes and the timer is ready for a new timing cycle. Timer shall be a UL recognized component under file number E65038.

F. Engine Start Switch:

Shall be of an engine pressure sensing type, capable of recognizing the output pressure of any type of motor vehicle exhaust. The electrical contact shall be dry type or not to exceed 24V.

G. Electrical Wiring:

Shall be run in wire channel to allow for easier identification of wiring circuit and appearance. All wiring circuitry shall meet UL listed for proper bending radiuses and terminations.

H. Electrical Terminal Block:

Shall be 600 V, UL rated and recognized. It shall provide individual connection points for remote controls, power and motor connections.

I. Electrical Wiring Schematic:

Shall be provided with each electrical control box supplied. Wiring schematic shall show internal circuitry as well as all primary and secondary connections to the controller.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 790 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 6 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System

2.4 DUCTWORK SYSTEM:

A. Ductwork type and materials:

Shall be UMC class 2 or SMACNA class 11 product conveying. It must meet or exceed criteria for construction and performance as outlined in Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA. Materials of construction unless otherwise specified for all ductwork and fittings shall be a minimum G-90 galvanized sheet metal in accordance with ASTM-A525 and A527. Only when specified, type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A240 shall be provided.

B. Ductwork sizing and gauges:

All ductwork subject to positive or negative pressure shall be of round, spiral pipe construction, with the range of available sizes not to exceed 20 inches in diameter. Duct gauge shall depend on diameter and a minimum operating pressure of 8 inches water gauge. Acceptable gauge and reinforcement requirements shall be in accordance to the following. Inner duct diameter 4" - 13" dia. shall be 26 gauge standard spiral pipe and 14" - 20" dia. shall be 24-gauge standard spiral pipe.

C. Ductwork Fittings:

All exhaust fittings shall be round and have a wall thickness 2 gauges (one even gauge number) heavier than the lightest allowable gauge of the downstream section of duct to which they are connected. Air duct branch entrances shall be fabricated fittings or fabricated duct/tap assemblies. Fittings shall be constructed so that air stream converge at angles no greater than 45 degree. All seams shall be spot welded and if necessary, internally sealed to insure airtightness. Tapered body fittings shall be used manifold. No exceptions.

D. Ductwork Design Velocities:

Shall be a minimum of 3000 feet/minute transport velocity at 275 cubic feet/per minute volume in metal ductwork at riser clamp which is the standard for design.

E. External Ductwork:

Shall be sized for the exact inlet and outlet of the exhaust fan blower. If the fire station is exposed to unusual inclement weather, unusual levels of acid rain or is within 3 miles of saltwater, stainless steel shall considered for all exterior duct work components. An exhaust rain cap shall be supplied and manufactured in accordance with EPA standard for free draft rain cap requirements. Included as an integral part of this rain cap shall be a back draft damper to provide protection from rain and other inclement weather or air.

F. Exhaust Penetrations:

All penetrations through exterior assemblies shall be flashed and sealed to prevent water from entering the building.

2.5 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT:

A. Scope of System Operation:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 791 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 7 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
The vehicle exhaust removal system shall capture approximately 100 % of the exhaust emissions directly at the tailpipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to a specified area safely outside the building. The operating controller shall be designed to complete this cycle. A pneumatic operated collection nozzle shall be connected to the motor vehicle’s exhaust tailpipe, when the vehicle is started by the driver, the exhaust fan will automatically energize and vent the toxic gases directly to the outside of the building. This automatic feature shall be achieved by means of a pressure sensor located inside the exhaust ducting; this pressure sensor shall sense the engines output pressure upon the first stroke of the engine piston and energize the fan starter. The automatic controller shall use an adjustable timer to keep the contactors energized for a designated period of time. Should the operating vehicle not exit the station within the designated preset time period the manual run button on the OS-3 control panel must be engaged, this will keep the fan running while the vehicle is running and must be turned off manually via stop button on OS-3 control panel. The pneumatic connection device shall stay connected to the vehicle tailpipe as it travels to the exit door in a pre-engineered track/rail system. The track/rail shall be securely attached to the building structure and supports a flexible hose assembly that moves with vehicle inside the station. As the vehicle nears the exit door, the pneumatic nozzle connection located at the tailpipe shall tension release automatically therefore releasing the nozzle from the tailpipe. This shall be accomplished by means of uncoupling valve, balancer and end stop strategically located on the track/rail. After the system releases the vehicle tailpipe at the door, it shall retract passively and smoothly into a convenient storage position. When the vehicle returns to the station, a system operator manually pulls the flexible hose assembly to the entrance door. The system operator holds the pneumatic connection device approximately 18” from the floor and at the door threshold. The system operator, without bending over, attaches the pneumatic connection device just inside the door threshold as the vehicle enters the station, at which time the exhaust fan motor energizes. The vehicle driver momentarily stops the vehicle when the tailpipe is just at the door threshold (a backup man will notify the driver when it is time to stop the vehicle).The system operator, standing straight up shall slide the connection device up against a flanged adapter attached to the vehicle tailpipe. The cycle is completed as the exhaust fan starts and vents the toxic gases with the magnetic connection nozzle firmly attached to the vehicle exhaust pipe. The vehicle then proceeds to its designated resting position.

B. Sliding Balancer Track Material:

The sliding track shall be a one-piece continuous extruded aluminum track in a minimum length of 20 feet. The construction profile shall be of a boxloc type profile, which shall adhere to the following dimensions. Track height 3 1/8”, width 1 1/2”, thickness 1/8”. The track material shall be aircraft aluminum alloy type AA-06063. The aluminum track shall be an extruded design that shall incorporate three separate and functioning channels. The three channels shall be for the following, mounting channel, trolley channel and the boxloc channel. Each of these sections performs a specific function to make the system work effectively.

The mounting compartment shall be designed to accept the slider bars (which shall be provided with factory supplied vertical legs and riser clamp duct connection) and allow positioning along the full length of the slotted track

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 792 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 8 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
mounting channel. The trolley channel shall allow the trolley/balancer/hose assembly to glide to the door threshold in a safe and effective manner. The boxloc channel shall allow the whole track to remain rigid as it hangs from factory supplied leg supports and also shall provide an area to attach bolts for splicing additional tracks together for systems over 20 feet long. The overall extruded track lengths shall be 20 foot standard and weight no more than 35 lbs. The track system shall be equipped with end stops that limit travel of flex hose as the vehicle exits the building. The end stop shall be fabricated of zinc plated steel in a U shape form, with a rubber end stop on the impact end. It shall be attached by using a 1/4” molded locking bolt. The end stop shall be secured to the track with no loss than (2) 1/4” bolts and locking nuts located on the underside of the track.

For security, a 1/4” bolt shall be drilled through the ends of each track system to insure that the trolley/balancer assembly(s) roll no further than the end of the track system.

C. VSRX Rail Material:

Model: VSRX-70. Shall be constructed of a one-piece continuous extruded aluminum rail in a minimum length of 19 feet (5.79 m). Construction Profile:

Rectangular profile, rail height of 10 inches (254 mm) including the rubber seals, rail thickness of 0.20 inch (5 mm), width of 8-½ inches (216 mm) ID. Bottom Portion of Rail: Continuous slots to accept a rubber seal. Rubber Seals: Fitted into each side of the rail and shall join in the middle. Rail Material: Aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 (ASTM B209/B209M). Rail: Extruded as a one piece design unit to maximize the structural integrity of the rail and to minimize joints which may add to possible leakage of dangerous exhaust gases.

D. Support Legs:

Support legs shall be manufactured and provided by the supplier of the primary exhaust removal system. (Equipment Manufacturer). This is to ensure that the unit is installed as a complete system including the mounting hardware. Support legs are 2” x 2” aluminum cut to proper lengths during installation work.

Adjustable mounting bracket kit consists of two brackets to be thru bolted to leg stock. Side bracket kit comes with clamp for leg stock and two side braces for lateral and longitude bracing. Approximately one support left every ten feet. The angle shall be completely adjustable to the leg support and mounted perpendicular and parallel to direction of the track. The typical support angle shall be 45 degrees from the center line of the factory provided support leg. The standard leg shall be capable of meeting a Seismic 4 requirement.

E. Double Track Joiner Plate:

Should the exhaust removal system require a double track type system due to the length of the apparatus bays, the tracks shall be attached in the following manner. The joiner plate shall be constructed from a minimum of 1/4 ” thick zincplated material and be designed to connect two parallel tracks to make a double track system to accommodate an apparatus bay over 40 feet in length. The joiner plate shall be 10” x 8” flat zinc-plated steel and designed to attach the two tracks to a single factory supplied support leg. The steel plate shall have (6) 3/8” holes drilled 6 7/8” apart to accommodate the slider bar provided with factory support legs. The joiner plate shall have two slider bars attached to the plate and shall be located on the outside edges of plate, these slider bars shall fit into

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 793 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 9 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
the boxloc track mounting channel for a simple and secure attachment of the plate to boxloc track. The center portion of the joiner plate shall provide attachment for the factory supplied support leg.

F. Track Splicing Assembly:

The track splicing assembly shall be fabricated for the sole function of connecting two extruded aluminum boxloc sliding tracks end-to-end. Track splice shall be manufactured of galvanized steel in two parts and utilized as a clamping device.

This clamp shall accurately secure both tracks together in a fashion, which shall eliminate any possibility of obstructing the trolley assembly as it passes through this connection point of track system. Connecting length of splice shall be a minimum of 15 3/4" long and fabricated of 14 gauge material. Four 1/4" bolts with lock nuts shall pass directly through internal partition of boxloc track. The splicing sleeve shall fit externally around the outside dimension of extruded aluminum track profile.

G. Riser Clamp Assembly:

The riser clamp shall be fabricated as a one piece welded assembly and manufactured to create the transfer of the hard spiral pipe joined at the top and flexible duct connection at the bottom. The riser clamp shall be pre-drilled to mount an air regulator assembly for the pneumatic nozzle and to accept airlines that pass through airtight seals mounted to riser pipe. A slider bar and associated hardware shall be provided with riser clamp assembly. Sizes of the riser clamp will range from 3" - 6” diameter to match the output velocity of the vehicles that will park in that station.

H. Accutrack Trolley / Balancer Assembly:

The trolley assembly shall be manufactured as a two piece galvanized steel assembly including bumper stops at each end. Fixed to the side of the trolley are solid steel pins, which shall be for load carrying bearings that are sealed and permanently lubricated. The Load carrying bearings shall travel internally in track trolley channel. Two additional permanently lubricated trolley wheels shall be provided on bottom side of the track to reduce wobble of trolley as it conveys the hose assembly to the door threshold. A release plate shall be attached to the chassis of the trolley to smoothly energize the uncoupling release valve when the trolley-balancer assembly approaches the door threshold. The system balancer assembly shall be a self-adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a lifting capacity of no less than 31 Lb. The balancer shall have a minimum diameter stainless steel cable of .080 and a safety link connection. The system supplier shall manufacture the balancer and trolley for the sole purpose of conveying the flexible hose to the door threshold for automatic release of the system. Only a stainless steel balancer cable will be accepted. No exceptions.

I. Regulator Assembly:

The regulator assembly shall be constructed of cast aluminum and refinished with black epoxy coating for durability. The regulator shall safely operate with an in-put pressure of 0 - 200 psi; the output pressure shall be preset at 15 psi. The regulator shall be attached to each Riser Clamp Assembly/Hose Drop or to the boxloc track to allow for independent adjustment of each

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 794 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 10 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
pneumatic nozzle. The regulator shall also be provided with needle type adjustment gauge that is clearly marked with the proper operating range of system, and which can be visibly read from standing on the bay floor.

J. Uncoupling Valve Assembly:

Shall be provided to activate the release of the pneumatic nozzle connection located on vehicles exhaust pipe. The valve shall be single direction action and affixed to a mounting bracket, which can be easily positioned and adjusted along the full length of the extruded aluminum track profile. The mounting bracket shall be formed from a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel and designed to fit snugly over the top of the boxloc track system. A 1/2 ” opening shall be centered to the top side of bracket to accommodate a 1 ” x 1/2 ” bolt with a 1/2 ” plated 1 1/2” long bar providing the secure attachment of Uncoupling Valve when system is put into service. The release valve shall be set for the maximum exiting speed of the vehicle.

K. Upper Flexible Hose:

Hose shall be flexible exhaust hose manufactured for the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases, which are produced by internal combustion engines. The flexible hose shall be designed strictly for the harsh environment of rapid response and auto-release of a vehicle exhaust tailpipe. Hose shall range from 3” - 5” diameters with varying lengths depending on the system length required ranging from 20 - 43 feet without joining or splicing connections.

Hose material shall be high temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high temperature laminated fabric with a minimum overlapping thickness of 2 7/16”.

This construction of hose must be capable of operating at continuous temperatures of 400 degrees F and intermittent temperatures of 500 degrees F such as are experienced when pump checks are performed inside the station.

Independent testing by a recognized UL laboratory must accompany this bid as proof of performance claim. Wire Helix shall be bound and protected in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion, which eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with an exposed hot metal helix. The hose shall further protect the internal wire helix from heat buildup and in turn add increased visibility to personnel. Wear strip shall be 9/16” wide and be provided as a safety yellow color. The bend radius of the high temperature hose shall be no lesser then 1.5 times the diameter of hose to insure that hot gases be restricted as they pass through the system.

L. Lower Hose Assembly:

Shall be a rigid 3”-5" diameter by 2 foot long section of yellow and black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose assembly. Lower hose shall support the pneumatic connection nozzle and chrome reducing elbow in a rigid fashion as to allow for the operator to place hose collection nozzle onto the tailpipe without bending over. Lower hose is the only section of hose which shall disconnect from the upper hose assembly and act as a safety disconnect in the unlikely event the nozzle gets entangled.

M. Safety Disconnect Coupling:

A coupling shall be incorporated in the design of the system enabling the lower two foot hose assembly to separate from the upper hose assembly thus

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 795 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 11 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
reducing the possible chance of damage to system, in the unlikely event the exhaust connection nozzle assembly may become entangled. This device shall consist of two spun aluminum collars connected by an ergonomic round handle.

The release tension of this device shall separate the two at no greater than 88 Lb. This is considered a safety requirement and any system bid must incorporate a safety disconnect. No Exceptions.

N. Collection Nozzle Assembly:

The nozzle shall provide a substantially air tight seal around exhaust tail pipe when connected thus allowing for 100% source capture. The seal shall not allow for escape of life threatening exhaust gases, which may be present during the following conditions. If vehicle’s engine is accelerated above normal idle resulting in an exhaust velocity greater than 5000 feet per minute or in the event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds the manufacturers normal capture velocity or CFM of exhaust system. The Nozzle shall automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tail pipe ranging from one inch through six-inch diameter. The bidder of the nozzle shall offer, if required, both maximum diameter nozzles ranging from 4.75" diameter to 8.25" diameter. The nozzle pressure shall not exceed 15 psi. when connected to the vehicle’s tailpipe.

Nozzle construction shall be high temperature synthetic rubber, vulcanized to a high temperature synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided for the primary temperature source at the tailpipe and also act as a friction barrier. The chrome-reducing elbow that connects to the connection nozzle shall be fabricated using continuous welded construction. This important feature eliminates the escape of any potentially lethal exhaust gases and must provide for a smooth air flow transition from connection nozzle into the high temperature flexible hose. The angle of transition shall be no less than or greater than 67 degrees from the center line of reducer. The chrome-reducer shall incorporate a primary expanded metal debris screen, which is permanently affixed by welded seams to the inside opening of exhaust fitting. Since this item is a point of safety for both personnel and the system itself, no exception will be tolerated for this point.

O. Hose Saddle:

A hose suspension saddle shall be a steel elbow specifically manufactured for the sole purpose of suspending high temperature flexible hose. The design of the saddle shall smoothly transition the direction of the hose during its travel along the track. Securing clamps shall be provided including a link fastener, for the purpose of mounting it to the balancer safety link.

P. Special Features:

The system must be designed to expand for future apparatus to a tandem vehicle arrangement (one vehicle behind the other) by adding to the proposed system.

Systems that require replacement of the existing system or major components to meet a tandem vehicle arrangement shall not be accepted. Unique occasions may require the emergency vehicle to depart from the back door in a drive through station. Overall system design and performance shall be for both back in and drive-through configurations when applicable, this assures door to door coverage and collection of dangerous exhaust gases from the point of connection at the doorway.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 796 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
23 25 16 - 12 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System
Q. Vehicle Tailpipe Modification:

The bidder shall supply a drawing for the precise modification procedure for the vehicles to attach to the exhaust removal system. The modification shall vent the exhaust gases at a 90-degree angle on the passenger side of vehicle. Tailpipe modifications requiring a 45-degree angle of exhaust venting shall not be acceptable, so to prevent exhaust blow back into station after the auto-release system disengages from the tailpipe. A flange shall be provided and installed by the bidder as a precisely located stopping point for the collection nozzle.

PART 3 - TRAINING:

The bidder or authorized approved personnel, shall provide training to fire department personnel in the daily use and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system that has been installed and specified herein. The fire department shall be notified at least 2 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel involved with the operation of the exhaust removal system to include all shifts required to man the particular facility.

The Training session, shall be performed in person by a recognized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system, in addition a training video shall be provided to the fire department.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 797 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 1 Common Work Results for Electrical
SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Materials and equipment shall be furnished and installed in support of electrical work described in these plans and specifications including but not limited to, raceways, boxes, enclosures, feeders, branch circuiting, supports, terminal cabinets, sleeves, gutters, panels, transformers, switchgear, lighting fixtures, controls, relays, contactors, in order to complete and make fully functional the systems described.

2. Complete fire alarm and annunciation system as shown and/or required by the (local jurisdiction having authority, California State Fire Marshal) including monitoring equipment and wiring for central station connection. Provide fire alarm system design and submit for approval by the AHJ.

3. Lighting systems, both interior and exterior as shown on the plans and as specified herein, including controls, occupancy sensors, lumen sensors, photocell controls, lamps, dimmers, racks, dimming ballasts, supports, fasteners, straps, and miscellaneous mounting hardware and support structures for such equipment.

4. Electrical, Telephone and CATV Utility company site work as required by the serving companies. All utility company conduits, raceways, trenching, backfilling, utility vaults, equipment pads and substructures shall meet both the respective utility companies requirements as well as those of the authority having jurisdiction, whichever is more restrictive. In no case shall work be completed and covered without the written approval of the serving utility companies both on and off site.

5. Duct banks and raceways for all power and communications systems as shown and/or required. Duct banks shall include all trenching, racking, conduit, concrete, backfill, boxes, pads, substructures required for a fully developed and useable pathway for cables, conductors, as shown on site, etc.

6. HVAC and plumbing electrical: Conduit, conductors and terminations for all line voltage power, line voltage controls and fusible and/or non-fusible safety disconnect switches for HVAC equipment, including but not limited to air conditioners, furnaces, fans, heat pumps, cooling towers, system pumps, condensing units. Provide protective equipment unless otherwise noted, etc. including protective devices.

7. Plumbing Electrical: Conduit, conductors and terminations for plumbing equipment with power requirements including necessary fusible and/or non7.j.2 Packet Pg. 798 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 2 Common Work Results for Electrical
fusible safety disconnect devices. Provide motor starters where required unless provided by mechanical specification.

8. Power and Lighting Distribution: Furnish and install power and lighting distribution systems including but not limited to panels, feeders, transformers, branch circuits, devices, fixtures, disconnect switches, contactors, controls, etc. for a complete working system.

9. Data systems infrastructure including all boxes, raceways, cable tray, wire basket tray, dedicated branch circuits, sleeves and penetrations, etc. as described and as shown in plans, risers, specifications, EIA/TIA standards and/or required for a complete and operating system.

10. Voice amplification system in multi-purpose rooms, auditoria and gymnasiums, including amplifiers, racks, mixers, microphones, outlets, cable/connections, equipment racks, etc. as specified on the drawings and in written specifications.

11. Lighting acceptance testing, documentation and completion of required forms as specified in Section 26 56 70, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

12. Furnish optional standby power distribution system in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. This project shall include the (standby option/prime) generator, automatic transfer equipment and emergency distribution system. This shall include the furnishing of a system that is approved by the local Air Pollution Control District (APCD) and the furnishing of all required data to the Owner or Owner Representative for obtaining the necessary permits.

13. Allocation of time to adequately train the Owner on the use and operation of all systems installed within the facility or on the property. Minimum two week advance notice shall be coordinated with the Owner and his representatives.

Training shall be as outlined in individual system specifications identified to follow.

B. Related Sections Under Other Divisions:

1. Mechanical Wiring: Control circuit wiring, energy management controls and interlocks for mechanical equipment shall be installed by Mechanical Contractor.

2. Painting of electrical equipment where exposed and required by the Architect to be painted as described elsewhere in the specification.

3. Irrigation System: Provide all line voltage (50 volts or above) connections to irrigation system equipment, time clocks and or powered satellite controls.

Coordinate locations of this work with the Landscape Contractor.

4. Pole Bases: Contractor shall be responsible to furnish light standard concrete pole bases, rebar, bolt templates and anchor bolt kits for a complete installation.

Concrete, rebar, excavation shall be by Contractor in accordance with all parts of this specification.

5. HVAC Control Raceway: Raceways, boxes, and control wiring for thermostats, temperature sensors and control components specified within the mechanical specifications, shall be furnished and installed as required by Division 25 and installed in accordance with the minimum wiring methods allowed for branch circuit wiring in Division 26 (the DDC systems/EMS systems and components are installed in accordance with Division 25).

6. Smoke Fire Dampers: Coordination with Mechanical plans for exact locations and points of connection for power and fire alarm system connections (power and fire alarm connection shall be by Electrical Contractor).

7. Duct mounted smoke detectors: Coordination with Mechanical plans for exact locations and points of connection for power and fire alarm system connections (power and fire alarm connection shall be by Electrical Contractor).

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 799 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 3 Common Work Results for Electrical

8. Security System: Shall be installed by Owner’s vendor. Contractor shall provide conduits, boxes, stubs to accessible ceilings, dedicated circuit(s) for alarm panel, access control system (key pads, electric locks), etc. as shown and/or required by the Owner’s vendor.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The electrical plans indicate the general layout and arrangement; the architectural drawings and field conditions shall determine exact locations. Field verify all conditions and modify as required to satisfy design requirements as well as code minimums.

Maintain all required working clearances as described in CEC Article 110 as well as other applicable articles.

B. Discrepancies shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Architect for clarification. The Architect shall approve any changes. Prior to rough-in, refer to architectural plans that shall take precedence over electrical plans with respect to locations.

C. Verify all power and communications utility company requirements prior to commencement of utility work. Make proper adjustments to the construction to satisfy the serving utility requirements if they differ from the construction documents. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to contact each utility company for obtaining finalized utility design drawings and/or approval, and for scheduling inspection of utility infrastructure installations.

D. Charges imposed by the electric and communications utility companies shall be paid by Owner directly to utility companies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Before construction, submit in accordance with the General Conditions of this Specification: A complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this section.

B. Manufacturers' specifications, catalog cuts and shop drawings as required to demonstrate compliance with the specifications. Identify specific intended use for each component where submittal may be ambiguous. Submit entire bound submittal at one time; partial submittals will not be accepted. At a minimum, submittals will be required for the following:

1. Utility service/site work equipment including ducts, conduits, fittings, concrete manholes, concrete and fiberglass pull, manhole, boxes, vaults, trench racks, accessories, etc.

2. Distribution equipment including main switchboards, distribution switchgear, transformers, distribution panels and breakers, motor controls, distribution and branch circuit panels, grounding, transient voltage surge suppressors, etc.

3. Electrical equipment including disconnects, fuses, raceways, straps and racks, fittings, conductors, boxes, gutters, devices, plates, etc.

4. Lighting equipment including fixtures, ballasts, lamps, mounting accessories, color charts (where required), etc.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 800 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 4 Common Work Results for Electrical

5. Lighting control equipment including low voltage switching system, dimmer switchbank / accessories, occupancy sensing equipment, time clocks, contactors, photocells, lumen sensors, etc.

6. Constructability review letter/comments for lighting acceptance testing as required by Section 26 5670, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

7. Complete system component submittals and shop drawings for:
a. Fire Alarm System
b. Generator and Transfer Switches.
c. Lighting
d. Communication Systems including but not limited to; cable, fiber, terminations, cable management, cable tray, patch panels, equipment racks, specified active electronics (where called for), cabinets, jacks, plates, cable labeling, testing procedure.

8. Conduit including all fittings, etc.

9. Wiring and cable, terminations, etc.

10. Fire rating penetration materials, details, etc.

C. The intent of these specifications is to establish a standard of quality for materials and equipment. Therefore, some items are identified by manufacturer or trade name designation. Substitutions shall be subject to the Architect's approval. Samples of the proposed and substitute materials may be required for inspection prior to approval.

Costs, if any, for evaluation of substitutions shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

The decision of the Architect shall be final. Where the substitution will affect other trades, coordinate all changes with those trades concerned and pay any additional costs incurred by them as a result of this substitution. Approval of substitutions shall not relieve the Contractor from providing an operational system in accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.

D. SUPPORTING DEVICES

1. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.

2. Where walls, floor, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points.

3. Provide seismic details of seismic restraints and anchors; including number, size and locations for each piece of equipment.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage of equipment for the job is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor and shall be scheduled for delivery to the site, as the equipment is required. Damage to the equipment delivered to the site or in transport to the job shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 801 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 5 Common Work Results for Electrical
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be new and bear the label of or be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The quality and suitability of all materials shall conform to the standards and practices of this trade.

B. Supplied materials shall be of a current manufactured product line. Discontinued products are not acceptable. Where products are identified on the contract documents by part number, supply the current product model or series which meets the specification and intended use of the specified component.

2.2 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hangers: Kindorf B-905-2A Channel, H-119-D washer, C105 strap, 3/8” rod with ceiling flange.

B. Concrete Inserts: Kindorf D-255, cast in concrete for support fasteners for loads up to 800 lbs.

C. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron.

D. Luminaire Chain: Campbell Chain 75031, 90-lb. test with steel hooks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Professionalism and appearance of installations shall be in accordance with accepted practices of this trade. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturers' specifications and recommendations. The Contractor shall man the job with qualified journeymen and helpers in this trade for the duration of the job. It is the Contractor's responsibility to communicate with and keep the job superintendent appraised of changes or clarifications, etc.

B. Employment of any person on any job in the capacity of an electrician is not permitted unless such person has qualified for and holds a valid Journeyman Electrician Pocket Card or General Journeyman Electrician Certificate issued by the State of California Division of Apprenticeship Standards except, Contractor may employ electrical helpers or apprentices on any job of electrical construction, new or existing, when the work of such helpers or apprentices is performed under the direct and constant personal supervision of a journeyman electrician holding a valid Pocket Card accepted by the State of California Division of Apprenticeship Standards.

1. Each Pocket Card carrying journeyman electrician will be permitted to be responsible for the quality of workmanship for a maximum of one helper or apprentice during any same time period, provided the nature of work is such that good supervision can be maintained and the quality of workmanship is the best,

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 802 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 6 Common Work Results for Electrical
as expected by Owner and implied by the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.

2. Before each journeyman electrician commences work, deliver to Owner at the project site, a photocopy of the journeyman’s valid Pocket Card.

C. Materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' specification and recommendations. They must conform to the approval AHJ adopted codes and standards, but not less than the 2016 CEC and all applicable codes and standards, including but not necessarily limited to California Code of Regulations Title 24, NFPA, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, ANSI, CBC, and any other adopted ordinances of applicable agencies having jurisdiction. Refer to general conditions of specifications.

D. Electrical Contractor shall lay work out in advance in order to avoid unnecessary cutting, chasing, and drilling of floors, walls, ceilings and other surfaces. Work of this nature shall be carefully done so as not to damage work already performed by other trades. Any damage which results must be properly repaired at no extra cost to the Owner. Such alterations shall not depreciate the integrity of the structure. Approval for cuts or penetrations in structural members shall be by the Architect.

E. Supporting Devices:

1. Verify mounting height of all luminaires or items prior to installation when heights are not detailed.

2. Install vertical support members for equipment and luminaires, straight and parallel to building walls. Provide independent supports to structural member for electrical luminaires, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls or in void spaces or over furred or suspended ceilings.

3. Do not use other trade’s fastening devices as supporting means for electrical equipment, materials or luminaires. Do not use supports or fastening devices to support other than one particular item.

4. Support conduits within 18” of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections.

Maximum distance between supports not to exceed 8’ spacing.

5. Securely suspend all junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above suspended ceiling from the floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying.

6. Provide seismic bracing per UBC requirements for this building location.

7. Supporting Devices: Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for electrical equipment installed. Support to withstand four times weight of equipment it supports. Bracing to comply with seismic design category “SDC” per Structural Engineer.

F. Coordinate work with other trades as required to eliminate any delays during construction. Coordinate changes with other prime contractors to avoid construction conflicts.

G. Engineer's Field Observation: Site visits during construction for field observations and reports will be conducted by electrical engineer when directed by the Architect. A list of items that need to be addressed will be submitted to the Architect for forwarding to the Contractor. A written response to all items shall be submitted for Owner’s review once complete. When Electrical Engineering representative performs a field observation, the Electrical Contractor shall be present and available to remove equipment covers as needed.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 803 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 00 - 7 Common Work Results for Electrical
H. Drawings of Record: Provide a full and accurate set of field record drawings marked up in a neat and understandable manner submitted to the Owner Representative, Construction Manager, or Architect upon completion of the work and prior to issuance of a certificate of completion. The drawings shall dimension all electrical facilities including but not limited to underground conduit, vaults, boxes as well as conduit routing scaled to within 12" of actual field conditions and shall be kept up to date on a daily basis reflecting changes or deviations. Electrical facilities shall be accurately drawn on the plan to scale. Refer to the general conditions of these specifications for additional requirements. Record drawings shall be required to identify both horizontal and vertical dimensions to visible and fixed points such as concrete, asphalt, buildings, sidewalks, etc.

I. Identification: Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for all switchboards, panelboards, fire alarm terminal cabinets, telephone and cable television backboards, main devices, control panels, time clocks, contactors and safety disconnect switches accurately identifying each device. Labels shall be attached to the equipment by means of screws or rivets. Self-adhering labels will not be acceptable. Refer to Section 26 05 53, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

J. Safety: The Electrical Contractor is responsible to maintain equipment in a safe and responsible manner. Keep dead front equipment in place while equipment is energized. Conduct construction operations in a safe manner for employees as well as other work persons or anyone visiting the job site. Provide barriers, trench plates, flags, tape, etc. The Contractor shall hold all parties harmless of negligent safety practices that may cause injury to others on or near the job site.

K. Guarantees: Equipment and labor shall be guaranteed and warranted free of defects, unless otherwise stated to be more restrictive, for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. A written warranty shall be presented to the Architect at the time of completion prior to final acceptance. Equipment deemed to be damaged, broken or failed should be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Materials or system requiring longer than a one-year warranty as described herein shall be separately warranted in separate letters of guarantee stating the duration of warranty.

L. Operating and Installation Manuals: Provide two copies each of manuals, operating and installation instructions for equipment indicated in submittal packages. Instruct the Owner's representative as to the operation and location of equipment necessary to allow them to operate the facility upon final acceptance. This instruction period shall be prearranged with the Owner's representative prior to occupancy of the facility and the weeks prior to training scheduled.

M. Lighting Acceptance Testing: Provide two copies of lighting acceptance testing results and equipment operating manuals as specified in Section 26 56 70, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING. Instruct the Owner on operation of control systems.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 804 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 12/09/2019 Page 1 of 5
SECTION 26 05 19

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Wires and cables.

2. Connectors.

3. Lugs and pads.

4. MC cable.

5. SO cable.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide wires, cables, connectors, lugs, strain reliefs, racking insulators for a complete and operational electrical system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data for the following equipment:

1. Wires.

2. Cables.

3. Connectors.

4. Lugs.

5. Splice Kits.

6. Strain Relief Fittings.

7. Cable Racking and Insulators.

B. Provide the insulation cable testing report in the project closeout documentation, refer to Closeout Requirements in the General Conditions portion of this specification.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of the CEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 805 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 12/09/2019 Page 2 of 5
B. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wires and Cables: General Cable, Okonite, Southwire, or approved equal.

B. Connectors: Burndy, Ilsco, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal.

C. Wire connectors shall be minimum 75 degree centigrade rated and properly sized for the number of conductors being connected, terminated, spliced etc. All above grade connectors shall be solderless lug or plastic wire nut type, screw on, pressure cable type (wire nut or spring nut type), 600 volt, 105 degree C, with skirt to cover all portions of stripped wires. Connector shall be U.L. rated for number and size of conductors being joined together as a splice.

D. Splices:

1. Branch Circuit Splices: Ideal, Scotch-Lock, 3M, or approved.

2. Feeder Splices: Compression barrel splice with two layers Scotch 23 and four layers of Scotch 33+ as vapor barrier.

3. Screw Terminal Lugs.

4. Kearney Split Bolt.

E. MC and HFC Cable: Alflex, AFC, or approved and shall meet all CEC Article 334 provisions.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES FOR LINE VOLTAGE SYSTEM AND CONTROLS. WIRE AND CABLE SHALL BE:

A. Copper, 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 14AWG to 10AWG, solid or stranded.

Conductors 8AWG and larger, stranded.

B. Phase color to be consistent at all feeder terminations; A-B-C, top to bottom, left to right, front to back. Phasing tape shall be permitted on sizes #6 and larger.

C. Color Code Conductors as Follows:

PHASE 208 VOLT
A Black
B. Red
C. Blue
Neutral White
Ground Green
D. All conductors shall be copper unless otherwise noted. Minimum size for individual conductors shall be #12 AWG unless otherwise noted. Sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded conductor. Individual conductors shall be insulated with type, XHHW, THW,

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 806 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 12/09/2019 Page 3 of 5
THHN/THWN 600-volt insulation unless otherwise noted. Control, signal, communication conductors shall be as dictated by the vendor of that equipment or as specified here-in. Proper insulation type shall be used for the proper environmental application (i.e., waterproof, wet location, plenum, temperature rated). If a condition exists where the application is uncertain, contact the Engineer for direction. Contractor is responsible to follow specific cabling requirements described in other sections of this specification relative to various communications and controls systems as well as the respective riser diagrams shown on plans.

If a discrepancy occurs, communicate such discrepancy to the Architect and Engineer immediately for resolution.

E. Insulation types THWN, THHN or XHHW. Minimum insulation rating of 90C for branch circuits.

F. MC Cable: High strength galvanized steel or aluminum flexible armor. Full length minimum size No. 12 copper ground wire, THHN 90C conductors, full length tape marker. Overall PVC or nylon cable tape. Short circuit throat insulators, mechanical compression termination.

Manufacturers: Alflex, AFC.

G. SO Cable: Annealed copper conductors, 600 volt rated. Minimum Size No. 12, with ground wire. Maximum of six conductors and ground per cable. 90C rated thermoset jacket.

Manufacturers: Tiger Brand.

H. Refer to signal and communications specification sections for cable requirements.

2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Copper Pads: Drilled and tapped for multiple conductor terminals.

B. Lugs: Indent/compression type for use with stranded branch circuit or control conductors.

C. Solid Conductor Branch Circuits: Spring connectors, wire nuts, for conductors 18 through 8AWG.

2.4 LUGS AND PADS
A. Ampacity: Cross-sectional area of pad for multiple conductor terminations to match ampere rating of panelboard bus or equipment line terminals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation: Conductors shall not be installed until after conduit systems are permanently in place. Use an approved non hardening type wire pulling lubricant if lubricant is to be used.

Maintain all conduits and wire pulls free from foreign material. If due to field conditions, more

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 807 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 12/09/2019 Page 4 of 5
than a total of 300 degrees of bend are required; a pull box shall be furnished and installed for ease of installation. Said pull boxes must be sized and rated for the appropriate application and must remain easily accessible upon completion of the project (approval of the location shall be obtained from the Architect prior to installation). Show these pullboxes on the field record drawings. Conductors installed in underground raceways on site shall be duct sealed and taped where they exit the raceway to prevent the entrance of foreign material and moisture after the conductors are installed. Proper drainage shall be provided for underground pull and splice boxes.

B. Insulation: Use proper insulation types where temperature and environment are a factor.

C. Splices at or below grade level shall be made with wet location rated and approved mechanical connectors and shall be encapsulated in epoxy or plastic molded poured kits. The connections must be assured to be watertight. Splices at or below grade shall always be avoided and minimized. Prior approval is required for feeder splices below grade. Submit proposed materials and exhibit showing location of intended splices for Engineer’s review and approval prior to commencing with the work.

D. Labeling: All conductors in panels, switchboards, terminal cabinets, vaults, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be labeled with tape number markers indicating circuit number and identifying system. All labeling shall be permanent. In manholes and vaults, provide embossed brass tags identifying system serviced and function. See Section 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

E. All conductors, wiring, cable where installed below floor, slab or underground shall be considered wet locations, and shall be rated accordingly. Non waterproof cabling is not allowed in any below grade or wet application.

F. Cables routed together in cable tray shall be stacked, organized and tie wrapped together in a neat and workman like manner. Random cable routing is not acceptable.

G. Cable and conductors routed through pull boxes and vaults shall be properly supported on porcelain or equal insulators mounted on steel rack inserts. Bend radius of cable or conductor shall not be less than six times the overall cable diameter.

H. Wires and Cables:

1. Conductor Installation:
a. Install conductors in raceways having adequate, code size cross-sectional area for wires indicated.
b. Install conductors with care to avoid damage to insulation. c. Do not apply greater tension on conductors than recommended by manufacturer during installation.
d. Use of pulling compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed conductors and raceway entrances after conductor installation.

2. Conductor Size and Quantity:
a. Install no conductors smaller than 12AWG unless otherwise shown. b. Provide all required conductors for a fully operable system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 808 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 12/09/2019 Page 5 of 5

3. Provide dedicated neutrals (one neutral conductor for each phase conductor) in the following single phase circuits:
a. Dimmer controlled circuits.
b. Ground fault and arc fault protected circuits where a GFI and arc fault breakers are used in panelboards.
c. Other electronic equipment which produces a high level of harmonic distortion including but not limited to computers, printers, plotters, copy machines, fax machines, where indicated.

4. MC Cable shall be allowed for lighting branch circuiting in non-exposed but accessible ceiling areas. Ceilings that are not accessible by definition shall not allow MC cable use.

Power feeders, and electrical branch circuit wiring shall utilize raceways as specified and allowed by Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

5. Conductors in Cabinets:
a. Cable and train all wires in panels and cabinets for power and control neatly and uniformly. Use plastic ties in panels and cabinets.
b. Tie and bundle feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards. c. Hold conductors away from sharp metal edges.
d. Connectors: Retighten mechanical type lugs and connectors for conductors to equipment prior to Notice of Completion.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:

1. Test conductor insulation on feeders of 400 amp and greater for conformity with 1000 volt megohmmeter. Use Insulated Cable Engineers Association testing procedures.

Minimum insulation resistance acceptable is 1 megohm for systems 600 volts and below.

2. Test Report: Prepare a typed tabular report indicating the testing instrument, the feeder tested, amperage rating of the feeder, insulation type, voltage, the approximate length of the feeder, conduit type, and the measured resistance of the megohmmeter test. Submit report with operating and maintenance manual.

END OF SECTION 26 0519

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 809 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12/09/2019 Page 1 of 5
SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Grounding and bonding requirements of electrical installations for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents as described in CEC Article 250.

2. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by CEC, as well as including made, supplementary, lightning protection system and telecommunications system grounding electrodes.

3. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

2. Section 26 0519, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG and larger shall be permitted to be identified per CEC.

B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.

C. Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the drawings and not less than required by the CEC, whichever is greater.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 810 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12/09/2019 Page 2 of 5

2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Copperclad steel, 5/8" diameter by 8’ long, conforming to UL 467 unless otherwise noted on drawings and details.

B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance or additional rods shall be driven to obtain specified resistance or less.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
A. Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Ground in accordance with the CEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified.

B. System Grounding:

1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers.

2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance):

Ground the secondary neutral.

C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, fire sprinklers, plumbing piping, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A. Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.

3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS
A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment.

B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):

1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per CEC between the service equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 811 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12/09/2019 Page 3 of 5
or made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.

2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system.

C. Service Disconnect: Provide a ground bar bolted to the enclosure with lugs for connecting the various grounding conductors.

D. Switchgear:

1. Connect the various feeder equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus in the enclosure with suitable pressure connectors.

2. For service entrance equipment, connect the grounding electrode conductor to the ground bus.

3. Connect metallic conduits, which terminate without mechanical connection to the housing, by grounding bushings and grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.

E. Conduit Systems:

1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor sized per CEC.

2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Metal conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders, power and lighting branch circuits.

G. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes.

2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.

3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment grounding conductors.

H. Motors and Starters: Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing or motor control center compartment to terminate equipment grounding conductors.

I. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

J. Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system when the green ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems. Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 812 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12/09/2019 Page 4 of 5
K. Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination of the equipment grounding conductor.

L. Raised Floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components.

M. Panelboard Bonding: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the normal and emergency branch circuit panelboards shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor not less than No. 8 AWG where panels are in same room together or within 25’ of each other. These conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit.

3.4 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

3.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
A. Bond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrode system. Refer to Section 27 1300, INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

3.6 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Owner. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met and test results shall be submitted to the Owner with final close out documents.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-ofpotential method as defined in IEEE Standard 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

C. Services at Pacific Gas and Electric Company interface point shall comply with their ground resistance requirements.

D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the IOR prior to backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the IOR 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.

E. Furnish a copy of tests to Owner at completion of project.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 813 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12/09/2019 Page 5 of 5

3.7 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION
A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 7 1/2’ in depth.

B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.

C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.

END OF SECTION 26 0526

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 814 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0529– HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 815 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0529– HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Equipment supports.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 816 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0529– HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 817 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0529– HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 818 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0529– HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 26 0529

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 819 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 1 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Conduit and fittings.

2. Outlet boxes.

3. Weatherproof outlet boxes.

4. Junction and pull boxes.

5. Floor boxes and poke-through.

6. Cabinets, termination cabinets.

7. Gutters.

8. Concrete boxes and vaults.

9. Fiberglass or composite boxes and vaults.

B. Related Work:

1. Installation of all wire, cable, conductor, boxes/gutters, pull ropes, fiber optic cable raceway, conduit, innerduct, cable sleeve and duct as described on the plans and/or as specified here-in. This scope shall include pathways to be installed underground on site and offsite, underslab, above grade, both concealed and exposed, overhead concealed and exposed as appropriately applied. Raceways/boxes shall be installed in accordance with their intended and allowed uses and as specified here-in whichever is more restrictive. Size and capacity of all raceway/boxes shall be as specified here-in or as depicted on the drawings, but shall not be less than that required by code. Larger raceway sizes may be specified than code would permit. The specifications shall govern.

2. Listed products for termination, coupling, extending, benching supports of raceways shall be used.

3. Raceways/boxes described by this section shall include, but not be limited to, power for site utilities and lighting, site and building communications, controls, fire alarm, security, access control, sound systems, data system, energy management systems, power distribution, lighting, lighting controls, video, CATV, voice communications, intercom, nurse call, HVAC and other building low voltage/communications systems controls as may be required. Raceways, boxes and duct paths required for utility companies shall be installed per plans unless utility company requirements are more restrictive at which time those requirements shall take precedence.

4. Protection of and cleanliness of pathways and raceways must be assured during the construction process in order to eliminate the possibility of debris entering

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 820 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 2 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
the conduit, duct, pathway resulting in decreased wire capacity and potential damage to installed conductors and cables.

5. Pathways are shown in a diagrammatic way and are generally accurate as to routing, however, it is the Contractor’s responsibility as a means and methods process to coordinate with all other trades that require space within a building.

The Contractor shall obtain approval for installation of raceways routing through structural footings, retaining walls, columns, beams, perlins, grade beams, etc.

6. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to insure that all raceway and boxes systems penetrate fire assemblies and sound rated assemblies in an approved manner using the appropriate and listed products for the purpose.

7. Trenching and backfilling for all underground conduit systems installed by the Electrical Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Conduits shall have minimum cover requirement of 36” below finish grade with the exception of site lighting conduits which may be 24” below finish grade minimum. More stringent depth requirements may be imposed by the local agency and utility company and shall be adhered to, and / or this specification or as detailed on the plans. Joint trenching may be utilized where practicable and where permitted by this specification. Concrete, native material and sand shall be used as backfill material and shall be compacted in accordance with and coordinated with the grading and site preparation requirements. Conduits shall rest in a minimum of 4” bed of sand prior to backfill and compaction. Locations of existing underground (UG) utility systems shall be determined by calling Underground Service Alert (USA) at least 48 hours prior to any excavation. Also refer to Section 26 05 46.13, ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEMS.

8. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2" except if plan shows or code requires larger size. Exception: Use minimum 3/4" for underslab and below grade applications outside of building exterior walls.

9. All electrical, control, communications systems shall be installed in metallic conduit system. This shall include but not be limited to all systems described in Section B.3 above, except for voice and data systems which shall be installed as described on these plans and as specified here-in but shall not be less than the recommendations of EIA/TIA standards.

10. All line voltage wiring within the building shall be installed in metallic conduit.

11. All conduit, concrete pads, underground concrete or fiberglass substructures shall be furnished and installed with the approved materials and type for the application. Provide proper traffic control during construction as well as barriers and protection of all excavations and trenching.

12. Empty or future conduits shall be properly plugged with plastic caps or inserts with a 3/8” polyethylene pull rope. Plastic or "duct" tape will not be acceptable.

13. Exterior installations: After conductors are installed, seal conduit ends to prevent entrance of foreign material using pliable duct seal, caps or waterproof expanding foam.

14. All low voltage systems including intercom, fire alarm, public address, etc. shall be in dedicated conduit systems. Voice / Data and Direct Digital Control (DDC) systems for HVAC cabling shall be routed as specified in Section 27 13 00, INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS and as recommended by EIA/TIA standards. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to provide raceway down walls to outlet boxes and to provide sleeves across inaccessible ceiling spaces.

15. Underground conduits entering building shall have the open end of conduit within building above the elevation of the conduit outside the building such that water cannot enter building through conduit. If such a condition exists, a pull box

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 821 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 3 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
outside of building footprint shall be installed in conduit route before conduit enters building whereby top of pull box is below finish floor of building and moisture may exit box before entering building.

16. No single conduit run of any type shall exceed 300 degrees of radius bend from termination box to termination box.

17. Separate Raceway System: Provide a separate dedicated raceway system for each system installed, do not combine different systems into a raceway or cable tray system, unless otherwise noted or allowed.

18. Spare, Future Conduits: Conduits labeled conduit only, spare, or for future use, shall be provided with a pullrope, capped at each end, labeled as spare with destination marked, and turned over to the Owner in an unused state.

Contractor shall not utilize these conduits for the installation of cabling or conductors as part of this scope of work. Contractor to verify and install at no additional cost to the Owner, additional conduits as required for the installation of the systems being installed.

19. Outlet System: Provide electrical boxes and fittings as required for a complete installation. Including but not limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, bushings, locknuts, covers and all other necessary components.

20. Code Compliance: Comply with CEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings and size boxes according to CEC 312, 314 and 366 except as noted otherwise.

21. Outlets to be flush mounted: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier.

Unless otherwise noted, flush mount all outlet boxes.

22. Provide putty pads of proper type around outlet boxes and/or as detailed on plan to meet sound transmission restrictions and fire ratings of walls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Shop Drawings and Product Data for the Following Equipment:

1. Conduit and fittings.

2. Outlet boxes.

3. Weatherproof outlet boxes.

4. Junction and pull boxes.

5. Floor boxes and poke-through.

6. Cabinets, termination cabinets.

7. Gutters.

8. Concrete boxes and vaults.

9. Fiberglass or composite boxes and vaults.

10. Putty pads.

11. Raceways

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of the CEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs.

B. Furnish products listed by UL or other independent and nationally recognized testing firm.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 822 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 4 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Extra heavy wall non-metallic conduit, shall be PVC schedule 80 manufactured in accordance with NEMA Standard TC-2, UL-651 and WC 1094A specifications.

B. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized, zinc coated and shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL-6, ANSI Specification C-80.1 and Federal Specification WW-C-581E.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be zinc coated, with a protective coating applied to the inside surface and shall comply with Underwriter Laboratories UL-797 ANSI Specification C-80.3 and Federal Specification WW-C-563A.

D. Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT), shall be listed to requirements of U.L. 1653, in accordance with CEC Article 362, and meet requirements of BI National Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.1-U.L. 1653. ENT shall be rated for 90 degrees C conductors and shall be recognized for use in 2-hour fire resistance non-load bearing and load bearing wall assemblies. ENT shall be recognized for through-penetration firestop systems as classified to meet U.L. and ICC building codes.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) shall be continuous wound reduced wall galvanized steel produced to UL standards.

F. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall have a thermoplastic cover over a galvanized steel core containing an integral copper ground in sizes to 1 1/4" and shall be in compliance with UL standards and CEC Article 350.

G. Surface mount raceway shall only be used where shown on the plans. The raceway and cover shall be colored by Wiremold but be capable of being over-painted in the field if required. The raceway and fittings shall meet all requirements of CEC Article 386 and be U.L. listed. Raceway shall be mechanically connected to structure with backing and anchor bolts.

H. Cable runway tray shall be 12” wide with 4” side rails unless otherwise noted. It shall be U.L. listed and use listed connectors, elbows, tees, etc. Material shall be hollow steel with gray painted finish.

I. Manufacturers:

1. Outlet Boxes: Bowers, Raco, Steel City or equal.

2. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Bell, Red Dot, [Carlon] or equal.

3. Floor Boxes: Wiremold/Walker, Hubbell, Steel City, or equal.

4. Junction and Pull Boxes: Circle AW, Hoffman, Wireguard or equal.

5. Box Extension Adapter: Bell, Red Dot, [Carlon] or equal.

6. Conduit Fittings: O-Z Gedney, Thomas & Betts, or equal.

7. Vaults: Christy, Brooks, Utility Vault or equal.

8. Putty pads: 3M, Hilti, or equal.

9. Heavy wall rigid non-metallic conduit, Carlon, Certainteed, R&G Sloane or equal.

10. Extra heavy wall non-metallic conduit, Carlon, Certainteed, R&G Sloane or equal.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 823 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 5 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems

11. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized, zinc coated and shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL-6, ANSI Specification C-80.1 and Federal Specification WW-C-581E.

12. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be zinc coated, with a protective coating applied to the inside surface and shall comply with Underwriter Laboratories UL797 ANSI Specification C-80.3 and Federal Specification WW-C-563A.

13. Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT), shall be listed to requirements of U.L. 1653, in accordance with CEC Article 362, and meet requirements of BI National Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.1-U.L. 1653. ENT shall be rated for 90 degrees C conductors and shall be recognized for use in 2-hour fire resistance non-load bearing and load bearing wall assemblies. ENT shall be recognized for through-penetration firestop systems as classified to meet U.L. and ICC building codes.

14. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC), Alflex, American Flexible Conduit or equal.

15. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit, Anacanda (type UA), Electri-flex Liquatite or equal.

16. Surface mount raceway, Wiremold, Three Compartment Series 5500 or equal

17. Wire basket tray, B-line, GS Metals, Cablofil or equal.

18. Cable runway tray, B-line, CPI, Homaco or equal.

19. Floor Boxes, Single Gang, Walker/Wiremold 880 CS Series or approved equal.

20. Floor Boxes, Multiple Gang, Walker/Wiremold RFB Series or Walker Omnibox multi-service floor box with carpet plates, and/or water resistant device covers.

21. Masonry Boxes, outlets in concrete, Raco Series 690 or equal.

22. Floor Boxes, Poke-Thru, Hubbell PT7 Series, Walker/Wiremold RC4 Series, or approved equal unless otherwise noted.

23. Floor Boxes, Poke-Thru, Furniture Feed, Walker/Wiremold RC9 Series or approved equal.

24. Exterior In-Grade Boxes for Non-Utility Company, Precast concrete or polymer concrete, Utility Vault and Christy.

2.2 OUTLET BOXES
A. NEMA 1 gutter, junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated from code gage steel finished in grey enamel with screw cover fronts and concentric knockouts in all sides.

B. NEMA 3R gutter, junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated from code gage galvanized steel with screw cover fronts and concentric knockouts in the bottom only.

Any penetrations to the side, top or back shall be weatherproofed in an approved manner such as “MYERS” gasketed type hub or equal.

C. Steel outlet boxes and plaster rings shall be galvanized rigid assemblies, either one piece pressed or factory welded construction containing the size and number of knockouts required. Steel outlet boxes shall be manufactured, sized and installed in accordance with CEC Article 314. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4” square, minimum 1 1/2" deep. Single or 2 gang flush device plaster ring. Raco Series 681 and 686 or equal.

D. Luminaire Outlet: minimum 4” square with correct plaster ring depth, minimum 1 1/2” deep with 3/8” luminaire stud if required. Provide proper depth plaster ring on bracket outlets and on ceiling outlets.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 824 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 6 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
E. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install 1 piece gang boxes with 1 piece device plastering. Install one device per gang unless otherwise allowed.

F. Construction: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. Boxes shall be properly secured to the structure such that they are flush with the finish surface. Boxes shall be made structurally secure by means of the proper fastening devices.

G. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, plaster rings, luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations.

2.3 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES
A. Construction: Provide corrosion-resistant cast iron, with zinc finish, weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plate with spring-hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application, including face plate gasket, blank plugs and corrosion proof fasteners. Weatherproof boxes to be constructed to have smooth sides, zinc, galvanized finish.

B. Surface mounted die cast aluminum device boxes shall be provided with screw holes to accommodate cast device covers.

C. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. Weatherproof boxes in wet locations as described in CEC 406.8 (B) shall be provided with a “while-in-use” cover; red dot ‘CK’ Series of aluminum diecast construction, NEMA 3R, with lacquer finish.

2.4 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Construction: Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of the type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

B. Location:

1. Install junction boxes above accessible ceilings for drops into walls for receptacle outlets from overhead.

2. Install junction boxes and pull boxes as required to facilitate the installation of conductors and limiting the accumulated angular sum of bends between boxes, cabinets and appliances to 300 degrees.

3. Locations: Junction boxes shall be located only where necessary and only in equipment rooms, closets, and accessible attic and underfloor spaces. A horizontal distance of 24” shall separate outlet boxes on opposite sides of occupancy separation walls, fire-rated walls or partitions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 825 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 7 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems

4. Labeling: Junction box covers shall be marked with indelible ink indicated the circuit numbers passing through the box.

2.5 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER
A. Construction: Diecast aluminum.

B. Location: Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible raceway extension from flush outlet to fixed or movable equipment.

2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Requirements: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and plastic conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each respective use and installation.

B. Steel boxes may allow for field knock-out modifications, but shall in all other ways conform to code requirements.

2.7 FLOOR BOXES - MULTIPLE GANG
A. Construction: Deep cast iron, fully adjustable before and after pour. Equal to Walker/Wiremold RFB Series or Walker Omnibox multi-service floor box with carpet plates, and/or water resistant device covers. Verify color. Partition for different power or signal applications. Provide required power receptacle devices and signal grommets or receptacles as noted. Flange type shall be compatible with floor covering for either carpet or vinyl as required and shall be brass type not polycarbonate.

B. Floor mounted boxes shall be water tight and cast iron when installed in grade level concrete slab floor, fully adjustable with interior and exterior leveling screws.

Receptacle flange shall be brass with a duplex lift lid. Flange type shall be compatible with floor type. Before installation, coordinate exact location with Architect.

2.8 FLOOR BOXES - POKE-THRU
A. Fire rated for 4 hour, dual service, flush brass cover and service fitting prewired specification grade receptacle, voice/data jacks, as specified.

B. Furniture Feed: Fire rated per floor assembly rating, finish flange and service head assembly.

2.9 EXTERIOR IN-GRADE BOXES FOR NON-UTILITY COMPANY USE SHALL BE:

A. Precast concrete or polymer concrete type with full bottoms and draining into gravel drywell. . Open bottom splice/pull boxes 24” x 36” and smaller shall be open bottom, with minimum 12” of gravel below for drainage.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 826 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 8 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
B. Flushmount in hardscape and 1” above grade in softscape.

C. Provided with correct traffic type lid, i.e., full vehicular, intermediate incidental vehicular or pedestrian-rated as applicable stamped with “ELECTRIC”, “LIGHTING”, COMMUNICATIONS”, etc. cover identification as shown on the drawings or as applicable. All boxes or vaults located in streets, driveways, sidewalks wider than 8’, and turf areas where mowing takes place shall be traffic rated.

D. Provided with brass hold-down bolts in cover.

E. Provided with necessary box extensions to gain proper depth.

F. Seal all conduit in underground boxes with duct seal after conductors have been installed.

2.10 IN-GRADE UTILITY COMPANY BOXES AND VAULTS
A. In-grade boxes and pads for utility company, shall be as specified by the respective utility company with all of the company’s requirements and construction methods met.

2.11 PUTTY PADS
A. Intumescent moldable firestop putty designed to protect electrical outlet boxes.

B. Designed to install around outside of outlet boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit systems listed below are for use in installations where they are permitted to be used by CEC and/or other occupancy restrictions. The below installation methods do not intend to suggest that these materials be installed in conflict with any applicable code. Special attention to applications shall be made in building types such as Educational, Health Care, wet location, hazardous locations, assembly occupancy and multi-story, but not limited to these. Requirements which are more restrictive than the CEC may be called for by the drawings and / or these specifications. These requirements must be adhered to. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible to use the proper conduit system for the application. Exposed conduit is not allowed below ceilings or above slab of floor, without the permission and approval of the Architect. All conduits shall be concealed except in electrical and telecommunication rooms or where shown to be surface mounted. Exposed conduit (where allowed) shall be run square and plumb with building lines in an approved manner. Support roofmount conduits, where allowed, with minimum 12” wide redwood blocks set in mastic unless otherwise detailed in roof requirements or as specified in roofing specification, by the Architect. Strap conduits to blocks with proper sized conduit straps. Spacing of support shall be a minimum as provided for in the CEC. All

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 827 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 9 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
exposed conduit mounted below 8’ above finished grade shall be strapped at a minimum of 5’ spacing.

B. Non-Metallic Rigid Conduit shall be used in concrete slabs, below concrete slabs on grade, or underground outside of a building slab or foundation. Maintain minimum depth requirements and cover with appropriate fill material. Minimum 4” of bedding and cover of backfill material 1/4" size grain and smaller maximum. Conduit shall be heavy wall Schedule 80, rigid PVC only. Rigid utility P&C duct shall not be used in any application. Properly sized grounding conductors shall be installed per CEC article 250, in all non-metallic conduit branch circuit and feeder runs. PVC conduit shall be formed or field bent only with the use of properly approved bending tools such as to not decrease the internal bore of the conduit. All conduits shall be cut square and reamed of burrs. Approved and compatible glue shall be used on all PVC fittings to attain watertight joints. All non-metallic conduit runs over 150’ in length and over 1 1/4" trade size conduit shall utilize galvanized rigid steel elbows.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be used where exposed less than 8’–0” above finished grade to 18” below finished grade and where subject to physical damage. Conduits shall be cut square and reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.

Strap conduit below 8’ above grade at 5’ intervals. Unless otherwise noted, threadless setscrew and threadless weathertight fittings may be used in lieu of threaded fittings.

All threaded ends entering a junction box of any type shall require one locknut on the inside and one on the outside of the enclosure and be provided with a plastic bushing or grounding bushing where necessary for proper grounding. Where exposed to moisture, a watertight hub or other approved method shall be required. All conduits shall be stubbed up straight and uniform into junction boxes, panels, cabinets, etc., and shall be (GRS) properly supported and strapped. All GRS conduit located below grade, shall be tape wrapped.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used as allowed by code and as permitted by this specification. It shall not be in contact with soil or the concrete slab on the ground floor of any structure. Connectors and couplings shall be steel insulated set screw type where installed in indoor dry locations not subject to moisture. Where the potential for moisture is present, compression type weathertight fittings are required.

One hole conduit straps are permitted from 1/2" to 1” and two hole conduit straps are required for size 1 1/4” and larger. EMT shall not be allowed in areas subject to severe physical damage. Install copper ground wire sized per CEC 250-122 in all EMT conduits.

E. Flexible conduit may be used where concealed in building construction or above dropped ceilings, but shall meet the following criteria: No individual circuit path from distribution panel to last device shall exceed a cumulative length of 30’ of flexible conduit from start to end. Flexible conduit shall not exceed a total directional change of 270 bending degrees in any one run between conduit terminations. Squeeze type or Jake type steel flex fittings of a grounding type are required. Flexible conduit must be supported in accordance with CEC. Where exposed to the weather, moisture, or spray down flexible conduit shall be of the liquidtight type. Fittings shall be manufactured for use with liquidtight flexible conduit. All motor connections shall be made with liquidtight flex. Flexible conduit may not be used where exposed except for last 2’ of equipment connection and unless otherwise noted or approved. A copper ground wire sized per CEC 250-122 shall be installed in all flexible conduit runs.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 828 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 10 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
Flexible conduit may not be used exposed. Weatherproof liquid tight conduit shall not be used at roof level for equipment connections with lengths exceeding 24” nor shall it be used to circumvent a rigid conduit system in a horizontal direction. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with a maximum of 6’ of flexible metal conduit extending from junction box to fixture. “Master” “Slave” fixtures are permitted to use manufactured flexible cable of longer dimension up to 12’ between “Master” and “Slave” only and only as a U.L. listed system component.

F. Underground conduits and transition to above grade/slab shall be as follows:

1. PVC elbows allowed if top of elbow is minimum 18” BFG or below top of slab, otherwise GRS elbows are required.

2. GRS elbows are required if conduit run is 150’ or greater.

3. GRS risers are required from elbow below grade to equipment (device, outlet, panel, cabinet, etc.) above grade.

4. GRS elbows/risers to be PVC coated or 10 MIL taped wrapped (1/2” lapped) to 3” above finish grade or top of slab.

G. Conduit Supports: Conduit runs may be supported by one-hole and two-hole straps or supports as manufactured by Unistrut, Minerallac, Caddy or equals. Supports may be fastened by means of anchors, shields, beam clamps, toggle bolts, or other approved methods appropriate for the application and size of conduit. Pipe nailers (J-hooks) may only be used for 1” conduit and smaller and only in wood frame construction.

Conduit support methods are subject to review by the engineer and authority having jurisdiction for adequacy. Installations deemed inadequate shall be corrected by the contractor at no cost to the Owner.

H. Bends and offsets shall be made with approved tools for the type of conduit being utilized. Bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the smooth bore of the conduit. Parallel conduits shall be run straight and true with bends uniform and symmetrical. Minimum radii shall be per CEC 344-24.

I. Conduit Stub-outs below grade shall be capped with plastic cap, and identified by placing a pull box marked with correctly identified utility such as “Elec”, “Tel”, etc.

Dimension for exact location on field record drawings. Provide lids for proper field application (i.e. traffic, incidental, pedestrian).

J. Conduit Seals: Where below grade conduits enter structure through slab or retaining wall of building or basement, seal the inside of each conduit as follows:

1. Provide damming material around conductors 3” into conduit.

2. Fill 3” of conduit with 3M #2123 sealing compound.

3. Wrap conductors where they exit the conduit with 3M #2229 "Scotch Seal" mastic tape. Lap tape to approximate diameter of the raceway and wrap outside of conduit opening with (minimum) one turn.

4. Use conduit sealing bushings type CSB (O-Z/Gedney) or equal.

5. Empty conduits shall be sealed with standard non-hardening duct seal compound and then capped to prevent entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements.

6. Provide cable drip loop minimum 12” high.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 829 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 11 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
K. Marker tape: Place plastic yellow marker tape at 12” below finish grade along and above buried conduits. Label tape "CAUTION: ELECTRICAL LINES BELOW" or similar wording.

L. Conduits for high voltage (12kv) systems shall be separated from all other conduits by a minimum of 12”. All power system conduits shall be separated from low voltage systems by a minimum of 12” when running parallel to each other and no less than 6” when running perpendicular to each other at conduit crossings.

M. Electrical and communications systems raceways routed underground shall not occupy the same trench as plumbing utilities such as sewer, water, storm drain, gas or other wet or dry gaseous utility system. A minimum of 12” of undisturbed earth is required.

Where utilities must cross in closer proximity to each other due to physical constraints, 6” minimum crossing distances are allowed, however 18” on all sides of a utility crossing must be concrete encased.

N. Duct bank defined here-in shall be four or more conduits in a common trench, conduit spacers and saddles shall be required in all trenches where more than two conduits over 2” in diameter travel in the same trench. Proper spacing between systems as outlined above shall be required and spacers shall be located each 5’ (maximum) along trench route from point to point.

O. Conduits, routed below footings, slabs, grade beams, columns, and other structural elements shall be installed in strict compliance with structural details and criteria shown on structural plans. Clearances below structural elements and sleeves through structural elements must be carefully planned to avoid conflict and must be approved by the structural engineer if conflict arises.

P. All conduit or raceways passing through fire rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be installed with a listed penetration method which protects the opening to the same rating as the assembly and is non hardening.

Q. Expansion Joints

1. Conduits 3” and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings.

Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Provide conduits smaller than 3” with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5” vertical drop midway between the end. All conduit shall have a copper green grounding bonding conductor installed.

R. Seismic Joints

1. At seismic joints, provide conduits rigidly secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with junction boxes or approved fittings, on both sides of the joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack flexible conduit such that these slack conduits are 1 1/2 times the distance between conduit ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed.

S. Wire basket tray shall be used in all concealed spaces (above ceiling spaces, under buildings in access tunnels, below raised floors, etc.) unless otherwise noted. Wire basket tray installations shall conform to the requirements of CEC Article 318. The

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 830 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 33 - 12 Raceways & Boxes for
Electrical Systems
contractor shall provide all mounting hardware, connectors and bracing as required and as recommended by the manufacturer for a complete system installation. All cutting of wire basket tray shall be per the manufacturer’s recommendation using tools designed for that purpose. Cable loading shall not exceed the listing of the system and its support.

T. Location: Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.

U. Anchoring: Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry.

V. Special Application: Provide weatherproof outlets for locations exposed to weather or moisture.

W. Knockout Closures: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

X. Mount outlet boxes, unless otherwise required by ADA, or noted on drawings, the following distances above the finished floor:

1. Receptacles, Telephone, TV & Data outlets. (measured to bottom of outlet box):
+15".

2. Outlet above counter (measured to top of outlet box): +46".

3. Control (light) Switches. (measured to top of outlet box): +48".

4. Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations, T-stats. (measured to top of outlet box): +48".

5. Fire Alarm Visuals: the lower of +80" to bottom of lens, or 6" below ceiling.

6. Other Outlets: As indicated in other sections of specifications or as detailed on drawings.

Y. Coordinate all electrical device locations with the architectural floor plan and interior and exterior elevations to prevent mounting devices within elements that they may conflict such as cabinetry, mirrors, planters, etc.

Z. Size outlet and junction boxes to minimum wire fill space requirements. Upsize box as required to allow ease of wire installation and device installation.

AA. Outlet and junction boxes in fire rated walls shall be gauged and spaced so as not to exceed the maximum penetration allowed by the assembly without compromising the fire rating. If a conflict arises relative to a specific condition, the contractor shall follow the requirements of the fire authority and ask for guidance from the design team. At no time should a larger box be installed prior to resolution of conflict.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 831 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.13 - 1 Electric Utility Systems
SECTION 26 05 46.13

ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Manholes, handholes and ducts to form a complete underground raceway system.

2. “Duct” and “conduit”, and “raceway” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning. Refer to Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for approved raceway and materials as well as execution.

3. Scope of Work: Furnishing, installation and connection of manholes, handholes and ducts to form a complete underground raceway system for distribution of electrical and signal systems and utility service entrance facilities. This specification shall also provide guidance for construction of the utility company underground and substructure requirements. Contact serving company directly and obtain current detailed requirements of installation and adhere by same.

Provide trenching, conduit, backfill, boxes and equipment pads as applicable.

Nothing here in shall be construed to be in conflict with the requirements of the utility company, which shall take precedence over any possible conflicting requirement.

B. Related Work:

1. SITEWORK.

2. FLATWORK.

3. LANDSCAPING.

4. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

5. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Conduits, fittings and boxes for raceway systems.

6. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 832 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.13 - 2 Electric Utility Systems

2. Include manholes, handholes, duct materials, and hardware. Proposed deviations from details on the drawings shall be clearly marked on the submittals.

3. If necessary to locate manholes or handholes at locations other than shown on the drawings, show the proposed locations accurately on scaled site drawings.

4. Precast manholes and handholes: Submit detail drawings and design calculations for approval prior to installation.

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

2. UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

3. UL 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 California Electrical Code (CEC)
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. RN 1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

2. TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing And Conduit

3. TC 3 PVC Fittings For Use With Rigid PVC Conduit And Tubing E. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 318 Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C478 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

2. C478M Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric).

3. F512-95 Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation
G. Utility company Handout Package and Construction Requirements for Underground and Substructure Installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: ACI 318, 3000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Number 4 minimum.

C. Manhole Hardware:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 833 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.13 - 3 Electric Utility Systems

1. Frames and covers (traffic type).

2. Sump frames and gratings.

3. Pulling Irons: 7/8” diameter hot dipped galvanized steel bar with exposed triangular shaped opening.

4. Cable supports:
a. Cable stanchions, hot rolled, heavy duty, hot dipped galvanized "T" section steel 2 1/4" by 1/4" in size and punched with 14 holes on 1 1/2" centers for attaching cable arms.
b. Cable arms, 3/16” gage, hot rolled, hot dipped galvanized sheet steel pressed to channel shape. Arms shall be approximately 2 1/2" wide and 14” long.
c. Insulators for cable supports, high glazed, wet process porcelain. d. Spares: Equip each cable stanchion with two spare cable arms and six spare insulators for future use.
e. Miscellaneous hardware, hot dipped galvanized steel.

D. Handhole Hardware:

1. Frames and covers configuration as shown on the drawings.

2. Pulling irons, 7/8” diameter galvanized steel bar with exposed triangular shaped opening.

E. Cable supports are not required.

F. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a 3” PVC sleeve in manhole floors so that a driven ground rod may be installed.

G. Manholes and Handholes shall be precast units and be constructed as described below. Units shall comply with ASTM C478, C478M.

1. Size: Plan area and clear height shall be not less than that shown on the drawings.

2. Accessories, hardware, and facilities shall be the same as required for poured in place type.

3. Assume ground water level 3’ below ground surface unless a higher water table is shown in the boring logs and adjust design accordingly.

H. Ducts:

1. Size shall be as shown on drawings.

2. Ducts (concrete encased):
a. Plastic Conduit:
1) NEMA TC6 & 8 and TC9 plastic utilities conduit UL 651 and 651A Schedule 40 PVC.
2) Duct shall be suitable for use with 90 degree C rated conductors.

3. Ducts (direct burial):
a. Plastic duct:
1) NEMA TC2 and TC3, EPC-40, Type II.
2) UL 651 and 651A, Schedule 40 Schedule 80 PVC.
3) Duct shall be suitable for use with 75 degree C rated conductors. b. Rigid metal conduit, PVC-coated: UL6 and NEMA RN1 galvanized rigid steel, threaded type, coated with PVC sheath bonded to the galvanized exterior surface, nominal 0.040” thick.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 834 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.13 - 4 Electric Utility Systems
I. Ground Rods: Per Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

J. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper No. 6 AWG minimum.

K. Conduit Spacers: Prefabricated plastic.

L. Warning Tape: Standard 4 mil polyethylene 3” wide tape, detectable type, red with black letters, imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW”.

M. Pull Rope: Plastic with 200 pound minimum tensile strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCHING
A. Refer to EARTHWORK section of specification for trenching back-filling, and compaction requirements.

B. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities to avoid damaging them.

C. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly for utility company trenches, notify for inspections by utility company a minimum of 48 hours in advance.

D. Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas, roads, and railroad tracks which are not to be disturbed shall be protected into place. Conduits shall be minimum 36” cover.

E. Trench Preparation: A 4” sand bedding is required if trench bottom is not rock free. A 4” sand covering over the cable is required if the native backfill is not rock free.

Backfill and compaction should meet City, County, State and utility company requirements. The serving utility company may required 100% sand backfill. All backfill requirements shall also meet or exceed those set forth in the earthwork or civil section of this specification.

F. Excavation: Provide 6” gravel in bottom of excavated holes for subsurface transformers and all concrete boxes. Spare gravel shall be available for final adjustment. The Contractor is responsible for final grade level of enclosures and boxes. Non-conformance will be corrected by electrical contractor at his expense.

G. Conduit Routing: Sharp turns, bends, or other irregularities in the conduit must be avoided. Minimum radius bends shall be as required by the serving utility company.

Every effort should be made to obtain a straight water tight conduit line. The end of all spare conduits must be capped. The utility company Inspector must approve deviation from layout.

H. Conformance: All work must conform to the utility company “handout package” and Specification 59 and/or 99. Copies are available from the utility company upon request.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 835 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.13 - 5 Electric Utility Systems
I. Joint Trenching: Maintain all required depths, clearance and separations as required by code, ordinance or utility company policies. Coordinate with other utilities to confirm requirements.

3.2 OTHER PADMOUNTED EQUIPMENT
A. Provide adequately sized and reinforced concrete pads with openings for conduit(s) as necessary by the utility company and or the equipment manufacturer.

B. A grounding system shall be installed at each padmounted piece of equipment including, but not limited to, a ground rod, grounding conductor, ufer, and ground grid (if called for).

C. Padmounted equipment shall be bolted to concrete pad with minimum 5/8” x 7 1/2" anchor bolts, one in each of 4 corners of each section of padmounted equipment.

END OF SECTION 26 05 46.13

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 836 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.16 - 1 Telephone Utility Service
SECTION 26 05 46.16

TELEPHONE UTILITY SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

2. Section 31 20 00, EARTHMOVING.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contact the serving utility company at start of construction and again 30 days prior to date that service cable placement will be required.

B. Compliance with Standards: the serving utility company reserves the right to refuse to use any conduit, pullboxes, manholes or utility boxes that deviate from applicable building codes, plans and/or specifications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MTTB: Main Telephone Terminal Board
B. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit
C. UFER: concrete-encased electrode
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Main Telephone Terminal Board (MTTB) shall be provided with a #6 THHN solid copper ground wire in 1/2" conduit run to a main electric service ground: either the concrete-encased electrode ("UFER") or the metal underground water pipe. Provide with minimum of 30" clear working space shall be provided in front of MTTB. If in a closet, no door sills or center posts shall obstruct access.

B. Interior MTTB shall be 3/4" thick plywood sized and located per plan. Fasten securely to wall. Provide with adjacent 120 volt double duplex receptacle on dedicated 20amp circuit.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 837 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 46.16 - 2 Telephone Utility Service
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Service Conduits shall be RNC Schedule 40 or GT-80 below grade except at bends up to and including above grade which shall be RNC Schedule 80. Verify with utility prior to installation.

1. Mandrel and measure conduits end-to-end to facilitate the utility ordering of cables.

2. Provide minimum 3/16" pull rope in each conduit.

3. Minimum cover for conduit shall be 30".

4. Minimum separation from power conduit(s) in joint trench shall be 12" of compacted soil or 3" of concrete.

5. Conduits at backboard shall extend 2" above finish floor or 6" below ceiling and 1" out from face of backboard.

6. Minimum radius of bends from trench to building shall be 36".

B. 300' Conduit length and bending limits: Unless otherwise shown on the plan, service entrance conduit length shall not exceed for 4" conduit or 250' for 2" conduit. Not including risers, conduits shall have a maximum of 270 degrees total of bending including a maximum of two 90 degree bends. If these limits are exceeded, a pull box will be required.

C. All manholes, pullboxes and utility boxes shall be sized per plan with cover marked "TELEPHONE" as manufactured by Associated Concrete or Plastic Products "Quikset", Brooks, Christy or equal as approved by the utility company.

1. Pullboxes shall be provided with cable racking and torsion parkway cover. If required by the utility, also provide with 5' ground rod driven 4' into ground.

2. Utility boxes shall be provided with 5' ground rod driven 4' into ground if required by the utility.

END OF SECTION 26 05 46.16

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 838 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0546.19 - 1 Cable Television (CATV)
Utility Systems
SECTION 26 05 46.19

CABLE TELEVISION (CATV) UTILITY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

2. Section 31 20 00, EARTHMOVING.

1.2 Work Included
A. Contact the serving Cable Television (CATV) utility company at start of construction and again 30 days prior to date CATV service cable placement will be required.

B. Compliance with Standards: The utility company reserves the right to refuse to use any conduit, pullboxes, manholes or utility boxes that deviate from applicable building codes, utility standards, plans and/or specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide a complete conduit infrastructure for installation of the utility service cable.

Materials shall comply with applicable portions of specification sections 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all trenching, excavations, and rock-free backfill (1/4” screen) and service conduits. Notify serving company 48 hours before backfill.

B. Service Conduits shall be RNC Schedule 40 or GT-80 below grade except at bends up to and including above grade which shall be RNC Schedule 80. Verify with utilities prior to installation.

1. Mandrel and measure conduits end-to-end to facilitate installation of CATV cables.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 839 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0546.19 - 2 Cable Television (CATV)
Utility Systems

2. Provide minimum 3/16" pull rope in each conduit.

3. Minimum cover for conduit shall be 24".

4. Minimum separation from power conduit(s) in joint trench shall be 12" of compacted soil or 3" of concrete.

5. Conduits at backboard shall extend 2" above finish floor or 6" below ceiling and 1" out from face of backboard.

6. Minimum radius of bends from trench to building shall be 36".

C. Conduit length and bending limits: Unless otherwise shown on the plan, service entrance conduit length shall not exceed 500’. Not including risers, conduits shall have a maximum of 270 degrees total of bending including a maximum of two 90-degree bends. If these limits are exceeded, a pull box will be required.

D. All manholes, pullboxes and utility boxes shall be sized per plan with cover marked "Cable TV" as manufactured by Associated Concrete or Plastic Products "Quikset", Brooks, Christy or equal as approved by utility company.

E. Conduits must enter boxes with a 90 degree sweep and shall be no more than a 15 degree angle from the main line trench.

F. Pullropes: Install 3/16" polypropylene 800 lb. minimum test pull line in 2" conduits and 1/8" polypropylene 200 lb. minimum test pull line in 1" conduits.

G. Locations of existing underground facilities shall be obtained by calling Underground Service Alert at least 48 hours in advance, 800-642-2444.

END OF SECTION 26 05 46.19

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 840 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 1 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads.

2. Channel support systems.

3. Restraint cables.

4. Hanger rod stiffeners.

5. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC:
a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
b. Component Response Modification Factor: 3.0.
c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second):

SDS=1.361g.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period:

SD1=0.663g.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 841 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 2 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings.

Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 842 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 3 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

3. California Dynamics Corporation.

4. Isolation Technology, Inc.

5. Kinetics Noise Control.

6. Mason Industries.

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

8. Vibration Isolation.

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

C. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant rubber.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. California Dynamics Corporation.

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

4. Hilti Inc.

5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.

6. Mason Industries.

7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.

8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 843 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 4 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and waterresistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications.

Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 844 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 5 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems

3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.

2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.

Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 845 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 6 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways and cables where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Engineer before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Engineer’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure.

Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Engineer.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 846 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 48 - 7 Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems
END OF SECTION 26 05 48

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 847 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0553 – Identification of Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Nameplates and warning signs where specified herein and as shown on contract documents including the following:
a. Nameplates and warning signs permanently installed on all electrical equipment and devices including, but not limited to, the following items:
1) Enclosures for transformers, switchboards, motor control, panels, pullboxes, cabinets, motors, generators, transfer switches.
2) Enclosures for all separately enclosed devices including, but not limited to, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, contactors, time switches, control stations and relays, fire alarm panels and lighting control panel. 3) Wall switches not within sight of outlet controlled. 4) Special systems such as, but not limited to, telephone, fire alarm, warning and signal systems. Identification shall be at each equipment rack, terminal cabinet, control panel, annunciator and pullbox.
5) Devices mounted within and part of equipment including circuit breakers, switches, control devices, control transformers, relays, indication devices and instruments.

2. Conductor and Cable Identification.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

2. Section 26 0519, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.

3. Section 26 1300, MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR (ABOVE 600 VOLTS).

4. Section 26 1302, SWITCHES, MEDIUM VOLTAGE (ABOVE 600 VOLTS).

5. Section 26 2416, PANELBOARDS.

6. Section 26 2816, ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

7. Section 26 1200, MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.

8. Section 26 2414, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD.

9. Section 26 0534, CABINETS.

10. Section 26 2413, SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 848 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0553 – Identification of Electrical Systems

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL DESIGNATIONS
A. Equipment labels indicating equipment designations both emergency and normal. Designation data per drawings or to be supplied with shop drawings approval.

B. Panelboard labels showing panel designation, voltage, phase and source.

C. In accordance with CEC 110.16, provide arc flash protection warning labels on all switchboards, panelboards, distribution panels, transformers, safety switches, transfer equipment, etc. Labels shall be per ANSI Z535.4 guidelines.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. For Labels: Three layer laminated plastic or micarta with engraved white letters over black background.

B. For Emergency Equipment: Use engraved white letters over red background.

C. For Warning Signs: Minimum 18 gauge steel with red lettering on white porcelain enamel finish.

D. Arc flash labels shall be provided as required by CEC Article 70E.

E. Conductor tape number markers: TayMac MX4280 Series non-fading permanent adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING
A. Equipment labels shall be mounted by self-tapping, threaded screws and bolts, or by rivets.

Adhesive types are not acceptable unless specifically noted in this section.

B. Conductor tape markers shall be consistently placed for ready conductor identification.

3.2 HEIGHTS ON LABELS
A. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers and Special Systems Enclosures: 1/4" identify equipment designation; 1/8” identify voltage rating and source.

B. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 3/16” identify circuit and load served, including location of equipment.

C. Enclosed Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 3/16” identify load served.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 849 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0553 – Identification of Electrical Systems

D. Transformers: 3/16” identify equipment designation; 1/8” identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source and secondary load. Include location of primary source or secondary load if remote from transformer.

3.3 WARNING SIGNS
A. Warning signs shall be permanently mounted with cadmium plated steel screws or nickel-plated brass bolts.

B. Warning signs to read "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE", with letters 1 1/2" high, 3/16” stroke minimum.

C. Provide warning sign on all doors or immediately next to door for equipment rooms, enclosures or closets containing equipment energized above 150 volts to ground as per CEC, and/or as directed by the Architect. For interior finish spaces and interior doors, signage shall be coordinated and approved with the Architect in advance of installation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 850 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 0553 – Identification of Electrical Systems

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 851 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 1 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination
SECTION 26 05 73

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the requirements of the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination.

B. A short circuit and coordination study shall be prepared for the electrical overcurrent devices to be installed under this project to assure selective coordination, proper equipment and personnel protection.

C. The study shall present an organized time current analysis of each protective device in series from the individual overcurrent device back to the utility and the on-site generator sources. The study shall reflect the operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions.

D. Implement as part of this contract, all manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum protection and best selective coordination at no additional cost to Owner.

E. The Contractor shall furnish an ARC Flash analysis study per NFPA 70E – Standard For Electrical Safety In The Workplace, Reference Article 130.3 and Appendix D.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Section 26 24 16, PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboards.

C. Section 26 13 00, SWITCHGEAR, HIGH VOLTAGE (ABOVE 600 VOLTS): Primary distribution switchgear.

D. Section 26 13 02, SWITCHES, HIGH VOLTAGE (ABOVE 600 VOLTS): Primary switches.

E. Section 26 24 14, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Low voltage distribution switchboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL, submit the following:

1. Complete short circuit and coordination study as described herein.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 852 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 2 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination

2. Protective equipment shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously with or after the protective device study. Protective equipment shop drawings will not be accepted prior to protective device study.

3. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Engineer:
a. Certification by the Contractor that the protective devices have been adjusted and set in accordance with the approved protective device study. b. Final setting values for each adjustable trip device.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

1. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

2. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

3. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis

4. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings

5. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

6. IEEE 1584 - Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

2. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures

3. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis

4. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories.

C. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition

2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
The protective device study shall be prepared by qualified engineers of the high voltage switchgear manufacturer or an approved consultant. The Contractor is responsible for providing all pertinent information required by the preparers to complete the study. Submit engineer’s qualifications with study.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 853 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 3 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination

1.6 REQUIREMENTS
A. The complete study shall include a system one line diagram, short circuit and ground fault analysis, and protective coordination plots.

B. One Line Diagram:

1. Show on the one line diagram, all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the overcurrent devices installed under this project. Clearly show, on the one line, the schematic wiring of the electrical distribution system.

2. Also show on the one line diagram the following specific information:
a. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short circuit values at each bus.
b. Breaker and fuse ratings.
c. Generator kW and Transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios, and wiring connections.
d. Voltage at each bus.
e. Identification of each bus.
f. Conduit material, feeder sizes, length, and X/R ratios.

C. Short Circuit Study:

1. Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short circuit and ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor contribution in determining the momentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices.

2. The study shall be calculated by means of a computer program. Pertinent data and the rationale employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study.

3. Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format. Include the following:
a. Device identification.
b. Operating voltage.
c. Protective device.
d. Device rating.

D. Calculated short circuit current.

E. Coordination Curves:

1. Prepare the coordination curves to determine the required settings of protective devices to assure selective coordination. Graphically illustrate on log paper that adequate time separation exists between series devices, including the utility company upstream device. Plot the specific time current characteristics of each protective device in such a manner that all upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one sheet.

2. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves:
a. Device identification.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. 3-phase and 1-phase ANSI damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum short circuit cutoff point.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 854 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 4 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination

3. Develop a table to summarize the settings selected for the protective devices.

Include the following in the table:
a. Device identification.
b. Relay CT ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup. c. Circuit breaker sensor rating, long time, short time, and instantaneous settings, and time bands.
d. Fuse rating and type.
e. Ground fault pickup and time delay.

1.7 ANALYSIS
A. Analyze the short circuit calculations, and highlight any equipment that is determined to be underrated as specified. Propose approaches to effectively protect the underrated equipment.

B. After developing the coordination curves, highlight areas lacking coordination. Present a technical evaluation with a discussion of the logical compromises for best coordination.

1.8 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Necessary final field adjustments, settings and minor modifications shall be made to conform with the protective device study without additional cost to the Owner.

B. All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the protective device study.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STUDIES
A. Contractor to furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as prepared by equipment manufacturer or an approved consultant.

B. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.

2.2 DATA COLLECTION
A. Contractor shall furnish all data as required by the power system studies. The Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 855 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 5 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination
B. Source combination may include present and future motors and generators.

C. Load data utilized shall include proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents provided by Owner, or Contractor.

D. Include fault contribution of existing motors in the study, with motors greater than 25 hp. The Contractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the study requirements.

2.3 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVAULATION STUDY A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE Standards 141-1993.

B. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.

C. Provide the following:

1. Calculation methods and assumptions

2. Selected base per unit quantities

3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated

4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics

5. Typical calculations

6. Tabulations of calculated quantities

7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations.

D. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault
at each:

1. Electric utility’s supply termination point

2. Incoming switchgear

3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals

4. Low voltage switchgear

5. Motor control centers

6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches

7. Branch circuit panelboards

8. Other significant locations throughout the system.

E. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

F. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings

2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses

3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses

4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating

5. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 856 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 6 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination

2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed on log-log scale paper.

B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered.

C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.

D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable:

1. Electric utility’s protective device

2. Medium voltage equipment relays

3. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands

4. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands

5. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer withstand parameters

6. Conductor damage curves

7. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable

8. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points

9. Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point

10. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center.

F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection.

2.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal.

C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 45 kVA.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 857 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 7 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination
E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load.

Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary.

H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2.

2.6 REPORT SECTIONS
A. Input Data:

1. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines

2. Cable and conduit materials

3. Bus ducts

4. Transformers

5. Reactors

6. Aerial lines

7. Circuit resistance and reactive values.

B. Short-Circuit Data:

1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions

2. X to R ratios

3. Asymmetry factors

4. Motor contributions

5. Short circuit kVA

6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

C. Recommended Protective Device Settings:

1. Phase and Ground Relays:
a. Current transformer ratio
b. Current setting
c. Time setting
d. Instantaneous setting
e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings
f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

2. Circuit Breakers:
a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground) b. Adjustable time-current characteristic
c. Adjustable instantaneous pickup
d. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations

1. Arcing fault magnitude

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 858 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 8 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination

2. Device clearing time

3. Duration of arc

4. Arc flash boundary

5. Working distance

6. Incident energy

7. Hazard Risk Category

8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT AND FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies and include all recommendations.

C. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the field engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer, a 2-year warranty shall be provided on all components manufactured by the engineering service parent manufacturing company.

3.2 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. The Contractor shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed, a sample is included in this specification.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, ARC FLASH HAZARD”, and shall include the following information:

1. Location designation

2. Nominal voltage

3. Flash protection boundary

4. Hazard risk category

5. Incident energy

6. Working distance

7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings.

1. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboards, one arc flash label shall be provided.

2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided.

3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 859 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 9 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination

4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided.

5. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided E. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

3.3 ARC FLASH TRAINING
A. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard For Electrical Safety Requirements For Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipment manuals. The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET).

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 860 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 05 73 - 10 Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination
END OF SECTION 16051

3.4 END OF SECTION 26 05 73

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 861 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 08 10 - 1 Electrical Acceptance Testing
SECTION 26 08 10

ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Testing, evaluation and calibration of equipment provided, installed and connected in Division 26.

2. Evaluation of connection and normal operation of utilization equipment, provided in other Divisions, for installation and connection in Division 26.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.

2. Section 26 28 16, ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

3. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

4. Section 26 22 00, LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.

5. Section 26 24 16, PANELBOARDS.

6. Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION.

7. Section 26 36 23, AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES.

8. Section 26 32 13, ENGINE GENERATOR.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Acceptance Testing Criteria: Latest edition of Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, published by IETA.

B. Applicable Codes, Standards and References:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).

5. International Electrical Testing Association (IETA).

6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

7. State and local codes and ordinances.

8. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).

9. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC).

10. OSHA Part 1910; Subpart S, 1910.308.

11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 862 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 08 10 - 2 Electrical Acceptance Testing

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:

1. Retain the services of a recognized independent testing firm for the purpose of performing inspections and tests as specified herein.

2. Independent test firm providing report direct to Architect.

3. All material, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform tests and inspections provided by testing firm.

4. It is the intent of these tests to assure that all electrical equipment, Contractor or Owner supplied, is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with design Specifications.

5. Tests and inspections determine suitability for energization.

6. Supply to the independent testing organization complete sets of approved shop drawings, coordination study (provided by Contractor's equipment supplier under Contractor's direction, setting of all adjustable devices and other information requested by testing agency).

B. Scope of Testing, Evaluation and Calibration:

1. Power transformers.

2. Distribution transformers.

3. Low voltage circuit breakers (greater than 100 amp).

4. Medium voltage circuit breakers.

5. Metal enclosed switchgear.

6. Switchboards.

7. Ground fault protective signaling.

8. Protective relays and associated instrument transformers.

9. Medium voltage cables.

10. Bus duct.

11. Grounding systems.

12. Motor control centers.

13. Generators.

14. Automatic transfer switches.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports:

1. Maintain written record of all tests.

2. At completion of project, assemble and certify a final test report. Submit report to Architect prior to final acceptance to include:
a. Summary of project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Visual inspection report.
d. Description of tests.
e. Test results.
f. Conclusions and recommendations.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Testing Firm:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 863 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 08 10 - 3 Electrical Acceptance Testing

1. Corporately independent testing organization which can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by testing firms.

2. Independent organization as defined by OSHA Title 29, Part 1936 and IETA.

3. Regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials, devices, appliances, electrical installations and systems for the purpose of preventing injury to persons or damage to property and other equipment.

4. Engaged in testing practices for minimum of 2 years.

5. Use only full-time technicians, regularly employed by firm for testing services.

Electrically unskilled employees are not permitted to perform testing or assistance of any kind. Electricians and line workers may assist, but may not perform testing or inspection services.

6. Submit proof of above qualifications with Bid Documents.

B. Certifications:

1. Comply with OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Parts 1907, 1910 and 1936. Full membership in the IETA constitutes proof of such criteria.

2. Lead, on site, technical person currently certified by IETA in Electrical Power Distribution System Testing.

3. All instruments used by testing firm to evaluate electrical performance meet IETA Specifications for Test Instruments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:

1. Contractor's Responsibilities:
a. Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior to and in addition to tests performed by testing firm.
b. Notify the testing firm when equipment becomes available for acceptance tests. Coordinate work to expedite project scheduling.

2. Testing Firm's Responsibilities:
a. Notify Architect prior to commencement of any testing. b. Report directly to Architect any systems, material or installation found defective on the basis of acceptance tests.
c. Provide auxiliary portable power supply necessary for conducting tests.

3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Final Settings: Testing firm responsible for implementing all final settings and adjustments on protective devices and tap changes in accordance with Architect's specified values.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 864 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 08 10 - 4 Electrical Acceptance Testing
END OF SECTION 26 08 10

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 865 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 09 00 - 1 Controls and Instrumentation
SECTION 26 09 00

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Control devices, shown on the drawings and/or required by other sections, to assure a complete and operating system.

2. Furnish submittals/shop drawings for all equipment in this section as described in Section 26 05 00, 1.4, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Terminal and Control Cabinets shall be manufactured from code gauge galvanized steel with hinged locking covers finished in grey or hammer tone enamel. Knockouts, barriers and plywood backing shall be provided where required. Cabinets shall be of raintight construction where exposed to the weather. Approved manufacturers are Circle AW, Wireguard, Benner-Nawman, or equal.

B. Photocontrols and time switches shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.

Approved manufacturers are Intermatic, Paragon, Tork or equal. Where indicated on the fixture schedule, photocells in outdoor fixtures shall be factory installed and wired.

C. Lighting Contactors shall be of the correct number of poles with suitable contact ampere ratings. Provide fusing protection for all lighting contactor control circuits.

Verify all coil voltages prior to installation. Approved manufacturers are General Electric, Westinghouse, Square "D" or equal.

D. Motor Controls shall be manual or magnetic with motor overload thermal relays.

Individual thermal elements sized to the correct motor full load amps shall be used.

Provide correct NEMA rated enclosure. Select proper voltage, class, size and horsepower rating. Select the correct coil voltage if magnetic.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 866 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 09 00 - 2 Controls and Instrumentation
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Power to all irrigation controllers shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor as required for the irrigation equipment. Also provide and install conduit sweeps as required to house low voltage wiring between controller and exterior below grade.

B. General Purpose Control Contactors shall be rated for the use with the correct ampere rating, voltage, size and horse power rating. Select the correct control coil voltage.

END OF SECTION 26 09 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 867 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 13 - 1 Service and Distribution Switchboard
SECTION 26 24 13

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Service and distribution switchboard where shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to applicable Codes and NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 01 33 00 of Division 01, Submittals and of Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Shop Drawings shall show and contain the following information:

1. Plans showing top and bottom of switchboards.

2. Front, rear and side elevations of switchboards.

3. Schematic Wiring Diagrams showing the following:
a. One-line diagram with each circuit numbered.
b. Schedule showing circuit number, description and rating of protective device(s).
c. Complete short circuit with standability of bus.

4. One-half inch equal to one-foot scale drawings of electrical rooms or areas overall dimensions for equipment layout including space available for conduits and protective devices.

C. Switchgear shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, CEC and as shown on the drawings. Approved manufacturers are Cutler Hammer, Square D, and Seimens.

D. Manufacturer shall provide certification that the equipment supplied under this Section has been reviewed and certified by IBC to meet the current criteria for special seismic certification. Include seismic companion anchorage requirements from the testing and as approved by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide an approved label

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 868 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 13 - 2 Service and Distribution Switchboard
on the equipment enclosure stating that the equipment has been awarded a certificate of compliance for special seismic certification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Each switchboard shall be U.L. listed deadfront, deadrear, completely self-supporting, with the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one floorstanding switchboard. Construction shall be NEMA Class II with line and load and main bus connections accessible from the front. Provide switchboards of 1000 amperes or greater rating with line and load insulated bus bars. Overcurrent protective devices shall be grouped in convertible type construction. Vertical sections shall have full height bussing and where space for future devices is indicated on the Drawings all the necessary mounting hardware shall be furnished. Switchboards shall include all protective devices and other equipment indicated on the Contract Drawings with the necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring. Bus shall be copper with plated joints, or tin plated aluminum. Bus bars shall be mounted on supports of high impact-resistant, non-tracking insulating material, and braced to withstand the maximum available fault current as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Other ratings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Series-connected or "integrated equipment" short circuit ratings shall not be applied in lieu of, or to comply with, short circuit and interrupting capacity ratings indicated on the Drawings, unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

B. Service and distribution sections shall contain circuit breakers, fusible switches, and combination motor starters, with shunt trips, motor operators, ground fault protection, and other accessories, as indicated on the Drawings, as well as provisions for utility metering in accordance with the serving electric utility requirements. Each disconnecting means shall be provided with a means for individual padlocking.

Switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make and quick-break, and horsepower rated through 500 HP. Switches rated over 600 amperes shall be bolted pressure contact type. Ratings of disconnecting means and overcurrent protective devices shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Finish: Interior finish shall be a gray lacquer or enamel; exterior finish shall be a gray baked-on enamel or lacquer. Apply all finish coatings over a rust-inhibiting metal primer.

D. Identification: Each switchboard shall have an engraved laminated plastic nameplate identifying the switchboard as designated and located on the Contract Drawings, and indicating voltage, phase, and number of system conductors. For example, "Switchboard MS 277/480V. 3Ø 4W. Lettering shall be white on black finish and 2” high minimum. Nameplates shall be affixed by a minimum of two escutcheon pins or screws. Each device on the switchboard shall be provided with an engraved plastic nameplate as specified in Section 26 05 53, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 869 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 13 - 3 Service and Distribution Switchboard
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Switchboard(s) shall be securely bolted to the flooring or structure. Final attachment means shall be in compliance with the seismic requirements of governing authority.

Shop Drawings indicating the bolt down requirements shall be provided by the manufacturer along with all necessary calculations and shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings of the switchboard equipment. Refer to other Sections of the Specifications related to seismic requirements.

B. Switchboard(s) shall be installed on a level floor, with shims provided where necessary to attain both horizontal and vertical "plumb" conditions.

C. Switchboard(s) equipment shall be protected during construction in such a manner to prevent plaster, paint, dust, etc. from defacing the finish of equipment. Prior to final acceptance of the equipment, the interior of the equipment shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and debris. Any blemishes or defects on the exterior of the equipment shall be repaired by painting the equipment with paint supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to match the factory finishes.

D. All floor mounted switchgear and panelboards shall be sealed with caulking between bottom of metal housing and the concrete pad or slab to prevent entrance of dust and debris.

E. All openings in switchgear and panelboards that are unused shall be sealed with bolts and washers. Use caulking where holes or openings cannot be sealed by way of a washer, or bolts or conduit seals.

F. All ventilated openings in panelboards and switchboards shall be furnished with dust filters to prevent entrance of dust and debris.

G. No operating handles in any switchboard shall be located above 6’- 6” above finish floor. Code clearances on all sides of the switchboard equipment shall be maintained.

H. Switchboards shall be mechanically grounded to the grounding system.

I. Furnish ammeters, voltmeters, current and potential transformers, test blocks, control switches, fuses and circuit breakers, and other devices as indicated on the Drawings.

Meters shall be switchboard type semi-flush mounted, with phase selector switches.

The height of all devices shall comply with Code and utility company requirements with the switchboard installed on a 2” high concrete pad.

J. For solidly grounded "wye" services of more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase to phase, provide ground fault protection of equipment for each service disconnecting means for services rated 1000 amperes or more, without a single main disconnecting means. Provide ground fault protection of equipment for other systems as indicated on the Drawings.

K. Ground fault sensors shall be zero sequence type unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Trip settings shall be as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 870 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 13 - 4 Service and Distribution Switchboard
L. Protection: Keep switchboards covered during construction operations. Clean interior and exterior after all connections are completed. Factory connections shall be checked and re-torqued tight as required. Damage shall be field or factory repaired to a condition acceptable to the Engineer at no added cost to the Owner.

M. Operational Test of the ground fault protection system using the primary current injection method shall be performed by qualified personnel with suitable testing/recording equipment in the presence of the Owner. Provide the Owner with a "Certified Test Report" including test parameters.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General:

1. Inspect for physical damage.

2. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest single line diagram and report discrepancies.

3. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage and grounding.

4. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method. Refer to manufacturer's instruction for proper foot pound levels.

5. Key interlock systems shall be physically tested to insure proper function. a. Closure attempt shall be made on locked open devices. Opening attempt shall be made on locked closed devices.
b. Key exchange shall be made with devices operated in off-normal positions.

6. All doors, panels and sections shall be inspected for paint, dents, scratches.

END OF SECTION 26 24 13

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 871 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 16 - 1 Panelboards
SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Panelboards.

2. Manufacturer shall provide certification that the equipment supplied under this Section has been reviewed and certified by IBC to meet the current criteria for special seismic certification. Include seismic companion anchorage requirements from the testing and as approved by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide an approved label on the equipment enclosure stating that the equipment has been awarded a certificate of compliance for special seismic certification.

B. Related Work:

1. Division 09 “PAINTING”: Identification and painting of panelboards.

2. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

3. Section 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: Requirements for the over current protective devices to be installed to ensure proper equipment and personnel protection.

4. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

5. Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.

6. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. No. 50-1995 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

2. No. 67-1993 Panelboards

3. No. 489-1991 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker enclosures C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 872 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 16 - 2 Panelboards

1. No. 70-2010 California Electrical Code (CEC)
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. No. PB-1-2002 Panelboards.

2. No. AB-3-1996 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, CEC and as shown on the drawings. Approved manufacturers are Cutler Hammer, Square D, and Seimens.

B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboards shall be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be of the same manufacturer.

C. All panelboards shall be dead front safety type. Arrange sections for easy removal without disturbing other sections.

D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers. All factory wiring shall be checked for correct tightness and visually inspected to insure that bussing and terminations have not become loose in transit to job site.

E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed, and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings. Refer to single line diagram and panel schedules on drawings. Terminals shall be minimum 75 degree rated. Back fed main circuit breakers are not allowed. Main circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted.

F. Panelboards shall have the following features:

1. Nonreduced size copper bus bars, and connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported on molded insulators. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of branch circuit devices.

2. Full size neutral bar, mounted on insulated supports.

3. Ground bar and isolation ground bar (where called for in panel schedule) with sufficient terminals for all grounding wires. Buses braced for the available short circuit current.

4. All breakers and phase bus connections shall be arranged so that it will be possible to substitute a 2-pole breaker for two single pole breakers, and a 3-pole breaker for three single pole breakers, when trip is 30 amps or less and frame size is 100 amperes or less, without having to drill and tap the main bus bars at bus straps. Where used for heating and air conditioning, and refrigeration equipment, use only HACR type U.L. listed circuit breakers.

5. Design interior so that protective devices can be replaced without removing adjacent units, main bus connectors, and without drilling or tapping.

6. Where designated on panel schedule as "space", include all necessary bussing, device support and connections. Provide blank cover for each space.

7. In two section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The first section shall be furnished with subfeed lugs on the line side with cable

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 873 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 16 - 3 Panelboards
connections to the second section. Panelboard sections with tapped bus or crossover bus are not acceptable.

8. Series rated panelboards are not permitted.

9. Label all panels in accordance with Section 26 05 53, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

10. Recessed panel space conduit: Provide (1) ¾ inch spare conduit stubbed to accessible ceiling space and/or interstitial space below floor for every (5) spaces and spares indicated on panel schedules.

G. Panelboards serving as building mains shall be “service entrance rated” and UL Listed as “service equipment”.

2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS
A. Cabinets:

1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. Cabinets for outdoor panels shall be factory primed and suitably treated with a corrosion-resisting paint finish meeting UL standard for outdoor applications.

2. All ventilated openings in panelboards and switchboards, shall be furnished with dust filters to prevent entrance of dust and debris.

3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with end and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.

4. Provide necessary hardware for "in" and "out" adjustment of panel interior.

5. Cabinets for two section panelboards shall be arranged side by side, and shall be the same height. Flush mounted cabinets should be 1 1/2" apart and coupled by conduit nipple if necessary.

6. Gutter size in panel boxes, on all sides, shall be in accordance with the CEC.

Penetrations through gutter to live area of the panelboard shall incorporate approved non-metallic-grommet type of insulation to protect wire passing through.

B. Trims:

1. Fabricate trim of sheet steel consisting of frame with door attached by concealed hinges. Provide flush or surface trim as shown on the drawings.

2. Flush trims shall overlap the box by at least 3/4" all around.

3. Surface trim shall have the same width and height as the box.

4. Flush or surface trims shall not have ventilating openings.

5. Secure trims to back boxes by indicating trim clamps.

6. Provide a welded angle on rear of trim to support and align trim to cabinet.

7. Provide separate trims for each section of multiple section panelboards. Trims and doors of sections shall be of the same height.

C. Doors:

1. Provide doors with flush type latch and manufacturer's standard lock. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have a vault handle and a three-point catch, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom, and center.

2. In making switching devices accessible, doors shall not uncover any live parts.

3. Provide concealed hinges welded to the doors and trims.

4. For lighting or power contactors incorporated in panelboards, provide separate doors for the contactors.

5. Provide keyed alike system for all panelboards.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 874 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 16 - 4 Panelboards

6. Provide a directory card, metal holder, and transparent cover. Permanently mount holders on inside of doors.

D. Painting:

1. Thoroughly clean and paint trims and doors at the factory with primer and manufacturer's standard finish.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Breakers shall be UL listed and labeled, in accordance with the CEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar or branch circuit bar.

1. Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating as indicated or as dictated by Section 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.

2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100 ampere frame or less.

Magnetic trip shall be adjustable from 3 times to 10 times for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher. Factory setting shall be HI, unless otherwise noted.

C. Breaker features shall be as follows:

1. Integral housing of molded insulating material.

2. Silver alloy contacts.

3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.

4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.

5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.

6. Electrically and mechanically trip free.

7. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions. a. Line connections shall be bolted.
b. Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current available at the line terminals as indicated on the drawings, and as shown on the electrical system protective device study as required in Section 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.

The interrupting rating shall not be less than the minimum identified requirement.

8. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the breaker to open.

2.4 SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breakers are shown on the drawings, provide circuit breakers in accordance with the applicable requirements of those specified for panelboards.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 875 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 24 16 - 5 Panelboards
B. Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the drawings. Where the types are not shown, they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the environmental conditions where the breakers are being installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with CEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected. Coordinate the sizes and layout of cabinets within the designated spaces.

All equipment must be dimensioned in order to physically fit in the spaces provided and to comply with all code required clearances.

C. Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard. Include the room numbers (as finally described by the Owner) and items served on the cards. Obtain final room numbers from Architect prior to creating schedule.

D. Mount the panelboard so that maximum height of the top circuit breaker above finished floor shall not exceed 78 inches.

E. For panelboards located in areas accessible to the public, paint the exposed surfaces of the trims, doors, and boxes with finishes to match surrounding surfaces after the panelboards have been installed.

F. Circuit numbers shall correspond to the approved panel schedule. Provide as-built drawings showing the actual circuit numbers being used for each device on each branch circuit if changes are required.

G. Verify depth of all flushmounted enclosures in walls to be certain wall depth will accommodate panel depth prior to installation.

H. All openings in switchgear and panelboards that are unused shall be sealed with bolts and washers. Use caulking where holes or openings cannot be sealed by way of a washer, or bolts or conduit seals.

I. Contractor shall include the services of an independent testing company to test GFI circuit breakers in distribution and main panelboards.

END OF SECTION 26 24 16

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 876 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 27 26 - 1 Wiring Devices
SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Wiring devices.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

2. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

3. Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.

4. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES
A. General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-grounding feature (this feature does not substitute for a grounding conductor terminated on grounding strap of device). Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal.

2. Receptacles shall be of a screw terminal type, “pressure type quick wire” terminations are not allowed.

B. Duplex receptacles shall be style line/decora single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole, 3-wire, and conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The duplex type shall have bussing break-off feature for two-circuit operation. The ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal.

1. Wiring device color selection to be provided by Architect. Contractor to verify device color with Architect prior to procurement.

2. Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top receptacle is switched. The remaining receptacle shall be unswitched.

3. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box.
a. Ground fault interrupter shall be commercial grade and consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 877 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 27 26 - 2 Wiring Devices
interrupter switch. It shall be rated for operation on a 60 Hz, 120 volt, 20- ampere branch circuit. Device shall meet CEC requirements. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a second. Devices shall meet UL 943.

C. Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete and match with appropriate cord grip plug. Devices shall meet UL 231.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a listed weather resistant duplex receptacle, mounted in box with a gasketed, while in use weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. Approved manufacturers: Intermatic WP10 Series, Thomas & Betts/Red Dot 2CK Series, or engineer approved equal.

2.2 SWITCHES AND DIMMERS
A. Style line/decora rocker switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic compound. Toggle handles color to match receptacle device color unless otherwise specified.

1. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty generalpurpose use with an integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and be of a screw terminal type.

2. Shall be color coded for current rating, listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and meet the requirements of NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty and UL 20.

3. Ratings:
a. 120 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.
b. 277 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 277 volts AC.

4. The switches shall be mounted on the strike plate side of doors.

5. Incorporate barriers between switches with multi-gang outlet boxes where required by the CEC.

6. All toggle switches shall be of the same manufacturer.

B. Dimmers: Incandescent lamp loads. Wall-mounted incandescent dimmers shall be specification grade with capability of raising and lowering the lighting from completely off to full intensity. Dimmers shall maintain full load rating even when two or more units are installed adjacent to one another. All wall-mounted dimmers shall be of the same manufacturer and of a “slide” type. Color shall match all other wiring devices on project.

C. Dimmers: Fluorescent lamp loads. Wall-mounted fluorescent lamp dimmers shall be specification grade and shall be capable of raising and lowering the lighting from five percent light output. Dimmers shall have low end intensity adjustment and maintain full load rating even when two or more units are installed adjacent to one another. All wall-mounted dimmers shall be of the same manufacturer and of a “slide” type.

Dimming ballast shall be provided for each lamp or pair of lamps. Dimmers shall have adequate capacity for the load served and the environment in which installed.

2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel at App Bay, thermo plastic throughout.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 878 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 27 26 - 3 Wiring Devices
B. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be interchangeable. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be accordance with NEMA WD1.

C. For receptacles or switches ganged together, wall plates shall be a single ganged plate.

D. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in the associated specification.

E. Surface mounted boxes, NEMA1, shall be industrial grade raised galvanized steel covers. In shop areas all receptacles shall be dust proof and or waterproof where applicable.

F. Waterproof device covers shall be cast iron, 4-corner screw type, for FS and FD type mounting. Device covers shall be zinc galvanized finish. Weatherproof covers shall be lockable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with the CEC and as shown on the drawings.

B. Installation shall be in accordance with the CEC, NECA “Standard of Installation”, and as shown as on the drawings.

C. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper, and also be connected to the green equipment grounding conductor.

D. General: Devices shall be of the type specified herein. All devices shall be installed with “pigtailed” leads from the outlet box. No device shall be used in the “feed through” application. Screw terminals shall be used to connect all devices to the circuit and shall be grounded by means of a ground wire where grounding terminals are provided in the device.

E. Installation: Devices and plates shall be installed in a “plumb” condition and must be flush with the finish surface of the wall where boxes are recessed.

F. Mounting heights: All control and convenience devices shall comply with California Code of Regulations Title 24 and ADA with respect to accessibility requirements.

Mounting heights indicated on plans shall have precedence.

G. Install switches with the off position down.

H. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

I. Provide extension rings as required to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface or casework.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 879 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 27 26 - 4 Wiring Devices
J. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 880 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 28 16 - 1 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Disconnect and safety switches where shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 53, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Approved Manufacturers: Cutler Hammer, General Electric, ITE-Siemens and SquareD.

B. Disconnect Switches: Provide with devices enabling the switch to be locked in the open or closed positions.

C. Manual Motor Switches: Tumbler type rated 3HP, 240 Volts with or without overload heaters as required to protect equipment served.

D. Externally Operable Safety Switches: To have quick-make, quick-break mechanism, capable of switching 10 times switch rating, with cover interlock to prevent opening with switch in ON position and defeat mechanism for maintenance.

E. Switches: Shall be general duty (GD) for 240 volt and below and heavy duty (HD) for 277/480 volt type unless otherwise indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures for interior locations and NEMA 3R enclosures for exterior or wet locations. Provide with number of poles, ampacity, voltage and HP rating, fusible or nonfusible as indicated. Copper blades shall be visible in off position.

F. Fusible Switches: Equip them with rejection clips for UL Class R fuses. Switches having a dual rating when used with dual element fuses shall have a rating so indicated and shall be confirmed by equipment vendor being connected.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 881 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 28 16 - 2 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
G. 600 Amperes or Less Fuses: UL Class RKI with a minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 Amperes, Bussmann "Low-Peak Type" or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Install switches, disconnects and safety where indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required by CEC.

B. Fastenings: Securely fasten switches to structural members or unistrut support as directed by the manufacturer.

C. Manual Motor Switches: Install flush mounted in finished areas.

D. Manual Motor Switches: Install surface mounted in equipment rooms and non-finished areas. Where installed above inaccessible ceilings provide access panels.

E. Label all disconnect switches in accordance with Section 26 05 53, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

F. Fuse: All fuses shall be as indicated on the plan or as required by the equipment.

Verify fuse size with equipment manufacturer requirements, prior to installation. Use current limiting fuses as indicated on plan. Provide one spare fuse cabinet in each electrical room with one complete set of spare fuses for all sizes of main fuses, subpanel fuses, HVAC equipment fuses and fire alarm.

G. Terminals shall be minimum 75 degree rated.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 882 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 1 Generator System
SECTION 26 32 13

GENERATOR SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Applicable Codes and Standards:

1. 2019 California Building Code (CBC).

2. 2019 California Mechanical Code (CMC).

3. 2019 California Electrical Code (CEC). Specifically, CEC Articles 517, 700, 701, 702.

4. 2019 California Fire Code (CFC) Only if 12 ft. vent pipe required.

5. 2019 NFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities Code. (2005 NFPA 99 (Testing)).

6. 2019 NFPA 30 – Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.

7. 2019 NFPA 37 – Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines.

8. 2019 NFPA 55 – Compressed Gases and Cryogenic Fluids Code.

9. 2019 NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems. (2005 NFPA 110 (Testing)).

10. UL 2200 – Standard for Safety of Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies.

11. U.S. EPA – New Source Performance Standards.

12. International Standards Organization, ISO 9001.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. An electric generating system or Emergency Power Supply (EPS), consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and controls, must have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering prototype model of the equipment to be sold.

B. The generator set must conform to applicable California Electrical Code and applicable authorities having jurisdiction including DSA and CSFM.

C. The generator set must be available with the Underwriters Laboratories listing (UL 2200) as a stationary engine generator assembly.

D. The generator shall meet all of the following standards: The generator set shall be EPA and CARB Emissions Certified for non-road applications and meet all local emission standards and requirements. It shall meet all local County or Regional APCD requirements.

E. The generator control and remote annunciation shall be compatible with the transfer microprocessor based logic controller integrated in the main switchboard. The transfer controller shall communicate through open protocol to energy management system or data network to provide remote status indication.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 883 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 2 Generator System

1.3 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS
A. This system is designed based on KOHLER.

B. Substitutions: The emergency power system has been designed to the specified manufacturer’s electrical and physical characteristics. The equipment sizing, spacing, amounts, electrical wiring, ventilation equipment, fuel and exhaust components have all been sized and designed around equipment. Should any substitutions be made, the contractor shall bear responsibility for the installation, coordination and operation of the system as well as any engineering and redesign costs which may result from such substitutions. Alternate equipment suppliers shall follow all submittal requirements outlined in the general conditions as part of the submittals, the substitute manufacturer shall supply as a minimum engine, alternator and control panel wiring diagrams and schematics. A separate list of all printed circuit boards with part numbers and current pricing must also be included.

C. Manufacturer shall provide certification that the equipment supplied under this Section has been reviewed and certified by IBC to meet the current criteria for special seismic certification. Include seismic companion anchorage requirements from the testing and as approved by the manufacturer.

1.4 UNIT TESTING
A. Before shipment of the equipment, the engine-generator set shall be tested under rated load and rated power factor for performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Tests shall include:

1. Verifying all safety shutdowns are functioning properly.

2. Verify single step load pick-up per NFPA 110 Paragraph 7.13.7.

3. Verify transient and voltage dip responses and steady state voltage and speed (frequency) checks.

4. Submit the certification of the factory test, including recorded ambient temperature, altitude, and fuel grade.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Owner’s Manuals: provide three (3) sets of owner’s manuals specific to the product supplied must accompany delivery of the equipment. General operating instruction, preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams, schematics and parts exploded views specific to this model must be included.

B. Submittals: Provide complete sets of Engineering Submittal for approval, prior to production release, showing all components, in addition to the engine and generator.

Submittals shall include compliance with these specifications. Refer to general requirements for quantities of submittals and additional requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: The standby electric generating system components, complete enginegenerator and instrumentation panel shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of 5 years. Such defective

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 884 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 3 Generator System
parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer’s option, free of charge. Travel and labor shall be included for the first 36 months. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is placed into service and accepted by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying engineer, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support.

B. Provide supplier one-year maintenance service for the generator after the final acceptance.

1.7 SERVICE CONTACT
A. Service: Supplier of the electric plant and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in this trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service personnel on 24 hour call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty and routine maintenance service to afford the owner maximum protection. Delegation of this service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available.

PART 2 - ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

2.1 ENGINE
A. The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled, diesel fueled, naturally aspirated engine of 4- cycle design with a minimum of 6 cylinders. The unit requires a minimum rated output per single line diagram at an operating speed of 1800 RPM.

B. The engine is to be cooled with a unit mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant recovery system providing visual diagnostic means to determine if the system is operating with a normal engine coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 110 degrees f, 43 degrees c ambient temperature.

C. The intake air filter(s) with replaceable element must be mounted on the unit. Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s). Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs, must be provided to outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. A fan guard must be installed for personnel safety.

D. The engine shall have a battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage regulator. Remote 2-wire starting shall be by a solenoid shift, electric starter.

E. Engine speed shall be controlled by isochronous governor to maintain alternator steady state frequency within 0.25% from no load to full load alternator output. Steady state regulation is to be 0.5%.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 885 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 4 Generator System
F. The engine fuel system shall be designed for operation using No. 2 diesel fuel. A primary fuel filter, water separator, manual fuel priming pump, fuel shutoff solenoid and all fuel lines must be installed at the point of manufacture.

G. The primary diesel fuel filter shall be capable of removing contaminants of 10 microns.

Element shall be replaceable paper type.

H. The engine shall have (a) unit mounted, thermostatically controlled water jacket heater(s) to aid in quick starting. The wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide proper branch circuit from normal utility power source.

I. Sensing elements to be located on the engine for low oil pressure shutdown, high engine temperature shutdown, low coolant level shutdown, overspeed shutdown, overcrank shutdown, remote E-stop shutdown and air shutdown damper when used.

These sensors are to be connected to the control panel using a wiring harness with the following features: wire number labeling on each end of the wire run for easy identification, a molded rubber boot to cover the electrical connection on each sensor to prevent corrosion and all wiring to be run in flexible conduit for protection from the environment and any moving objects.

J. Provide the following items installed at the factory:

1. The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible connector to couple the engine exhaust manifold to the exhaust system.

2. The fuel system shall include a double wall base mounted fuel tank per plan. It shall have a stub-up area convenient for electrical conduit entry. It shall have the structural integrity to support the engine-generator set and carry the UL 142 mark. Minimum features shall include all welded construction, a lockable fuel filler cap, fuel gauge, low fuel level alarm, fuel line check valve, vent and fittings for fuel supply, return, fill and emergency vent. This tank must be supplied by the engine-generator set manufacturer and be installed before shipment.

3. Supply the basetank with normal venting and emergency relief venting per NFPA

30. 4. Provide a remote fueling port shown on Electrical Site plans. Provide 120v and control connection and 2” fuel pipe to sub-base tank.

2.2 ALTERNATOR
A. The alternator shall be a 4 pole revolving field type, 12 lead, wired for 120/208V 3 phase 4 wire, 60 hz, with a brushless exciter. Photosensitive components will not be permitted in the rotating exciter. The stator shall be direct connected to the engine to insure permanent alignment. The generator shall meet temperature rise standards for Class "H" insulation; operate within Class "F" standards for extended life. All leads must be extended into an AC connection panel. The alternator shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection and an automatic reset field circuit breaker.

B. One step load acceptance shall be 100% of engine-generator set nameplate rating and meet the requirements of NFPA 110 Paragraph 7.13.7. The generator set and regulator must sustain at least 90% of rated voltage for 10 seconds with 250% of rated load at near zero power factor connected to its terminals when equipped with direct or brushless excitation. 300% short circuit current must be selectable on units equipped

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 886 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 5 Generator System
with permanent magnet exciters. Generators equipped with permanent magnet exciters not allowing the selection of the short circuit current ratings are not allowed.

C. A solid state voltage regulator designed and built by the alternator manufacturer must be used to control output voltage by varying the exciter magnetic field to provide + or - 1% regulation during stable load conditions. Should an extremely heavy load drop the output frequency, the regulator shall have a voltage drop of 4 Volts/Hertz to maximize motor starting capability. The frequency at which this droop operation begins must be adjustable, allowing the generator set to be properly matched to the load characteristics insuring optimum system performance. Additional rheostats for matching generator voltage, droop, and stability characteristics to the specific load conditions must be available.

D. A NEMA 1 panel that is an integral part of the generator set must be provided to allow the installer a convenient location in which to make electrical output connections. A fully rated, isolated neutral must be included by the generator set manufacturer to insure proper sizing.

E. The electric plant shall be mounted with vibration isolators on a welded steel base that shall permit suitable mounting to any level surface.

F. Provide the following items installed at the factory:

1. A main line 400 amp, 3 pole, 600 volt rated, 100% rated molded case type, generator mounted circuit breaker carrying the UL mark shall be factory installed.

The breaker shall be rated per the manufacturer's recommendations. Circuit breaker shall be mounted in the genset connection box. The line side connections are to be made at the factory. Output lugs shall be provided for load side connections. A system utilizing manual reset field circuit breakers and current transformers is unacceptable

2.3 CONTROLS
A. All engine alternator controls and instrumentation shall be designed, built, wired, tested and shock mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure to the engine-generator set by the manufacturer. It shall contain panel lighting, a fused DC circuit to protect the controls and a +/-5% voltage adjusting control. This panel must be able to be rotated 90 degrees in either direction for correct installation.

B. The engine-generator set shall contain a complete 2 wire automatic engine start-stop control which starts the engine on closing contacts and stop the engine on opening contacts. A cyclic cranking limiter shall be provided to open the starting circuit after eight attempts if the engine has not started within that time. Engine control modules must be solid state plug-in type for high reliability and easy service.

C. The panel shall include; analog meters to monitor AC voltage, AC current and AC frequency with a phase selector switch, an emergency stop switch, an audible alarm, battery charger fuse, and a programmable engine control and monitoring module.

D. The programmable module shall include: a manual, off, auto switch; four LEDs to indicate 1) Not In Auto, 2) Alarm Active, 3) Generator Running, 4) Generator Ready; a data entry keypad and a digital display panel.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 887 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 6 Generator System
E. The module will display all pertinent unit parameters including:

1. Generator Status
a. Current unit status in real time

2. Instrumentation
a. Real time readouts of the engine and alternator analog values 1) Oil pressure
2) Coolant temperature
3) Fuel level
4) DC battery voltage
5) Run time hours

3. Generator Commands
a. Current engine start/stop status

4. Alarm Status (Safety Indications and Shutdowns as required by NFPA 110 Table

5.6.5.2 for the level of EPS being installed)
LEVEL 2 SYSTEM
1) Low oil pressure pre-alarm
2) Low oil pressure
3) Low coolant level
4) Low water temperature
5) Overcrank
6) Overspeed
7) Lamp test
8) Contacts for local and remote common alarm
9) Air shutdown damper when used
10) High or low AC voltage
11) High or low frequency
12) High or low battery voltage
13) High, low and critical low fuel levels
14) *8 user programmable digital channels
15) *4 user programmable analog channels

5. Alarm Log
a. Memory of last fifty alarm events

6. Operating parameters
a. Access to and manipulation of the current operating parameters and alarm limits

7. Software Information
a. Version information and module display test function F. The panel must be accessible by PC based software via either standard RS232, RS485 or modem. The software must display the module face, be updated in real time and allow for complete access to all module functions. Communication output and its software must be fully compatible and allow for incorporation in the system control program.

G. The following equipment is to be installed at the engine-generator set manufacturer's facility:

1. A DPDT relay shall be socket mounted in the generator control panel and operate on engine start and run for customer connection.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 888 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 7 Generator System
H. The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit:

1. A (20) light remote annunciator panel flush mounted where shown on drawings.

2. A weather proof tamper resistant remote emergency power off (EPO/E-Stop) mushroom type push button labeled “Generator Emergency Stop”.

2.4 UNIT ACCESSORIES
A. The following equipment is to be installed at the engine-generator set manufacturer’s facility:

1. Weather Protective Enclosure: The engine-generator set shall be factory enclosed in a Level II sound attenuated weather housing. The enclosure is to have large, hinged doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The doors must lift off without the use of tools. Each door will have stainless steel hinges and locking hardware with identical keys. Padlocks do not meet this specification. The exhaust silencer(s) shall be provided of the size as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be of critical grade. It shall be connected to the engine with a flexible, seamless, stainless steel exhaust connection. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed. Enclosure shall have an externally mounted emergency stop button.

2. A heavy duty, lead acid battery set rated at 90AH (27F) shall be installed by the generator set manufacturer. Provide all intercell and connecting battery cables as required.

3. Provide a 2 amp automatic float battery charger manufactured by the enginegenerator set supplier. It is to be of a solid state design and self-regulating to prevent overcharging the system battery. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable.

B. The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit:

1. Spring type vibration isolators to mount between the mounting base and pad to reduce noise and transmitted vibrations shall be supplied by the manufacturer.

2. Pad type vibration dampeners.

3. Normal fuel venting kit to minimum 12 feet above grade, in compliance with CFC 3404.2.7.3.3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including the indicated shipped-loose accessories and all fuel connections in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as reviewed by the Engineer.

B. Contractor shall provide complete conduit infrastructure for power and low voltage/communications wiring to generator system and all accessories.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 889 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 32 13 - 8 Generator System

3.2 STARTUP AND CHECKOUT
A. The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained technicians to checkout the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include:

1. Provide all required fluids (oil, coolant, lubricants, and fuel) and ancillary equipment for full function of the Emergency Power Supply.

2. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time.

3. Verification of engine parameters within specification.

4. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required.

5. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator.

6. Perform a 4 hour load test of the electric plant, per NFPA 110 Section 7.13.

Observe and record results of test in the presence of the AHJ / IOR. Provide a portable load bank, cables and connections as required to conform to testing requirements. Correct defects which become evident during this test. Supply fuel for test. Include the complete emergency system (consisting of generator, emergency distribution equipment and automatic transfer switches, and the like) in final test operations. Top off fuel tank at end of test.

7. Include 4 hour on-site meeting / training with Owner’s representative prior to final acceptance. Schedule training with Owner (minimum) one week in advance by mutual agreement of Owner and manufacturers representative.

END OF SECTION 26 32 13

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 890 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
  $XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHV
6(&7,21
$8720$7,&75$16)(56:,7&+(6
3$57*(1(5$/
 5(/$7(''2&80(176
$ 'UDZLQJV DQG JHQHUDO SURYLVLRQV RI WKLV &RQWUDFW LQFOXGLQJ *HQHUDO DQG 6XSSOHPHQWDU\ &RQGLWLRQV DQG 'LYLVLRQ  6SHFLILFDWLRQ 6HFWLRQV DSSO\ WR WKLV 6HFWLRQ
 6800$5<
$ 7KLV6HFWLRQ,QFOXGHV

 )XUQLVK DQG LQVWDOO DXWRPDWLF WUDQVIHU VZLWFKHV $76
 ZLWK QXPEHU RI SROHV
DPSHUDJHYROWDJHDQGZLWKVWDQGFXUUHQWUDWLQJVDVVKRZQRQWKHSODQV(DFK DXWRPDWLF WUDQVIHU VKDOO FRQVLVW RI DQ LQKHUHQWO\ GRXEOH WKURZ SRZHU WUDQVIHU VZLWFKXQLWDQGDPLFURSURFHVVRUFRQWUROOHULQWHUFRQQHFWHGWRSURYLGHFRPSOHWH DXWRPDWLFRSHUDWLRQ$OOWUDQVIHUVZLWFKHVDQGFRQWUROSDQHOVVKDOOEHWKHSURGXFW RIWKHVDPHPDQXIDFWXUHU
 0DQXIDFWXUHU VKDOO SURYLGH FHUWLILFDWLRQ WKDW WKH HTXLSPHQW VXSSOLHG XQGHU WKLV 6HFWLRQ KDV EHHQ UHYLHZHG DQG FHUWLILHG E\,%&WRPHHWWKH FXUUHQW FULWHULDIRU VSHFLDO VHLVPLF FHUWLILFDWLRQ  ,QFOXGH VHLVPLF FRPSDQLRQ DQFKRUDJH UHTXLUHPHQWV IURP WKH WHVWLQJ DQG DV DSSURYHG E\ WKH PDQXIDFWXUHU  7KH PDQXIDFWXUHUVKDOOSURYLGHDQDSSURYHGODEHORQWKHHTXLSPHQWHQFORVXUHVWDWLQJ WKDW WKH HTXLSPHQW KDV EHHQ DZDUGHG D FHUWLILFDWH RI FRPSOLDQFH IRU VSHFLDO VHLVPLFFHUWLILFDWLRQ
 $&&(37$%/(0$18)$&785(56
$ $XWRPDWLFWUDQVIHUVZLWFKHVLVGHVLJQDV$6&2$Q\DOWHUQDWHVZLWFKRUPDQXIDFWXUHU VKDOOPHHW DQGIROORZWKH JHQHUDO FRQGLWLRQV SURFHGXUHIRU VXEVWLWXWLRQ DQG EH LQ DOO UHVSHFWV FRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKHJHQHUDWRUDQG VZLWFKJHDUDVGHVFULEHGDQGDVGHSLFWHG RQWKHSODQV(DFKDOWHUQDWHELGPXVWOLVWDQ\DQGDOOGHYLDWLRQVIURPWKLVVSHFLILFDWLRQ  &2'(6$1'67$1'$5'6
$ 7KHDXWRPDWLFWUDQVIHUVZLWFKHVDQGDFFHVVRULHVVKDOOFRQIRUPWRWKHUHTXLUHPHQWVRI 
 8/6WDQGDUGIRU$XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHV  1)3$1DWLRQDO(OHFWULFDO&RGHDQG&DOLIRUQLD(OHFWULFDO&RGH &(&

 1)3$(PHUJHQF\DQG6WDQGE\3RZHU6\VWHPV
 ,(((6WDQGDUG,(((5HFRPPHQGHG3UDFWLFHIRU(PHUJHQF\DQG6WDQGE\ 3RZHU6\VWHPVIRU&RPPHUFLDODQG,QGXVWULDO$SSOLFDWLRQV  1(0$ 6WDQGDUG ,&6


IRUPHUO\ ,&6
  $& $XWRPDWLF 7UDQVIHU
6ZLWFKHV
 1(&$UWLFOHV
 ,QWHUQDWLRQDO6WDQGDUGV2UJDQL]DWLRQ,62


7.j.2
Packet Pg. 891 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
  $XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHV
3$57352'8&76
 0(&+$1,&$//<+(/'75$16)(56:,7&+
$ 7KH WUDQVIHU VZLWFK XQLW VKDOO EH HOHFWULFDOO\ RSHUDWHG DQG PHFKDQLFDOO\ KHOG  7KH HOHFWULFDORSHUDWRUVKDOOEHDVLQJOHVROHQRLGPHFKDQLVPPRPHQWDULO\HQHUJL]HG0DLQ RSHUDWRUV ZKLFK LQFOXGH RYHUFXUUHQW GLVFRQQHFW GHYLFHV ZLOO QRW EH DFFHSWHG  7KH VZLWFKVKDOOEHPHFKDQLFDOO\LQWHUORFNHGWRHQVXUHRQO\RQHRIWZRSRVVLEOHSRVLWLRQV QRUPDORUHPHUJHQF\
% 7KH VZLWFK VKDOO EH SRVLWLYHO\ ORFNHG DQG XQDIIHFWHG E\ PRPHQWDU\ RXWDJHV VR WKDW FRQWDFWSUHVVXUHLVPDLQWDLQHGDWDFRQVWDQWYDOXHDQGWHPSHUDWXUHULVHDWWKHFRQWDFWV LVPLQLPL]HGIRUPD[LPXPUHOLDELOLW\DQGRSHUDWLQJOLIH & $OOPDLQFRQWDFWVVKDOOEHVLOYHUFRPSRVLWLRQ
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
) :KHUH QHXWUDO FRQGXFWRUV DUH WR EH VROLGO\ FRQQHFWHG D QHXWUDO WHUPLQDO SODWH ZLWK IXOO\UDWHG$/&8SUHVVXUHFRQQHFWRUVVKDOOEHSURYLGHG  0,&52352&(6625&21752//(5:,7+0(0%5$1(,17(5)$&(3$1(/ $ 7KHFRQWUROOHUVKDOOGLUHFWWKHRSHUDWLRQRIWKHWUDQVIHUVZLWFK7KHFRQWUROOHU VVHQVLQJ
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
& 7KHFRQWUROOHUVKDOOPHHWRUH[FHHGWKHUHTXLUHPHQWVIRU(OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\

(0&
DVIROORZV

 $16,&
$,(((9ROWDJH6XUJH7HVW
 1(0$,&6±
,PSXOVH:LWKVWDQG7HVW
 ,(&(OHFWURVWDWLFGLVFKDUJH
(6'
LPPXQLW\
 (19DQG,(&±5DGLDWHGHOHFWURPDJQHWLFILHOGLPPXQLW\  ,(&±(OHFWULFDOIDVWWUDQVLHQW
()7
LPPXQLW\
 (196XUJHWUDQVLHQWLPPXQLW\

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 892 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
  $XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHV
 (19
&RQGXFWHGUDGLRIUHTXHQF\ILHOGLPPXQLW\
 (1
*URXS&ODVV$FRQGXFWHGDQGUDGLDWHGHPLVVLRQV

 (1±±9ROWDJHGLSVDQGLQWHUUXSWLRQVLPPXQLW\  (1&/2685(
$ 7KH$76VKDOOEHIXUQLVKHGLQD1(0$W\SH5HQFORVXUHXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVKRZQRQ WKHSODQV
% &RQWUROOHU VKDOO EH IOXVKPRXQWHG GLVSOD\ ZLWK /(' LQGLFDWRUV IRU VZLWFK SRVLWLRQ DQG VRXUFHDYDLODELOLW\,WVKDOODOVRLQFOXGHWHVWDQGWLPHGHOD\E\SDVVVZLWFKHV 3$5723(5$7,21
 92/7$*($1')5(48(1&<6(16,1*
$ 7KH YROWDJH RI HDFK SKDVH RI WKH QRUPDO VRXUFH VKDOO EH PRQLWRUHG ZLWK SLFNXS DGMXVWDEOH WR
 RI QRPLQDO DQG GURSRXW DGMXVWDEOH IURP  WR  RI SLFNXS
VHWWLQJ
% 6LQJOHSKDVH YROWDJH DQG IUHTXHQF\ VHQVLQJ RI WKH HPHUJHQF\ VRXUFH VKDOO EH SURYLGHG
 7,0('(/$<6
$ $Q DGMXVWDEOH WLPH GHOD\ VKDOO EH SURYLGHG WR RYHUULGH PRPHQWDU\ QRUPDO VRXUFH RXWDJHVDQGGHOD\DOOWUDQVIHUDQGHQJLQHVWDUWLQJVLJQDOV % $QDGMXVWDEOHWLPHGHOD\VKDOOEHSURYLGHGRQWUDQVIHUWRHPHUJHQF\DGMXVWDEOHIURP WRPLQXWHVIRUFRQWUROOHGWLPLQJRIWUDQVIHURIORDGVWRHPHUJHQF\ & $Q DGMXVWDEOH WLPH GHOD\ VKDOO EH SURYLGHG RQ UHWUDQVIHU WR QRUPDO DGMXVWDEOH WR  PLQXWHV  7LPH GHOD\ VKDOO EH DXWRPDWLFDOO\ E\SDVVHG LI HPHUJHQF\ VRXUFH IDLOV DQG QRUPDOVRXUFHLVDFFHSWDEOH
' $PLQXWHFRROGRZQWLPHGHOD\VKDOOEHSURYLGHGRQVKXWGRZQRIHQJLQHJHQHUDWRU ( $OODGMXVWDEOHWLPHGHOD\VVKDOOEHILHOGDGMXVWDEOHZLWKRXWWKHXVHRIWRROV  $'',7,21$/)($785(6
$ $ VHW RI JROGIODVKHG FRQWDFWV UDWHG  DPSV  9'& VKDOO EH SURYLGHG IRU D ORZ YROWDJHHQJLQHVWDUWVLJQDO7KHVWDUWVLJQDOVKDOOSUHYHQWGU\FUDQNLQJRIWKHHQJLQHE\ UHTXLULQJWKHJHQHUDWRUVHWWRUHDFKSURSHURXWSXWDQGUXQIRUWKHGXUDWLRQRIWKHFRRO GRZQ VHWWLQJ UHJDUGOHVV RI ZKHWKHU WKH QRUPDO VRXUFH UHVWRUHV EHIRUH WKH ORDG LV WUDQVIHUUHG
% $SXVKEXWWRQW\SHWHVWVZLWFKVKDOOEHSURYLGHGWRVLPXODWHDQRUPDOVRXUFHIDLOXUH

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 893 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
  $XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHV
& $ SXVKEXWWRQ W\SH VZLWFK WR E\SDVV WKH WLPH GHOD\ RQ WUDQVIHU WR HPHUJHQF\ WKH HQJLQH H[HUFLVHU SHULRG RQ WKH UHWUDQVIHU WR QRUPDO WLPH GHOD\ ZKLFKHYHU GHOD\ LV DFWLYHDWWKHWLPHWKHSXVKEXWWRQLVDFWLYDWHG
' 7HUPLQDOV VKDOO EH SURYLGHG IRU D UHPRWH FRQWDFW ZKLFK RSHQV WR VLJQDO WKH $76 WR WUDQVIHU WR HPHUJHQF\ DQG IRU UHPRWH FRQWDFWV ZKLFK RSHQ WR LQKLELW WUDQVIHU WR HPHUJHQF\DQGRUUHWUDQVIHUWRQRUPDO
( $X[LOLDU\ FRQWDFWV UDWHG  DPSV  9$& VKDOO EH SURYLGHG FRQVLVWLQJ RI RQH FRQWDFW FORVHG ZKHQ WKH $76 LV FRQQHFWHG WR WKH QRUPDO VRXUFH DQG RQH FRQWDFW FORVHGZKHQWKH$76LVFRQQHFWHGWRWKHHPHUJHQF\VRXUFH ) ,QGLFDWLQJOLJKWV VKDOO EH SURYLGHGRQHWR LQGLFDWHZKHQWKH$76 LV FRQQHFWHGWRWKH QRUPDO VRXUFH
JUHHQ
 DQG RQH WR LQGLFDWH ZKHQ WKH $76 LV FRQQHFWHG WR WKH HPHUJHQF\VRXUFH
UHG
$OVRSURYLGHLQGLFDWLQJOLJKWVIRUERWKQRUPDODQGHPHUJHQF\ VRXUFHDYDLODELOLW\
* 7HUPLQDOVVKDOOEHSURYLGHGWRLQGLFDWHDFWXDODYDLODELOLW\RIWKHQRUPDODQGHPHUJHQF\ VRXUFHV DV GHWHUPLQHG E\WKH YROWDJH VHQVLQJ SLFNXS DQG GURSRXW VHWWLQJVIRU HDFK VRXUFH
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
ZKHQWKH
WUDQVIHUVZLWFKLVWUDQVIHUUHG2XWSXWFRQWDFWVVKDOOEHUDWHGDPSVDW9'&RU 9$&
. &RPPXQLFDWLRQV ,QWHUIDFH  6HULDO 0RGXOH

 WR DOORZ ORFDO RU UHPRWH
FRPPXQLFDWLRQV ZLWK $6&2 3RZHU4XHVW RU 6LWHZHE FRPPXQLFDWLRQ SURGXFWV 7R FRQQHFW6HULHV$XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHVDQG$6&2$76$QQXQFLDWRUVWRWKH VHULDO QHWZRUN YLD DQ 56 LQWHUIDFH
$FFHVVRU\ $
 VKDOO EH URXWHG WR (WKHUQHW
SRUWLRQLQEXLOGLQJ
/ 3URJUDPPDEOH (QJLQH ([HUFLVHU  $ VHYHQ RU IRXUWHHQ GD\ SURJUDPPDEOH HQJLQH H[HUFLVHUZLWKGLJLWDOUHDGRXWGLVSOD\6KDOOLQFOXGHRQHIRUP&FRQWDFWIRUDYDLODELOLW\RI QRUPDO DQG HPHUJHQF\ ,QFOXGH ³ZLWK RU ZLWKRXW´ ORDG FRQWURO VZLWFK IRU H[HUFLVHU SHULRG7KHH[HUFLVHUVKDOOEHEDFNHGXSE\DSHUPDQHQWEDWWHU\ $FFHVVRU\%*


7.j.2
Packet Pg. 894 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
  $XWRPDWLF7UDQVIHU6ZLWFKHV
3$57$'',7,21$/5(48,5(0(176
 :,7+67$1'$1'&/26,1*5$7,1*6
$ 7KH$76VKDOOEHUDWHGWRFORVHRQDQGZLWKVWDQGWKHDYDLODEOHUPVV\PPHWULFDOVKRUW FLUFXLWFXUUHQWDWWKH$76WHUPLQDOVZLWKWKHW\SHRIRYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQVKRZQRQWKH SODQV:&5$76UDWLQJVDVEHDVIROORZVZKHQXVHGZLWKVSHFLILFFLUFXLWEUHDNHUV 
$766L]H :LWKVWDQG &ORVLQJ
5DWLQJ0&&%
:&/)
 $ 
 7(676$1'&(57,),&$7,21
$ 7KHFRPSOHWH$76VKDOOEHIDFWRU\WHVWHGWRHQVXUHSURSHURSHUDWLRQRIWKHLQGLYLGXDO FRPSRQHQWVDQGFRUUHFWRYHUDOOVHTXHQFHRIRSHUDWLRQDQGWRHQVXUHWKDWWKHRSHUDWLQJ WUDQVIHU WLPH YROWDJH IUHTXHQF\ DQG WLPH GHOD\ VHWWLQJV DUH LQ FRPSOLDQFH ZLWK WKH VSHFLILFDWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWV
% 8SRQ UHTXHVWWKHPDQXIDFWXUHU VKDOO SURYLGH D QRWDUL]HG OHWWHU FHUWLI\LQJ FRPSOLDQFH ZLWK DOO RIWKH UHTXLUHPHQWV RIWKLV VSHFLILFDWLRQ LQFOXGLQJ FRPSOLDQFH ZLWKWKH DERYH FRGHVDQGVWDQGDUGVDQGZLWKVWDQGDQGFORVLQJUDWLQJV7KHFHUWLILFDWLRQVKDOOLGHQWLI\ E\VHULDOQXPEHU
V
WKHHTXLSPHQWLQYROYHG1RH[FHSWLRQVWRWKHVSHFLILFDWLRQVRWKHU WKDQWKRVHVWLSXODWHGDWWKHWLPHRIWKHVXEPLWWDOVKDOOEHLQFOXGHGLQWKHFHUWLILFDWLRQ & 7KH$76PDQXIDFWXUHUVKDOOKDYHWKLUGSDUW\FHUWLILFDWLRQYHULI\LQJTXDOLW\DVVXUDQFHLQ GHVLJQGHYHORSPHQW SURGXFWLRQ LQVWDOODWLRQ DQG VHUYLFLQJ LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK ,62


 6(59,&(5(35(6(17$7,21
$ 7KH $76 PDQXIDFWXUHU VKDOO PDLQWDLQ D QDWLRQDO VHUYLFH RUJDQL]DWLRQ RI FRPSDQ\ HPSOR\HG SHUVRQQHO ORFDWHG WKURXJKRXW WKH FRQWLJXRXV 8QLWHG 6WDWHV  7KH VHUYLFH FHQWHU
V SHUVRQQHOPXVW EHIDFWRU\WUDLQHG DQGPXVW EH RQ FDOO  KRXUV D GD\  GD\VD\HDU
% 7KH PDQXIDFWXUHU VKDOO PDLQWDLQ UHFRUGV RI HDFK VZLWFK E\ VHULDO QXPEHU IRU D PLQLPXPRI\HDUV
& )RU HDVH RI PDLQWHQDQFH DQG SDUWV UHSODFHPHQW WKH VZLWFK QDPHSODWH VKDOO LQFOXGH GUDZLQJQXPEHUVSDUWQXPEHUVIRUPDLQFRLODQGFRQWURO (1'2)6(&7,21

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 895 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 43 00 - 1 Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
SECTION 26 43 00

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. SPD for service entrance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all related SPD Specifications, Drawings, maintenance manuals, installation instructions, and UL 1449, third edition, listed surge suppression ratings of specified protection modes.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: ISO-9001 certification or SPD manufacturer's complete quality control and documentation procedures of firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of SPD product for Category-C3 (ANSI/IEEE C62.41) and whose product have been in satisfactory service for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide local support for the SPD.

C. Warrant the service entrance SPD for 5 years for complete parts and factory provided on site labor. Warrant the distribution panel SPD for 1 year.

D. Both the service entrance and distribution panel SPD of the same manufacturer.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Listed per UL 1449, third edition, and complimentary listed per UL 1283 as an RFI/EMI filter.

B. Comply with ANSI/IEEE (C62.1 or C62.11) and C62.45 test procedures for Category-C3 established in C62.41 (1991).

C. Comply with NEMA as applicable to construction and NEC 280 for installation and NEC 110.9/110.10 for overcurrent protection.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 896 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 43 00 - 2 Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
D. Design and tested to survive the following 8x20 microsecond surge currents following IEEE Test Procedures and wait times established in C62.1/C62.11 and C62.45:

Wye Systems Delta Systems
Line to Ground: 10 x 25 KA Line to Line: 10 x 25 KA
Line to Neutral: 10 x 25 KA Line to Ground: 10 x 25 KA
Neutral to Ground: 10 x 25 K
E. The individual protection mode designed and tested to survive 1250 Category-C3 (10KA) surge currents as described in IEEE C62.41 (1991).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPD FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Install SPD devices at service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser diagram.

B. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground.

C. Each phase shall have a minimum of two modules. Fuse the surge modules at a minimum rating of 10 amp and a current limit rating of 200,000 AIC. Modules and fuses field replaceable.

D. Provide visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation. The indicator consists of an LED array. Use no single LED or neon indicators.

E. Equip the SPD device with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge circuitry has been damaged. Provide a silence button with the alarm.

F. The SPD shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry and shall provide high frequency noise filtering up to 40dB attenuation (100KHZ to 100MHZ).

G. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Minimum single impulse current rating (l-N + l-G): 100,000 amp per phase.

2. Incorporate hybrid circuitry.

3. UL 1449, third edition, (ANSI C62.41-1991 Category-C) clamping voltage shall not exceed the following:

Voltage L-N L-G N-G
120/208 400 volt 400 volt 400 volt

4. The Category-C3 clamping voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62-41-1991 (20KV-1.2/50 microseconds, 10KA-8.20 microseconds shall not exceed the following:

Voltage L-N L-G N-G
120/208 550 volt 550 volt 550 volt
H. Provide full redundant protection for each phase that consists of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 897 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 43 00 - 3 Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
I. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage of the SPD: Greater than 110 percent of the nominal system voltage.

J. Provide an internal disconnect (3-pole, UL listed).

K. Manufacturers: EFI Electronics Corporation, Titan SE Series, Lea International.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Install one SPD at each utility service entrance or as indicated on Drawings. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install SPD on the load side of the service entrance. Provide breaker for disconnect in service entrance equipment, size breaker to manufacturers installation instructions.

C. Provide 6AWG stranded copper conductor or larger conductors between SPD and point of attachment. Keep the conductors short and straight as possible. Provide 36-inch maximum lead length of connecting conductors.

D. Bond SPD's ground to the service entrance ground.

END OF SECTION 26 43 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 898 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 51 00 - 1 Interior Lighting
SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Interior lighting systems, including luminaires, ballasts, lamps and emergency lighting equipment.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

2. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Conduits, fittings, and boxes for raceway systems.

3. Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage power and lighting wiring.

4. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

5. Section 26 56 00, SITE LIGHTING.

6. Section 26 56 70, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, luminaires, lamps and controls.

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 899 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 51 00 - 2 Interior Lighting
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

D. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA).

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Lighting terminology used herein is defined in IES
B. Exception: The term “driver” is used herein to cover both drivers and power supplies, where applicable.

C. Clarification: The term “LED light source(s)” is used herein per IES to cover LED package(s), module(s), and array(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with CEC, UL, ANSI, and as shown on the drawings and specified.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)
A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, UL 1598 and shall be as shown on drawings and as specified. All luminaires shall have been certified to the California Energy Commission by its manufacturer to comply with the efficiency standards as per California Code of Regulations Title 24, Part 6, Section 111 referencing the Appliance Efficiency Regulations in Title 20. Post certification with building permit.

B. Sheet Metal:

1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as designed.

2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.

3. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 900 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 51 00 - 3 Interior Lighting
a. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixture is in the installed position, and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools.

C. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers.

D. Recessed fixtures shall be of the type approved for the ceiling and insulation conditions and appropriate for the installation location. Insulation must be held back from the fixture to provide manufacturers' recommended clearances for proper operation. Thermal tripping shall be the installer's responsibility to correct. Where installed in fire rated ceilings, coordinate installation of fire rated enclosures around the ceiling penetrations. Fixtures shall contain the proper through wiring capacity for that which is shown on the plans.

E. Recessed fixtures shall be provided with the appropriate trims and hardware compatible with the ceiling type shown. Plaster frames are required where plaster or gypsum board ceilings are encountered.

F. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.

G. Metal Finishes:

1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking.

2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise specified on the drawing.

3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.

H. Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.

I. Recessed compact fluorescent or LED fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent or LED lamps with ballasts or drivers integral to the fixture.

Assemblies designed to retrofit fixtures are prohibited except when described in this fashion. Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.

J. Provide wire lamp guard on all exposed lamp fixture/luminaires.

K. Provide fixtures with a U.L. listing for shower or shower rating above shower or tub areas.

2.3 LED LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Luminaire shall have an external label per ANSI C136.15

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 901 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 51 00 - 4 Interior Lighting

2. Luminaire shall have an internal label per ANSI C136.22.

3. Luminaires shall start and operate in -20°C to +40°C ambient.

4. LED light source(s) and driver(s) shall be RoHS compliant.

2.4 BALLASTS

2.5 LED DRIVER
A. Driver

1. Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the luminaire operating in the ambient temperatures as indicated.

2. Shall accept the voltage or voltage range indicated, and shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent. Consistent with NEMA SSL 1.

3. Shall have a minimum Power Factor (PF) of 0.90 at full input power and across specified voltage range.

B. Electromagnetic interference

1. Shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 20% at full input power and across specified voltage range.

2. Shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards.

C. The following shall be in accordance with corresponding sections of ANSI C136.37

1. Wiring and grounding

2. All internal components shall be assembled and pre-wired using modular electrical connections.

3. Mounting provisions

4. Terminal blocks for incoming AC lines

5. Latching and hinging

6. Ingress protection

2.6 LAMPS
A. Provide lamps for all luminaires.

B. LED LIGHT SOURCE

1. Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI): 60.

2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT)
a. CCT shall be as listed in Table 1 below:

Table 1. Allowable CCT
Manufacturer-Rated Allowable LM-79
Nominal CCT (K) Chromaticity Values
Measured CCT (K)
2700 2580 to 2870
3000 2870 to 3220
3500 3220 to 3710
4000 3710 to 4260
4500 4260 to 4746
5000 4745 to 5311

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 902 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 51 00 - 5 Interior Lighting
5700 5310 to 6020
6500 6020 to 7040
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation and furnishing of lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with the CEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified. Fixtures damaged in transit and storage prior to completion shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense.

B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.

C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where the indicated locations for the lighting fixtures conflict with the locations for equipment, change the locations for the lighting fixtures by the minimum distances necessary as approved by the Architect. The Architectural reflected ceiling plan will take precedence over electrical plans.

D. For suspended lighting fixtures, the mounting heights shall provide the clearances between the bottoms of the fixtures and the finished floors as shown on the drawings.

E. Lighting Fixture Supports:

1. Contractor shall provide support for all of the fixtures independent of suspended ceilings. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling.

2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping.

3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect.

4. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures:

5. Fixtures shall be supported as detailed on drawings and as required by DSA standards.

6. Installation: Fixtures shall be securely mounted on ceilings and walls with appropriate fastening devices. "Drop-in" type T-bar fixtures shall be secured with #12 gauge safety "earthquake wires" as described by California Code of Regulations Title 24 Part 2, Chapter 47. "Earthquake clips" will be required for fastening to the T-bar system in addition to safety wire. Surface mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be solidly screwed or clipped into framing above drywall with 4-#10 sheet metal screws into each fixture. Provide blocking for screw supports behind all surface mounted lighting fixtures weighing more than 15 lbs.

7. Surface mounted lighting fixtures:
a. Fixtures shall be bolted against the ceiling independent of the outlet box at four points spaced near the corners of each unit. The bolts shall be minimum ¼-20 bolt, secured to structural ceiling. Non-turning studs may be attached to the building structure by 12 gauge safety hangers.

8. Fixtures mounted in open construction shall be secured directly to the building structure with approved bolting and clamping devices.

9. Single or double pendent mounted lighting fixtures:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 903 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 51 00 - 6 Interior Lighting
a. Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet box, mounted swivel joint and canopy which holds the stem captive and provides spring load (or approved equivalent) dampening of fixture oscillations. Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the building structure and be allowed to swing to a 45 degree angle.

10. Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted) shall be secured directly to the building structure with approved devices or supported vertically in a hung ceiling from the building structure with a nine gauge wire hanger, and be secured by an approved device to a main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any horizontal movement relative to the ceiling.

F. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures as part of this project.

G. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.

H. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

I. At completion of project, relamp all fixtures which have failed/burned-out lamps. Clean all fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt during construction.

J. Provide unswitched leg of interior lighting branch circuit to integral emergency battery pack light fixtures, exit signs and night lights as applicable per lighting plans.

K. Wallmount fixtures in walkway areas shall not project more than 4 inches from wall when projection occurs lower than 80 inches.

END OF SECTION 26 51 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 904 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 00 - 1 Exterior Lighting
SECTION 26 56 00

EGTERIOR LIPHTINP
- ART 1 D PENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior luminaires, controls, poles and supports.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Conduits, fittings, and boxes for raceway systems.

C. Section 26 05 19, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage power and lighting wiring.

D. Section 26 05 46.13, ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEMS: Underground handholes and conduits.

E. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

F. Section 26 51 00, INTERIOR LIGHTING.

G. Section 26 56 70, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaires, effective projected area (EPA), lamps and controls.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 905 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 00 - 2 Exterior Lighting

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

E. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA).

F. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).

G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Poles: Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they are at least one foot above ground level. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just prior to installation of pole.
- ART 2 D - ROU3 CTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with CEC, UL, ANSI, as shown on the drawings and as specified.

2.2 POLES
A. General:

1. Poles shall be steel or aluminum as specified in fixture schedule and as shown on the drawings. Finish shall be as approved by the Architect. Assume custom color for bidding.

2. The pole and arm assembly shall be designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour, with an additional 30 percent gust factor, supporting luminaire(s) having the effective projected areas indicated as per manufacturer data.

3. Poles shall anchor-bolt type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have gasketed handhole with a minimum clear opening of 2.5” x 5”. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.

4. Provide a steel grounding stud opposite hand hole openings.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 906 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 00 - 3 Exterior Lighting
B. Provide a base cover matching the pole in material and color to conceal the mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.

C. Hardware: All necessary hardware shall be 300 series tamperproof stainless steel.

D. Types:

1. Aluminum: Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant AA AAH35.1 aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS-4 for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys, and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for ASTM B108-01 cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Base covers for aluminum poles shall be cast from 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108-01.

2. Steel: Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and iron-oxide primed factory finish. Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 36,000 psi.

2.3 FOUNDATIONS FOR POLES
A. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete.

B. Foundations shall support the effective projected area of the specified pole, arm(s), luminaire(s), and all accessories specified under wind conditions as specified in this section.

C. Place concrete in spirally wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations, and construct forms for square foundations.

D. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately 1/4” radius unless otherwise detailed.

E. Concrete shall have 3000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength.

F. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be as shown on the drawings and meet ACI 318. Anchor bolts shall be in a welded cage or properly positioned by the tie wire to stirrups.

G. Install a copperclad ground rod, not less than 5/8” diameter by 8’ long in pullbox adjacent to each fixture. Where rock or layered rock is present, drill a hole not less than 2” in diameter and 6’ deep, backfill with tamped fine sand and drive the rod into the hole. Bond the rod to the pole with not less than number 6 AWG bare copper wires. The method of bonding shall be approved for the purpose.

H. After leveling of pole grout base solid between plate and footing with dry pack concrete for vibration reduction.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 907 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 00 - 4 Exterior Lighting

2.4 LUMINAIRES
A. UL 1598 and ANSI C136.17. Luminaries shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdoor types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat and safe cleaning and relamping.

B. Light emitting diode (LED)-based solid state lighting (SSL) products shall be factory tested in accordance to the International Engineering Society (IES) LM-79 recommendations and meet ANSI C78.377-2008 standards.

C. LED light sources shall be factory tested in accordance to IES LM-80 recommendations.

D. LED-based SSL product shall incorporate an external heat sink, integral to the luminaire.

E. IESNA HB-9 and RP-8 light distribution pattern types shall be as indicated on the drawings.

F. Incorporate associated ballasts and drivers within the luminaire housing.

G. Lenses shall be frame-mounted heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, prismatic refractors.

Attach the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges or chain.

H. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory.

I. Bracket mounted luminaries shall have leveling provisions and clamp type adjustable slip-fitters with locking screws.

J. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal.

K. LED-based SSL luminaires shall be manufactured specifically for LED lamps with drivers integral to the luminaire housing.

2.5 LAMPS
A. Luminaires shall be listed for the lamp specified on the associated electrical plans.

Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed.

B. Lamps shall be clear or coated as recommended by luminaire manufacturer to provide for maximum luminaire efficiency in fixture used.

2.6 LED-BASED SOLID STATE DRIVERS
A. Shall be listed by either U.L. or equal listing agency and comply with IEEE C.62.41- 1991, Class A operation.

B. Provide a minimum power factor of 0.9.

C. Minimum operating temperature appropriate for outdoor environments.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 908 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 00 - 5 Exterior Lighting
D. Shall operate at a frequency greater than or equal to 120Hz. - ART X D EGEC3 TION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting in accordance with the CEC, as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Poles:

1. Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 1.57 rad 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide galvanized nuts, washers, and ornamental covers for anchor bolts. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit elbow. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.

2. After the poles have been installed, shimmed and plumbed, grout the spaces between the pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink concrete grout material. Provide a plastic or copper tube, of not less than 3/8” inside diameter, through the grout tight to the top of the concrete base for moisture weeping.

3. Attach pole base cover to pole flange with set screws.

C. Foundation Excavation: Depth shall be as indicated on drawings. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6” maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.

D. Photocell Switch Aiming (where applicable): Aim switch according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Mount switch on or beside each luminaire when switch is provided in cast weatherproof aluminum housing with swivel arm or set adjustable window slide for proper footcandles photocell turn-on.

3.2 GROUNDING
A. Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaries, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or alloyed connectors suitable and listed for this purpose.

END OF SECTION 26 56 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 909 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 70 - 1 Lighting Acceptance Testing
SECTION 26 56 70

LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Certificate of Acceptance, but coordinate with the Certified California Lighting Controls Test Technician to assure that all required documents have been filed with and approved by the enforcement agency prior to receiving a final occupancy permit. The Certificate of Acceptance will indicate that the Contractor has demonstrated acceptance requirements of the plans and specifications, that current requirements for installation certificates are met, and that currently required operating and maintenance information (as well as the Certificate of Acceptance) were provided to the building Owner.

2. Testing, evaluation and calibration of lighting controls equipment provided, installed and connected in Division 26.

3. Documentation of test results, completion of “Certificate of Acceptance” and “Certificate of Installation” forms and filing with the enforcement agency for approval.

4. Specific Jobsite Conditions:
a. Acceptance testing must be tailored for each specific design, job site, and climactic conditions. While the steps for conducting each test remain consistent, the application of the tests to a particular site may vary. The Contractor shall review the construction documents and include all required time, material, testing equipment, etc. as required to complete the requirements of this section.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

2. Section 26 51 00, INTERIOR LIGHTING.

3. Section 26 56 00, EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

4. Section 26 09 26, LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM.

5. Section 26 09 00, CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Acceptance Testing Criteria: 2016 Building Energy Efficiency Standards NonResidential Compliance Manual.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 910 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 70 - 2 Lighting Acceptance Testing

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:

1. All material, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform tests, calibrations and documentation specified herein.

B. Scope of Testing, Evaluation and Calibration (as applicable):

1. Automatic (master) time switches.

2. Occupancy sensors.

3. Automatic daylighting controls.

4. Photo electric sensors.

5. Daylighting controls.

6. Outdoor astronomical time switches.

7. Area controls.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports:

1. Written record of all tests and completion of forms included in this section.

2. At completion of project, assemble a final test report. Submit report to the enforcement agency and the Owner prior to final occupancy to include:
a. Summary of project.
b. Description of systems and equipment tested.
c. Visual inspection report.
d. Description of tests.
e. Test results.
f. Conclusions and recommendations.

3. Report shall be bound in booklet form, include on the Contractor’s letterhead the title of the report and the systems tested.

B. Constructability Plan Review

1. The Contractor shall review the construction drawings and specifications to understand the scope of the acceptance tests and raise critical issues that might affect the success of the acceptance tests prior to starting construction. Any constructability issues associated with the lighting system should be forwarded to the design team for review/modifications prior to equipment procurement and installation. The Contractor shall submit on company letterhead, with the lighting control equipment required by Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL, 1.4B, a letter confirming that the constructability review has been completed and their company has reviewed and is prepared to complete the lighting acceptance testing required by this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS
A. Lighting Installation forms and verification procedures for lighting systems that require acceptance testing can be downloaded from the following website:
www.energy.ca.gov/2015publications/CEC-400-2015-033/appendices/forms/NRCI

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 911 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 56 70 - 3 Lighting Acceptance Testing
B. Lighting Acceptance forms are to be provided by a Certified California Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technician. The California Energy Commission adopted changes to the California building Efficiency Standards (Title 24, Parts 1 and 6) that require lighting controls and devices to be certified as properly installed and operational, prior to issuance of occupancy permits. All Acceptance Technicians must be employed by an Acceptance Test employer that provides support as well as quality control. Certified California Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technicians can be found at the following website: www.calctp.org/acceptance-technicians/contractors C. These completed forms will be the deliverable product to the enforcement agency and Owner as described in 1.4 of this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:

1. Contractor's Responsibilities:
a. Perform all required tests required by this section. b. Schedule testing with building Owner.
c. Provide Installation forms
d. Acceptance forms provided by California Certified Lighting Controls Technician hired by Contractor.
e. Calibration of equipment such as light meters, photo electric controls, etc. f. Programming of time switches (interior/exterior lighting) for operations as directed by the Owner.

3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Final Settings: The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing all final settings and adjustments on controls equipment as required for a complete and operating system.

END OF SECTION 26 56 70

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 912 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 91 15 - 1 Electrical Commissioning Requirements
SECTION 26 91 15

ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning of electrical equipment.

B. Related work:

1. 01 91 13 General Commissioning Processes lists Division 26 commissioned systems, and lists other commissioning sections in these Specifications.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Division 26 Contractors: Participate in the Commissioning process as a commissioning team member as described in Section 01 91 13 and in the Commissioning Plan

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 26 Contractors shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Section 01 91 13 Part 2 for Division 21, 22 and 23 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING PROCESS REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Section 01 91 13 and the Commissioning Plan for information on meetings, functional testing, operations & maintenance data, training requirements, and other commissioning activities.

3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. This section specifies the functional testing requirements for Division 26 systems and equipment. From these requirements, the Commissioning Provider will develop testing procedures in accordance with Section 01 91 13 and the Commissioning Plan. The

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 913 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
26 91 15 - 2 Electrical Commissioning Requirements
test procedures for each piece of equipment or system will contain the information below.

1. Contractors responsible for installation, burn-in, and other testing must be completed with these tasks prior to commissioning testing.

2. Contractor responsibilities for executing functional tests.

3. A list of equipment & components being tested

4. Functions, modes, and testing conditions

5. Required monitoring

6. Acceptance criteria

7. Sampling strategies allowed
B. Refer to Section 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING PROCESSES and the commissioning plan for sample lighting equipment testing requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 91 15

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 914 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 1 Intercommunication Systems
SECTION 27 13 00

INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Refer to City IT Cabling requirements for additional information. City requirements supercedes what stated on this specs.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:

1. Telecommunications Cabling at the new or remodeled buildings for the project.

Backbone and horizontal cabling comprised of copper and fiber cabling, and support systems are covered under this document.

2. The Horizontal (workstation) Cabling System shall consist of a minimum of 4-pair Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Copper Cables to each work area outlet unless otherwise noted for specific locations. The cables shall be installed from the Work Area Outlet to the Telecommunications Room (TR) located on the same floor, and routed to the appropriate rack serving that area and terminated as specified in this document.

3. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished, installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the Telecommunications contractor as detailed in this document.

4. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Quantities of telecommunications outlets, typical installation details, cable routing and outlet types will be provided as an attachment to this document. If the bid documents are in conflict, this specification shall take precedence. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the cable system described in this document.

1.3 REGULATORY REFERENCES
A. All work and materials shall conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, the local Electrical Code and present manufacturing standards.

B. All materials shall be UL Listed and shall be marked as such. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testing standards shall apply and such items shall bear those labels. Where UL has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system shall be so labeled.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 915 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 2 Intercommunication Systems
C. All modular jacks, patch cords, consolidation point, and patch cords performance shall be verified (not just tested) by a third party to be category 6 component and channel compliant.

D. The cabling system described in this is derived from the recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The following documents are incorporated by reference:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-C.2, Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, Addendum 1 –

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, February, 1998.

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings, February, 2002.

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, August, 1994.

8. ANSI/ TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, April 1999.

9. BICSI - TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) – 10th Edition, 2003.

10. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA – 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) – 2002.

E. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation.

F. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be aware of local codes that may impact this project.

1.4 APPROVED CONTRACTOR
A. The Telecommunications Contractor must be a Certified Installer for the products and/or system being supplied. A copy of certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. The Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with said certification. At least (1) for every (3) members of the copper installation and termination crew must be certified to a Technician Level of training by the product manufacturer or BICSI. At least (1) for every (5) members of the optical fiber installation and termination crew must be certified by the product manufacturer or other approved organizations in Optical Fiber installation and termination practices.

1.5 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 916 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 3 Intercommunication Systems
installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The Telecommunications contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system.

B. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Furnish and install a complete telecommunications wiring infrastructure as described on the plans and in these specifications.

2. Furnish, install, and terminate all UTP and Optical Fiber cable.

3. Furnish and install all wall plates, jacks, patch panels, and patch cords.

4. Furnish and install all required cabinets and/or racks as required and as indicated.

5. Furnish any other material required to form a complete system.

6. Perform link testing (100% of horizontal and/or backbone links) and certification of all components.

7. Furnish test results of all cabling to the owner on disk and paper format, listed by each closet, then by workstation ID.

8. Adhere and comply with all requirements of the product certification programs.

9. Provide owner training and documentation. (Testing documentation and As-built drawings).

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of this request for proposal, prior to the start of work the telecommunications contractor shall:

1. Submit copies of the certification of the company and names of staff that will be performing the installation and termination of the installation to provide proof of compliance of this spec.

2. Submit proof from manufacturer of contractor’s good standing in manufacturer’s program.

3. Submit appropriate cut sheets and samples for all products, hardware and cabling.

B. Work shall not proceed without the Owner's approval of the submitted items.

C. The telecommunications contractor shall receive approval from the Owners on all substitutions of material. No substituted materials shall be installed except by written approval from the Owner.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The telecommunications contractor shall staff the project with qualified personnel. All products shall be new and in good condition.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and receipt of products shall be at the site described in the Scope Section.

B. Cable shall be stored according to manufacturer's recommendations as a minimum. In addition, cable must be stored in a location protected from vandalism and weather. If cable is stored outside, it must be covered with opaque plastic or canvas with provision

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 917 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 4 Intercommunication Systems
for ventilation to prevent condensation and for protection from weather. If air temperature at cable storage location will be below 40 degrees F., the cable shall be moved to a heated (50 degrees F. minimum) location. If necessary, cable shall be stored off site at the contractor's expense.

C. If the telecommunications contractor wishes to have a trailer on site for storage of materials, arrangements shall be made with the Owner.

1.9 DRAWINGS
A. It shall be understood that the electrical details and drawings provided with the specification package are diagrammatic. They are included to show the intent of the specifications and to aid the telecommunications contractor in bidding the job. The telecommunications contractor shall make allowance in the bid proposal to cover whatever work is required to comply with the intent of the plans and specifications.

B. The telecommunications contractor shall verify all dimensions at the site and be responsible for their accuracy.

C. Prior to submitting the bid, the telecommunications contractor shall call the attention of the Engineer to any materials or apparatus the telecommunications contractor believes to be inadequate and to any necessary items of work omitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS
A. The Owner and engineer have selected specific products that achieve the desired level of performance and preference. The project has been designed around said products.

Proposed substitutions must demonstrate equivalent performance in all areas to the satisfaction of the Owner and must be submitted for review at least 10 days prior to bid. The Owner shall not be required to entertain substitutions submitted after bid.

2.2 WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. Work area cables shall each be terminated at their designated work area location in the connector types described in the subsections below. Included are modular telecommunication jacks. These connector assemblies shall snap into a faceplate.

B. The Telecommunications Outlet Assembly shall accommodate:

1. Additional accommodations for specific locations as noted in the plans for optical fiber and/or additional copper cables as necessary.

2. A blank filler will be installed when extra ports are not used.

3. All modular jacks shall have their circuit number on the faceplate identifier strip.

4. Multiple jacks that are identified in close proximity on the drawings (but not separated by a physical barrier) may be combined in a single assembly. The telecommunications contractor shall be responsible for determining the optimum compliant configuration based on the products proposed.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 918 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 5 Intercommunication Systems

5. The same orientation and positioning of jacks and connectors shall be utilized throughout the installation. Prior to installation, the telecommunications contractor shall submit the proposed configuration for each outlet assembly for review by the Owner.

6. The modular jack shall incorporate printed label strip on the dust cap module for identifying the outlet. Printed labels shall be permanent and compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA–606-A standard specifications. Labels shall be printed using a printer such as a Brady hand held printer. Hand printed labels shall not be accepted.

C. Faceplates: The faceplates shall:

1. Be as appropriate to fit the modular jack used.

2. Be UL listed and CSA certified.

3. Be constructed of high impact, ABS plastic UL 94V-0 construction (except where noted otherwise).

4. Shall match the faceplate color used for other utilities in the building or match the color of the raceway if installed in surface raceway.

5. Be compliant with the above requirements along with the following when incorporating optical fiber:
a. Be a low profile assembly,
b. Incorporate a mechanism for storage of cable and fiber slack needed for termination,
c. Position the fiber optic couplings to face downward or at a downward angle to prevent contamination and,
d. Incorporate a shroud that protects the optical couplings from impact damage.

6. Be available as single-gang or dual-gang.

7. Provide easy access for adds, moves, and changes by front removal of jack modules.

8. Possess recessed designation windows to facilitate labeling and identification.

9. Include a clear plastic cover to protect labels in the designation window.

10. Have mounting screws located under recessed designation windows.

11. Comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A work area labeling standard.

12. Allow for the UTP modules to be inverted in place for termination purposes.

13. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

D. Voice / Data Jacks

1. Voice/Data jacks shall be 8-position modular jacks and shall be Category 6 performance as defined by the references in this document including ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2. All pair combinations must be considered, with the worst-case measurement being the basis for compliance. Modular jack performance shall be third-party verified by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory.

2. The modular jack shall use dual reactance modular contact array.

3. The modular jack shall be both component, link and channel compliant to category specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.

4. The modular jack’s performance shall be third-party verified to ANSI/TIA/EIA568-C Category 6 specifications.

5. The modular jack shall have low emission IDC contacts.

6. The modular jack shall use standard termination practice using 110 impact tool.

7. The modular jack shall be backwards compatible to Category 3, 5, and 5e.

8. The modular jack shall be center tuned to category 6 test specifications.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 919 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 6 Intercommunication Systems

9. Dust covers shall be used on each termination.

2.3 110 COPPER TERMINATION BLOCK
A. The voice cross connect shall be a passive connection between the horizontal termination blocks and the backbone termination blocks. The wall mount frames shall be field terminated kits including all blocks, connecting blocks, and designation strips.

Management rings shall be mounted between vertical columns of blocks to provide management of cross-connect wire. Backbone and horizontal blocks shall use 4-pair connecting blocks. Blocks shall be oriented so that backbone terminations are located on the left and horizontal frames are located on the right of the termination field when facing the frame assembly.

B. 110 Block Kits shall:

1. Include both the wiring block in a 50, 100 and 300 pair (as applicable) footprint and the connecting block.

2. Be manufactured using fire retardant molded plastic.

3. Support termination of 22-24 AWG solid conductor.

4. Contain back openings for the feed through of cable.

5. Meet category 6 component compliance and be verified by a third-party nationally recognized independent testing laboratory.

6. Have color-coded tips on the wiring block and color-coding on the connector blocks for installation identification.

7. Use standard termination practice requiring a single conductor 110 impact tool.

8. Termination hardware shall maintain the paired construction of the cable to facilitate minimum untwisting of the wires.

9. Be backwards compatible to category 3, 5 and 5e.

10. Be labeled in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A labeling specifications using permanent labels and LabelMo software (or other labeling software/printer).

11. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

C. 110 Cross-Connect System Backboard Channels shall:

1. Be available in 300 and 900 pair sizes.

2. Allow the mounting of 110 100-pair blocks without legs.

3. Include bottom trough and grounding bar.

4. Be wall mountable.

5. Be of cold roll steel construction.

6. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

D. 110 Wall Mount Vertical Trough shall:

1. Be available in single channel or dual channel configurations.

2. In dual channel configuration shall be used to provide separation for different wiring media.

3. Be available in 300 pair and 900 pair sizes.

4. Be wall mountable.

5. Be used with wall mountable backboard channels. Acceptable configurations include a 300 pair and a 900 pair.

6. Be of cold roll steel construction.

7. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 920 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 7 Intercommunication Systems

2.4 MODULAR PATCH PANELS
A. The Modular Patch Panels shall:

1. Meet category 6 component compliance and be verified by a third-party nationally recognized independent testing laboratory.

2. Use low emission IDC contacts.

3. Use dual reactance technology to enhance the signal-to-noise ratio.

4. Require standard termination practices using a 110 impact tool.

5. Use a single piece IDC housing designed to accept larger Category 6 conductors.

6. Support both T568B and T568A wiring.

7. Include easy to follow wiring labels.

8. Include label fields.

9. Allow for the use of icons.

10. Include full length metal rear cable management.

11. Be available in standard or high density.

12. Be backward compatible to category 3, 5 and 5e.

13. Be center tuned to category 6 test specifications.

2.5 RACKS
A. All racks and wire management shall be of one manufacturer or designed specifically to work together. The equipment rack shall provide vertical cable management and support for the patch cords at the front of the rack and wire management, support, and protection for the horizontal cables inside the legs of the rack. Waterfall cable management shall be provided at the top of the rack for patch cords and for horizontal cables entering the rack channels for protection and to maintain proper bend radius and cable support. Wire management shall also be mounted above each patch panel and/or piece of equipment on the rack. The rack shall include mounting brackets for cable tray ladder rack to mount to the top of the rack. Velcro cable ties shall be provided inside the rack channels to support the horizontal cable. Rack shall be black in color to match the patch panels and cable management.

B. Free-Standing Rack

1. Free-standing rack shall:
a. Provide the necessary strain relief, bend radius and cable routing for proper installation of high performance cross connect products, meeting all specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.
1) Rear channels to securely route distribution cables. 2) Vertical management “cage” to protect patch cords while allowing easy access for moves, adds and change with individual 1-rack unit fingers and double hinged door.
3) Include speednuts to reduce assembly time.
b. Have top cable trough with waterfall and built in patch/horizontal cable distribution separator.
c. Have EIA hole pattern on front and rear.
d. Have rack units stamped on the front, on both sides allowing numbering from top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top.
e. Be available with a 10.5” or 16.25” channel depth.
f. Be available with hook and loop straps for securing bulk cables inside the vertical U-channels.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 921 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 8 Intercommunication Systems
g. Assemble as 19” (483 mm) or 23” (584 mm) with no additional hardware. h. Be available with three styles of vertical patch cord management: interbay with latches, cable management rings, or fingerduct with covers. i. Provide floor and ceiling access for cable management and distribution. j. Provide pre-drilled base for floor attachment of rack. k. Be available in a 7 foot version (45 rack units) or an 8 foot version (51 rack units).
l. Be available in standard color of black.
m. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

2.6 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE
A. All horizontal data station cable and voice cable shall terminate on modular patch panels (copper or fiber), 110 cross-connecting blocks (copper), or patch/splice cabinets (fiber) in their respective Telecommunications Room or Equipment Room as specified on the drawings.

B. 100 OHM Category 6 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE (UTP)

1. Physical Characteristics:
a. Shall be plenum rated and meet applicable requirements of ANSI/ICEA S80-576. All 4 pairs must be insulated with F.E.P. No 2 x 2 or 3 x 1 constructions will be allowed.
b. The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be .023 in. maximum. c. Shall consist of (4) twisted pairs.
d. Shall be suitable for the environment in which they are to be installed. e. The color coding of pairs shall be:

Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3 Pair 4
W-BL; BL W-O; O W-G; G W-BR; BR
f. The overall diameter of the cable shall be 0.2150”nominal. g. The ultimate breaking strength measured in accordance with ASTM D 4565 shall be 400 N minimum.
h. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1” at -20 degrees Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking.
i. Cable shall be third party verified to meet ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

2. Transmission Characteristics:
a. DC resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 9.38 Ohms per 100m max. at 20°C. Measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566.
b. The mutual capacitance of any pair at 1 kHz for 100m of cable shall not exceed 4.4 Nf.
c. DC resistance unbalance between any two conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3% when measured at or corrected to 20°C in accordance with ASTM D 4566.
d. The capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair shall not exceed 330 pF per 100m.

3. Cable shall be Berk-Tek LANmark-1000 UTP (Plenum) or approved equal.

4. Cable installed underground/below slab in conduit shall be Berk-Tek LANmark-6 OSP (wet location) or approved equal.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 922 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 9 Intercommunication Systems

2.7 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. Indoor/Outdoor Optical Fiber Non-Conductive Plenum (OFNP) Loose Tube With Laser Enhanced 62.5/125 Optical Fibers

1. Each Multimode Fiber shall be:
a. Graded-index optical fiber wave-guide with nominal 62.5/125mcore/cladding diameter. b. The fiber shall comply with the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA-4920000. c. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-46, 53 or 61.
d. Information transmission capacity shall be measured in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA-455—204.
e. The measurements shall be performed at 23 degrees C +/- 5 degrees. f. Maximum attenuation dB/Km @ 850/1300 nm: 3.5/1.0.
g. Bandwidth 200 MHz-km @ 850nm.
h. Bandwidth 500 MHz-km @ 1300nm.
i. Optical Fiber shall be laser optimized and guarantee Gigabit Ethernet distances of 500m/1000m for 850nm and 1300nm respectively

2. Physical Characteristics:
a. Shall be suitable for use in both outdoor and indoor applications without the use of a transition at the building entrance.
b. Shall be suitable for use in risers, plenums and horizontal applications. c. Shall have a dry water blocking system for cable core and buffer tubes. d. Shall be available with a fiber strand count range from 6 to 144. e. Shall have a 3.0 mm sub-unit diameter.
f. Shall have and be marked with an UL-OFNP and OFN FT6 Flame Rating. g. Shall comply with the requirements of ICEA S-83-596 & ANSI/ICEA S-87- 640.
h. Strength members shall be dielectric and may be either fiberglass or aramid yarn.
i. Suitable for underground or aboveground conduits.
j. Loose Tube fibers shall be color coded in accordance with EIA / TIA 598 with an overall blue jacket.
k. Shall have a ripcord for overall jacket.
l. Suitable for operation between -40° to +75° C.
m. Shall be UV resistant.
n. Shall be of an all dielectric design.

3. Design Make:
a. Berk-Tek Adventum optical fiber cable with GIGAlite 62.5/125 micron fiber or approved equal.

B. Indoor/Outdoor Optical Fiber Non-Conductive Plenum (OFNP) Loose Tube With Laser Enhanced 50/125 Optical Fibers

1. Each Multimode Fiber shall be:
a. Graded-index optical fiber wave-guide with nominal 50/125mcore/cladding diameter. b. The fiber shall comply with the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA-4920000. c. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-46, 53 or 61.
d. Information transmission capacity shall be measured in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA-455—204.
e. The measurements shall be performed at 23 degrees C +/- 5 degrees.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 923 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 10 Intercommunication Systems
f. Maximum attenuation dB/Km @ 850/1300 nm: 3.5/1.5.
g. Bandwidth 700 MHz-km @ 850nm.
h. Bandwidth 500 MHz-km @ 1300nm.
i. Optical Fiber shall be laser optimized and guarantee Gigabit Ethernet distances of 750m/600m for 850nm and 1300nm respectively

2. Physical Characteristics:
a. Shall be suitable for use in both outdoor and indoor applications without the use of a transition at the building entrance.
b. Shall be suitable for use in risers, plenums and horizontal applications. c. Shall have a dry water blocking system for cable core and buffer tubes. d. Shall be available with a fiber strand count range from 6 to 72. e. Shall have a 3.0 mm sub-unit diameter.
f. Shall have and be marked with an UL-OFNP and OFN FT6 Flame Rating. g. Shall comply with the requirements of ICEA S-83-596 & ANSI/ICEA S-87- 640.
h. Strength members shall be dielectric and may be either fiberglass or aramid yarn.
i. Suitable for underground or aboveground conduits.
j. Loose Tube fibers shall be color coded in accordance with EIA / TIA 598 with an overall dark blue jacket.
k. Shall have a ripcord for overall jacket.
l. Suitable for operation between -40° to +75° C.
m. Shall be UV resistant.
n. Shall be of an all dielectric design.
o. Shall have a maximum installation tension of 300 lbs for cables without dielectric strength member and 600 lbs for cables with dielectric strength members.

3. Design Make:
a. Berk-Tek Adventum optical fiber cable with GIGAlite 50/125 micron fiber or approved equal.

2.8 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
A. ST Fiber Optic Connectors

1. Each field-terminated ST Fiber Connector shall:
a. Be a pre-polished fiber connector with a fiber stub or a field polish fiber connector.
b. Be available in singlemode and multimode (62.5 um and 50 um) versions. c. Have a domed zirconia ferrule.
d. Have a PC polish.
e. Accept a nominal fiber diameter of 125 micrometers.
f. Have a typical insertion loss of 0.3 dB for multimode and 0.2 dB for singlemode.
g. Have repairable tips.
h. Have an insertion loss change of less than 0.2 dB after 500 reconnects. i. Be stable over an operating range of –40C to +75 degrees C.

2. Design Make:
a. Nexans ST/Ortronics ST Fiber Optic Connectors or approved equal.

B. LC Fiber Optic Connectors

1. Each LC Fiber Connector shall:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 924 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 11 Intercommunication Systems
a. Be a pre-polished fiber connector with a fiber stub or field-polish fiber connector.
b. Be available in single mode and multimode versions.
c. Have a domed zirconia ferrule.
d. Be a PC polish type connector.
e. Accept a nominal fiber diameter of 125 micrometers.
f. Have a typical insertion loss of 0.1 dB for multimode and 0.1 dB for single mode.
g. Have repairable tips.
h. Have an insertion loss change of less than 0.2 dB after 500 reconnects. i. Be stable over an operating range of –40C to +75 degrees C.

2. Design Make:
a. Nexans/Ortronics LC Fiber Optic Connectors or approved equal.

C. SC Fiber Optic Connectors

1. Each SC Fiber Connector shall:
a. Be a pre-polished fiber connector with a fiber stub or a field-polish fiber connector.
b. Be available in single mode and multimode versions.
c. Have a domed zirconia ferrule.
d. Be a PC polish or pre-polished type connector.
e. Accept a nominal fiber diameter of 125 micrometers.
f. Have a typical insertion loss of 0.1 dB for multimode and 0.1 dB for single mode.
g. Have repairable tips.
h. Have an insertion loss change of less than 0.2 dB after 500 reconnects. i. Be stable over an operating range of –40C to +75 degrees C.

2. Design Make:
a. Nexans/Ortronics SC Fiber Optic Connectors or approved equal.

2.9 COPPER CABLE PROTECTION UNITS
A. All copper circuits shall be provided with protection between each building with an entrance cable protector panel. All building-to-building circuits shall be routed through this protector. The protector shall be connected with a #6 AWG copper bonding conductor between the protector ground lug and the TC ground point. Approved manufacturer of protection units is Porta Systems.

2.10 PATCH CORDS
A. The contractor shall provide factory terminated and tested UTP and optical fiber patch cords and equipment cords for the complete cabling system. The UTP patch cables shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for patch cord testing.

B. Copper (UTP) patch cords shall:

1. Use 8-position connector with impedance matched contacts and designed using dual reactance.

2. Be constructed of 100 ohm, 4 pair stranded conductor, unshielded twisted pair copper per the requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and ANSI/TIA/EIA568-B.2–1 standard.

3. Meet TIA category 6 component specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 925 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 12 Intercommunication Systems

4. 100% factory tested to meet category 6 performance and

5. ETL or any other nationally recognized 3rd party verification

6. Be center tuned to category 6 performance specifications by using paired bi-level contact array.

7. Be capable of universal T568A or T568B wiring schemes.

8. Modular connector shall maintain the paired construction of the cable to facilitate minimum untwisting of the wires.

9. Have a performance marking indelibly labeled on the jacket (by the manufacturer).

10. Have the ability to accept color-coded labels and icons to comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A labeling specifications.

11. Have “snagless” protection for the locking tab to prevent snagging and to protect locking tab in tight locations and provide bend relief.

12. Be available in three standard colors.

13. Be available in 3 foot, 5 foot, 7 foot, 9 foot, and 15 foot standard lengths.

14. Be backwards compatible to Category 3, 5 and 5e.

15. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

C. Optical Fiber patch cords shall:

1. Contain two (2) multi-mode optical fibers.

2. Use multi-mode, graded-index fibers with a 62.5 micron core.

3. Be capable of transmission at both 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelengths.

4. Include listing of actual loss of patchcord when packaged.

5. Be manufactured in standard lengths of 1 m (3.27 ft), 2 m (6.56 ft ), 3 m (9.84 ft), 4 m ( 13.11 ft), 7 m (22.95 ft), and 10 m (32.79 ft), and special ordered in any other lengths.

6. Be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

2.11 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. The facility shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB).

This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed independent of the building’s electrical and building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard.

B. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized between telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is attached.

C. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases, cable trays, ungrounded conduits, etc. entering or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded to the respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and compression connectors.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 926 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 13 Intercommunication Systems
D. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green tape. All cables and bus bars shall be identified and labeled in accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification.

2.12 FIRESTOP
A. A firestop system is comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure, the opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise an effective block for fire, smoke, heat, vapor and pressurized water stream.

B. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.

C. Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and shall be approved by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE), licensed (actual or reciprocal) in the state where the work is to be performed. A drawing showing the proposed firestop system, stamped/embossed by the PE shall be provided to the Owner’s Technical Representative prior to installing the firestop system(s).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturer’s bend radius. In hollow wall installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. No more than 12” of UTP and 12” of fiber slack shall be stored in an in-wall box, modular furniture raceway, or insulated walls. Excess slack shall be loosely coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable.

B. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.0 document, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices.

C. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 12 mm (one-half inch).

D. Bend radius of the horizontal cable shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the UTP cable.

E. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25mm (one inch) of the termination point.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 927 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 14 Intercommunication Systems
F. Data jacks, unless otherwise noted in drawings, shall be located in the bottom position(s) of each faceplate. Data jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the right-most position(s).

G. Voice jacks shall occupy the top position(s) on the faceplate. Voice jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the left-most position(s).

3.2 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and best industry practices.

B. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit.

C. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A maximum fill for the particular raceway type or 40%.

D. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for transition points, or consolidation points.

E. Where transition points, or consolidation points are allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose.

F. The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded.

G. If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch (1.2 to 1.5 meter) intervals. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels.

H. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 50 cables.

Cable bundle quantities in excess of 50 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle and degrade cable performance.

I. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices.

J. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal cable is required, the contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling.

K. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner.

L. Cables shall be identified by a self-adhesive label in accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification and ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable label shall be applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable that can be accessed by removing the cover plate.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 928 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 15 Intercommunication Systems
M. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends smaller than four times the cable outside diameter at any point in the run and at the termination field.

N. Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25-lbf for a four-pair UTP cable.

O. Cables installed underground or below slab shall be suitable for use in wet locations and outdoors in duct or conduit. If wet location cable is exposed in the building after exiting the wet area, it must transition to an appropriate category dry cable within 50 feet (15M) of exiting conduit.

3.3 HORIZONTAL COPPER TERMINATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C standard, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices.

B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 13 mm (0.5 inch).

C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.

D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.

E. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible (within 25mm – 1 inch) to the termination point.

F. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.

3.4 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber splice tray or enclosure. No slack loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panel.

B. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective splice enclosure by mechanical means. The cables strength member shall be securely attached the cable strain relief bracket in the enclosure.

C. Each fiber bundle shall be stripped upon entering the splice tray and the individual fibers routed in the splice tray.

D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the splice enclosure. Cables labeled within the bundle shall not be acceptable.

E. A maximum of 12 strands of fiber shall be spliced in each tray.

F. All spare strands shall be installed into spare splice trays.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 929 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 16 Intercommunication Systems

3.5 BACKBONE CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables B. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit.

C. Where cables are housed in conduits, the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in separate conduits
D. Where backbone cables are installed in an air return plenum, riser rated cable shall be installed in metallic conduit.

E. Where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wireway, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables.

F. All backbone cables shall be securely fastened to the sidewall of the TR on each floor.

G. Backbone cables spanning more than three floors shall be securely attached at the top of the cable run with a wire mesh grip and on alternating floors or as required by local codes.

H. Vertical runs of cable shall be supported to messenger strand, cable ladder, or other method to provide proper support for the weight of the cable.

I. Large bundles of cables and/or heavy cables shall be attached using metal clamps and/or metal banding to support the cables.

3.6 RACKS
A. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using a minimum 3/8” hardware or as required by local codes.

B. Racks shall be placed with a minimum of 36-inch clearance from the walls on all sides of the rack. When mounted in a row, maintain a minimum of 36 inches from the wall behind and in front of the row of racks and from the wall at each end of the row.

C. All racks shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar in accordance with Section 9.0 of this document.

D. Rack mount screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion of the installation.

E. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on 4’ x 8’ x .75” void free plywood. The plywood shall be mounted vertically 12” above the finished floor. The plywood shall be painted with two coats of white fire retardant paint.

F. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be installed with the lowest edge of the mounting frame 18” from the finished floor.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 930 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 17 Intercommunication Systems

3.7 FIRESTOP SYSTEM
A. All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local inspection authorities prior to cable system acceptance.

3.8 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. The TBB shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that the work is to be performed. The TBB shall adhere to the recommendations of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 standard, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice.

B. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical contractor.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. The contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling system for the cable installation. The Owner will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the successful contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall designate the cables origin and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. Racks and patch panels shall be labeled to identify the location within the cable system infrastructure. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the appropriate labeling scheme.

Labeling shall follow the guidelines of ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

B. Outside Plant cables passing through a pull box or vault shall have a cable label that is water and mud proof.

C. All label printing will be machine generated by Ortronics LabelMo, or similar software, using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges. Self-laminating labels will be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized to the OD of the cable, and placed within view at the termination point on each end. Outlet, patch panel and wiring block labels shall be installed on, or in, the space provided on the device.

3.10 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General

1. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed.

2. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, the ANSI/TIA/EIA standards, the Certification Program Information Manual provided by the product manufacturer and best industry practice. If any of these are in conflict, the

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 931 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 18 Intercommunication Systems
Contractor shall bring any discrepancies to the attention of the project team for clarification and resolution.

B. Copper Link Testing

1. All twisted-pair copper cable links shall be tested for continuity, pair reversals, shorts, opens and performance as indicated below. Additional testing is required to verify Category performance.

2. Horizontal cabling shall be tested using a Level III test unit for category 6 performance compliance.

3. The basic tests required are:
a. Wire Map
b. Length
c. Attenuation
d. NEXT (Near end crosstalk)
e. Return Loss
f. ELFEXT Loss
g. Propagation Delay
h. Delay skew
i. PSNEXT (Power sum near-end crosstalk loss)
j. PSELFEXT (Power sum equal level far-end crosstalk loss)

4. Continuity - Each pair of each installed cable shall be tested using a test unit that shows opens, shorts, polarity and pair-reversals, crossed pairs and split pairs.

Shielded/screened cables shall be tested with a device that verifies shield continuity in addition to the above stated tests. The test shall be recorded as pass/fail as indicated by the test unit in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommended procedures, and referenced to the appropriate cable identification number and circuit or pair number. Any faults in the wiring shall be corrected and the cable re-tested prior to final acceptance.

5. Length - Each installed cable link shall be tested for installed length using a TDR type device. The cables shall be tested from patch panel to patch panel, block to block, patch panel to outlet or block to outlet as appropriate. The cable length shall conform to the maximum distances set forth in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C Standard. Cable lengths shall be recorded, referencing the cable identification number and circuit or pair number. For multi-pair cables, the shortest pair length shall be recorded as the length for the cable.

6. Category 6 Performance Shall meet the link requirements outlined below for a 90-meter, 4-connector permanent link.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 932 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 19 Intercommunication Systems
Frequency Maximum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
Minimum
(MHz) Insertion NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT
PSELFEXT Return
Loss (dB) (dB) (dB)
(dB) Loss
(dB)
(dB)

1.0 2.1 69.0 64.0 65.3

62.3 21.0

4.0 4.0 67.0 62.5 53.2

50.2 21.0

10.0 6.3 60.6 46.0 45.3

42.3 21.0

20.0 9.0 55.6 51.0 39.2

36.2 21.0

31.25 11.3 52.4 47.7 35.4 32.4

19.1 62.5 16.4 47.4 42.6 29.3 26.3

16.1 100.0 21.2 43.9 39.1 25.3 22.3

14.0 155.0 26.6 40.7 35.8 21.4 18.4

12.1 200.0 31.5 38.8 33.9 19.2 16.2

11.0 250.0 36.0 37.1 32.4 17.3 14.3

10.0 C. Fiber Testing

1. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end-to-end system. Testing shall consist of an end-to-end power meter test performed per EIA/TIA-455-53A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and/or 1300 nanometers for multimode fibers and 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers for single mode fibers. These tests also include continuity checking of each fiber.

2. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm (or 1310 and 1550 nm for singlemode) in both directions.

3. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 Standard, Method B.

4. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall test each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system.

ONLY LINK TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete the circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be the same used for the test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA Standard.

5. Attenuation testing shall be performed with an approved hand held tester from an industry recognized test equipment manufacturer.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 933 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 20 Intercommunication Systems

3.11 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the telecommunications contractor shall provide three (3) full documentation sets to the Engineer for approval. Documentation shall include the items detailed in the sub-sections below.

B. Documentation shall be submitted within ten (10) working days of the completion of each testing phase (e.g. subsystem, cable type, area, floor, etc.). This is inclusive of all test result and draft as-built drawings. Draft drawings may include annotations done by hand. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be submitted within 30 working days of the completion of each testing phase. At the request of the Engineer, the telecommunications contractor shall provide copies of the original test results.

C. The Engineer may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable system, at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the telecommunications contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Engineer, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.12 TEST RESULTS
A. Test documentation shall be provided on disk within three weeks after the completion of the project. The disk shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the words “Project Test Documentation”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and cable (or outlet) I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test equipment used for this installation.

The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used in the field test equipment.

B. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C including applicable TSB’s and amendments. The appropriate Level III tester shall be used to verify Category 6 cabling systems.

C. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire (or fiber) test instrument shall be submitted as part of the documentation package. The telecommunications contractor must furnish this information in electronic form CD-ROM). If needed, provide manufacturers software require to read the test results.

D. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 934 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
27 13 00 - 21 Intercommunication Systems
PART 4 - WARRANTY AND SERVICES

4.1 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide the warranty directly to the end-user.

B. An Extended Product Warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the system for a minimum of 20 years from the date of registration. The Extended Product Warranty shall warrant the installed horizontal and/or backbone copper, and both the horizontal and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system.

C. The Application Assurance Warranty shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA–568-C.0. These applications include, but are not limited to, 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T, 155Mb/sATM, and 1Gb/s ATM.

D. The contractor shall provide a warranty on the physical installation.

4.2 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND SYSTEM CERTIFICATION
A. Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and as-built documentation, and successful performance of the cabling system for a twoweek period will constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the end user shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the product manufacturer, registering the installation.

END OF SECTION 27 13 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 935 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
28 13 00 - 1 Electronic Access Control
SECTION 28 13 00

ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work consists of providing and installing prescribed systems and equipment, in accordance with the Owner’s directives and needs. The Contractor shall design, install, and configure systems to provide the exact function described herein and will be held to the operational criteria. Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing a complete and fully operational system, with the intended features and capabilities, whether or not all required parts, components, systems or accessories are specified in the construction documents. Contractor shall provide all required parts, components, systems, materials and accessories needed for a complete and working system, without additional cost to the owner.

B. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all Access Control Equipment, as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents. Final terminations and system commissioning to be performed by a factory certified technician.

Systems and the respective specification sections which are part of this section include but are not limited to the following:

1. Reader Controller

2. Reader Interface

3. Power Supply and Integral Battery Back Up

4. Card Readers / Keypads

5. Request-To-Exit

6. Wiring, switches and ancillary equipment
C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide and install supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to, or necessary for, a sound, secure and complete installation.

D. Training on operation and software of the access control system per Section 3.2 of this specification section.

E. Coordinate all installations with door schedule and door hardware specifications prior to rough-in.

1.2 INTENT OF ACCESS CONTROL SPECIFICATION
A. The following specification shall be considered as coordinated with the general conditions, special conditions and the preamble of this and other related sections. It shall be the Security Contractor’s responsibility to furnish all necessary systems and equipment, in accordance with the Owner’s directives and needs.

B. Where items aren’t definitely or correctly specified and are required for completion of the work, a written statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy shall be sent to

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 936 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
28 13 00 - 2 Electronic Access Control
the Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended.

C. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Furnish security equipment to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications.

2. Furnish security equipment to comply with the requirements of American National Standards for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People (ICC/ANSI A117.1), the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.

3. System supplier must be certified by Sielox, the equipment manufacturer, for installing, supporting and servicing the products to be furnished. Certification shall be submitted on the equipment manufacturer’s letterhead, at product submittal timeframe.

B. Certified Partnered Contractors:

1. Universal Security and Fire – Hooman Rabieh, [email protected], 1190 Coleman Avenue, Suite 120, San Jose, CA 95110, (408)748-7716.

2. Redwood City Electric – Phil Ash, [email protected], 2775 Northwestern Parkway, Santa Clara, CA 95051, (408)450-8404.

3. Simplex Grinnell – Wes Reynolds, [email protected], 6952 Preston Ave., Suite A, Livermore, CA 94551 (925)273-1215.

4. Security and Cabling Solutions – James Basurto, [email protected], 260 Cimino St., San Jose, CA 95125, (408)705-2060.

5. First Alarm – Jane Millslagle, [email protected], 2365 Paragon Dr., Suite E, San Jose, CA 95131, (408)866-1111, 2614.

6. The contractor must abide by and adhere to all Drug Free School Zone laws and participate in a drug-free workplace program.

C. Testing Agency: Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to installation arrange conference between supplier, and related trades to review materials, procedures, and coordinating related work.

E. Sequencing: The work shall be performed in the following sequence, unless directed otherwise by owner’s representative:

1. Installation of all conduit and rough-in boxes

2. Installation of wiring

3. Installation of Access Controllers, Modules & Power Supplies

4. Installation of new field devices and new readers/network locks

5. Connection to site control & front end equipment.

6. Commissioning of the new system components.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 937 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
28 13 00 - 3 Electronic Access Control

7. End User training
F. The Authorized Dealer will provide pricing for 1 year warranty from date of purchase.

1.4 PROJECT SUMMARY
A. These specifications describe the requirements, performance parameters, and operating considerations for the installation of electronic access control systems.

B. The intent of this project will be to secure perimeter access doors/points using the access control readers and software by HID Global and Sielox.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. All work and system components shall be covered by a one (1) year ‘in field’ warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of the project, unless otherwise directed by owner or their representative.

B. During system warranty period, system updates are to be made available to owner at no charge to owner.

C. During warranty period, provide twenty-four (24) hour toll-free technical support.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of this request for proposal, prior to the start of work the contractor shall:

1. Submit copies of the certification of the company and names of staff that will be performing the installation and termination of the installation to provide proof of compliance of this spec.

2. Submit proof from manufacturer of contractor’s good standing in manufacturer’s program.

3. Submit appropriate cut sheets and samples for all products, hardware and cabling.

4. Shop drawing of equipment connections, point-to-point diagrams, etc. sufficient to describe the operation of the system. Telecommunications Contractor shall include equipment listed by other trades and shall provide at submittal time.

B. Work shall not proceed without the Owner's approval of the submitted items.

C. The security systems contractor shall receive approval from the Owners on all substitutions of material. No substituted materials shall be installed except by written approval from the Owner.

D. If a submittal is provided without shop drawings, an immediate “Revise and Re-submit” shall be issued back to Contractor.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 938 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
28 13 00 - 4 Electronic Access Control
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Control System Hardware/Firmware/Software:

1. Security Management System (SMS) as manufactured by Sielox.

2.2 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A. The contractor shall furnish and install all hardware, software, devices and components to meet the performance and functional requirements described in these contract documents. Include all items required, whether or not individually specified, to ensure a completely operational integrated Security Protection system. The contractor must complete all database entry (unless directed otherwise by owner or their representative), and provide the owner with training on cardholder entry, as well as all system programming. No additional costs shall be allowed to make the system operational or to meet specifications.

2.3 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. System Description:

1. Primary function is to regulate access through specific portals to Secured areas.

2. Utilize card technology as its primary access device.

3. Surge Protection Components must be protected from voltage surges originating externally to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Must also include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components.

4. Power: Any special power treatment required, such as filtering or spike elimination that may be required for proper operation and protection of the ACS, shall be provided with the system. Step down power supply with battery backup of at least 4 hours.

2.4 SYSTEM HARDWARE
A. Access Control System Hardware/Firmware/Software:

1. As manufactured by Sielox AC1700 Controllers and Enclosures.

B. Credentials & Readers:

1. HID Multiclas SE RP40 for Building Card Readers.
a. Mullion and Switchmount parts shall be acceptable based upon specific mounting conditions of device at door/access location.

2. HID Maxiprox long range readers for site gates.

C. Door Position Switches/Contacts:

1. Refer to Door Hardware specifications (No substitutions) D. Request-to-Exit Motion Sensors:

1. Bosch request to exit devices.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 939 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
28 13 00 - 5 Electronic Access Control
E. Power Supplies:

1. Altronix AL600 ULACM Power supplies and integral back up batteries for RP40 card readers.

2. Linear power supply and back up batteries for Maxiprox card readers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A. The Contractor shall work with the owner to ensure that the new components will be properly programmed into the new and/or existing system.

B. Coordination required is as follows, unless directed otherwise by owner or their representative;

1. Personal/staff information.

2. Access time for all personal /staff.

3. Definitions of openings for staff access.

4. Holiday definition

5. Special access privileges

6. Lock down conditions

3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. EC shall provide and install all applicable components, including but not limited to, cables, patch panels, connectors, conduit, etc. for a fully functioning system.

B. EC shall provide a minimum of 250 wireless access keycard/fob to Owner at completion of project. Keycards/fobs shall be compatible with access control system, and shall be coordinated such that new keycards/fobs do not re-use or otherwise overlap with existing credential numbering system (credentials shall be unique).

3.3 OWNER PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. On Site Operator training: instruct operating staff in proper operation, including handson training.

B. Minimum of four (4), man-hours covering the operations for each system installed.

C. Training sessions shall be provided to supervisors, staff utilizing systems and equipment provided under this section, maintenance personnel and any other personnel designated by the owner. Security Contractor should prepare to provide operator training for up to ten (10) personnel.

D. Security contractor shall be prepared to provide training sessions on all work shifts, including day, evening and night shifts.

E. On Site Administrator training: instruct owner-designated security system administrators for each system installed.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 940 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
28 13 00 - 6 Electronic Access Control
F. Minimum of four (4), man-hours of training for each owner-designated individual.

G. Training to cover all administrative and management functions, features and controls for each system.

H. Refresher training: provide a 90-day refresher training session to operators and administrators.

I. Minimum of four (4) hours of training for each owner-designated Operator and/or Administrator.

J. Training shall cover summaries of all operator and administrator training topics and shall include greater detail on subject areas or operations not yet mastered by operators or administrators.

K. Review in detail all information in the operations and maintenance manuals for each system provided.

L. Prior to administering the above training, the contractor(s) shall prepare an outline of the training, identifying the goals and expectations of the course and detailing what students are expected to learn.

M. Training courses shall be videotaped for subsequent training use by the Owner.

END OF SECTION 28 13 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 941 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP 6(&7,21
),5(635,1./(5021,725,1*$1'$/$506<67(0
3$57*(1(5$/
 5(/$7(''2&80(176
$ 'UDZLQJV DQG JHQHUDO SURYLVLRQV RI WKLV &RQWUDFW LQFOXGLQJ *HQHUDO DQG 6XSSOHPHQWDU\ &RQGLWLRQV DQG 'LYLVLRQ  6SHFLILFDWLRQ 6HFWLRQV DSSO\ WR WKLV 6HFWLRQ
 6800$5<
$ 7KLV6HFWLRQ,QFOXGHV

 3URYLGHDFRPSOHWHVSULQNOHUPRQLWRULQJDQGDODUPV\VWHP7KHV\VWHPVKDOOEH FRQQHFWHG WHVWHG YHULILHG E\ WKH $XWKRULW\ +DYLQJ -XULVGLFWLRQ $+-
 WR EH
DFFHSWDEOH DQG OHIW LQ ILUVWFODVV RSHUDWLQJ FRQGLWLRQ  $OO HTXLSPHQW KHUHLQ VSHFLILHG VKDOO EH HQJLQHHUDSSURYHG DQG&DOLIRUQLD6WDWH)LUH0DUVKDO &6)0

OLVWHG  7KH HQWLUH LQVWDOODWLRQ VKDOO FRQIRUP WR WKH 1DWLRQDO )LUH 3URWHFWLRQ $VVRFLDWLRQ
1)3$
6WDQGDUG
$ &(&$UWLFOHDQGDXWKRULWLHVKDYLQJ
MXULVGLFWLRQ DV DSSOLFDEOH  7KH V\VWHP VSHFLILHG DQG GHSLFWHG RQ WKH SODQ LV D FRPSOHWH DQG DSSURYHG V\VWHP  6XEVWLWXWLRQ RI V\VWHP FRPSRQHQWV RU PDQXIDFWXUHU ZLOO UHTXLUH WKH FRQWUDFWRU WR VHSDUDWHO\ REWDLQ DSSURYDO ZLWK WKH &6)0DW&RQWUDFWRU¶VH[SHQVHDQGVKDOOPHHWDOOUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKHV\VWHPDV GHVLJQHGDQGSUHDSSURYHG$Q\URXWLQJRIWKHV\VWHPZLULQJWKDWLVVLJQLILFDQWO\ GLIIHUHQW WKDQ VKRZQ RQ WKH DSSURYHG GUDZLQJV VKDOO KDYH WKH DSSURYDO RI WKH HQJLQHHUDQGPXVWEHREWDLQHGSULRUWRFRQVWUXFWLRQ
 3URYLGH DOO ZRUN DQG PDWHULDO DV VKRZQ DQG  RU UHTXLUHG WR SURYLGH D IXOO\ IXQFWLRQDODQGDGHTXDWHV\VWHPDVGHVFULEHGKHUHLQDQGDVUHTXLUHGE\WKH$+-  6XSHUYLVLRQ
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
 7KH FRPSOHWHG V\VWHP VKDOO EH WHVWHG LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK 1)3$ 6WDQGDUG
 :DUUDQW\
7KHHTXLSPHQWDQGZLULQJVKDOOEHZDUUDQWHGWREHIUHHIURPHOHFWULFDO DQG PHFKDQLFDO GHIHFWV IRU D SHULRG RI WZR

 \HDUV FRPPHQFLQJ ZLWK ILQDO
DFFHSWDQFHE\2ZQHU
 $OOZLULQJVKRZQLQGUDZLQJVVKDOOEHLQVWDOOHGLQFRQGXLW  6\VWHP2SHUDWLRQVKDOOLQFOXGH

D 6HSDUDWH ]RQH VLJQDOLQJ DQG GHYLFH VWDWXV LQGLFDWLRQ IRU DOO LQLWLDWLQJ GHYLFHV

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 942 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP E $XGLEOHWRVRXQGWKH&DOLIRUQLDXQLIRUPILUHDODUPVLJQDOLQWHPSRUDOPRGH 'HYLFHV VKDOO EH DW OHDVW G%$ DERYH DYHUDJH DPELHQW VRXQG OHYHO EXW QRWOHVVWKDQG%$DW¶RUPRUHWKDQG%$
F 6XSHUYLVLRQRIDOOFLUFXLWVWRLQGLFDWHDQ\DEQRUPDOZLULQJFRQGLWLRQ G 2QH

121&LQWHJUDOUHOD\IRUH[WHUQDOGHYLFHLQWHUIDFHRUDVLQGLFDWHG RQGUDZLQJV
H &HQWUDO VWDWLRQ FRQQHFWLRQ FDSDEOH RI LQGLFDWLQJ 
 GLVWLQFW VHSDUDWH
VLJQDOVDVEHLQJWDPSHUWURXEOHDQGDODUPZLWKSRLQWUHSRUWLQJFDSDELOLWLHV

 $OOZRUNVKDOOEHFRPSOHWHGDVVKRZQRQWKHSODQVDQGRUDVVSHFLILHGZLWKLQWKLV VSHFLILFDWLRQDQGVKDOOLQFOXGHWKHIROORZLQJ
EXWLVQRWOLPLWHGWR


D )XUQLVKLQJDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIHTXLSPHQWDQGGHYLFHV E &RQGXFWRUV FRQQHFWLRQV DQG LQWHUFRQQHFWLRQV ZKHUH VSHFLILHG DQG DOO LQ FRQGXLWV\VWHP
F 7HVWLQJFOHDQLQJDQGDGMXVWLQJRIFRPSOHWHGZRUN G :LULQJ GLDJUDPV DVEXLOW GUDZLQJV DQG WKUHH

 VHWV RI HTXLSPHQW
RSHUDWLRQVDQGPDLQWHQDQFHLQVWUXFWLRQVIRU2ZQHU
H $OO ZRUN DQGPDWHULDOIRU FRPSOHWH DQG RSHUDEOH V\VWHPV DV LQGLFDWHG RU VSHFLILHG
I 3HUPLWVLQVSHFWLRQVDQGIHHV
J ,GHQWLILFDWLRQDQGLQVWUXFWLRQWR2ZQHU5HSUHVHQWDWLYH K &RRUGLQDWLRQ ZLWK 6HFWLRQ    5$&(:$<6 $1' %2;(6 )25 (/(&75,&$/6<67(06
L )XUQLVKLQJRIVSHFLDOEDFNER[HVZKHUHUHTXLUHGIRULQVWDOODWLRQRIGHYLFHV  0HFKDQLFDO V\VWHP GXFW GHWHFWRUV VKDOO LQWHUIDFHZLWKILUHDODUP V\VWHPZLWKRXW DGGLWLRQDORUVSHFLDOFRQWUROGHYLFHV
 $OO FRQGXFWRUV WR EH LQVWDOOHG LQ FRQGXLW SXUVXDQW WR 6SHFLILFDWLRQ 6HFWLRQ  5$&(:$<6$1'%2;(6)25(/(&75,&$/6<67(06
 4XDOLILFDWLRQV
 &RQWUDFWRU VKDOO UHFHLYH ZULWWHQ DSSURYDO DQG YHULILHGWHVW UHVXOWV ZKLFKVKDOOEHVXEPLWWHGWRWKH2ZQHUIRUV\VWHPIURPPDQXIDFWXUHUVUHFRJQL]HG UHSUHVHQWDWLYHSULRUWRFRPSOHWLRQDQGDFFHSWDQFH
 $OOLQLWLDWLQJGHYLFHVVKDOOEHVHSDUDWHO\DGGUHVVHGIRULQGLYLGXDOLGHQWLILFDWLRQDW FRQWUROSDQHO
 $V%XLOW 'UDZLQJV
 $ FRPSOHWH VHW RI UHSURGXFLEOH ³DVEXLOW´ GUDZLQJV VKRZLQJ LQVWDOOHG ZLULQJ FRORU FRGLQJ ZLUH WDJ QRWDWLRQV H[DFW ORFDWLRQV RI DOO LQVWDOOHG HTXLSPHQWVSHFLILFLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQVEHWZHHQDOOHTXLSPHQWDQGLQWHUQDOZLULQJRI WKHHTXLSPHQWVKDOOEHGHOLYHUHGWRWKHRZQHUXSRQFRPSOHWLRQRIWKHV\VWHP  0DLQWHQDQFH,QVWUXFWLRQV
7KUHH

VXEPLWWDOVRIPDLQWHQDQFHLQVWUXFWLRQVVKDOO
EH SURYLGHG DQG VKDOO EH FRPSOHWH HDV\ WR UHDG XQGHUVWDQGDEOH DQG VKDOO SURYLGHWKHIROORZLQJLQIRUPDWLRQ

D ,QVWUXFWLRQVIRUUHSODFLQJDQ\FRPSRQHQWVRIWKHV\VWHPLQFOXGLQJLQWHUQDO SDUWV
E ,QVWUXFWLRQV IRU SHULRGLF FOHDQLQJ DQG DGMXVWPHQWV RI HTXLSPHQW ZLWK D VFKHGXOHRIWKHVHIXQFWLRQV
F $FRPSOHWHOLVWRIDOOHTXLSPHQWDQGFRPSRQHQWVZLWKLQIRUPDWLRQDVWRWKH DGGUHVVDQGWHOHSKRQHQXPEHURIERWKWKHPDQXIDFWXUHUDQGORFDOVXSSOLHU RIHDFKLWHP
G 8VHU RSHUDWLQJ LQVWUXFWLRQV VKDOO EH SURPLQHQWO\ GLVSOD\HG RQ D VHSDUDWH VKHHWORFDWHGQH[WWRWKHFRQWUROXQLWLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/6WDQGDUG 7KH FRQWUDFWRU VKDOO ZDUUDQW DOO HTXLSPHQW DQG ZLULQJ IUHH IURP LQKHUHQW PHFKDQLFDO DQG HOHFWULFDO GHIHFWV IRU WZR \HDUV IURP WKH GDWH RI ILQDO DFFHSWDQFH

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 943 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP  68%0,77$/6
$ &RPSO\ ZLWK DSSOLFDEOH SURYLVLRQV RI 6HFWLRQ     &20021 :25. 5(68/76)25(/(&75,&$/
% 7KH VXEPLWWDO VKDOO LQFOXGH FHUWLILFDWLRQ IURP WKH PDQXIDFWXUHU YHULI\LQJ WKDW WKH GLVWULEXWRULVDQDXWKRUL]HGDJHQWZKRLVTXDOLILHGDQGWUDLQHGE\WKHPDQXIDFWXUHULQ WKHSURSHULQVWDOODWLRQRSHUDWLRQDQGVHUYLFHRIWKHV\VWHP & 6KRS'UDZLQJV

 $ FRPSOHWH OLVW RI DOO VXSSOLHG HTXLSPHQW LQFOXGLQJPRGHO QXPEHUVZLWK FDWDORJ GDWDVKHHWVRQHDFKFRPSRQHQWDQG&6)0QXPEHU
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
 'HVFULEHV\VWHPFKDUDFWHULVWLFVDQGIXQFWLRQDVZHOODVGHYLFHZLULQJGLDJUDPV  9ROWDJH GURS DQG EDWWHU\ FDOFXODWLRQV IRU HDFK FRQWURO SDQHO DQG SRZHU VXSSO\ DQGLQLWLDWLQJFLUFXLWV
 6\VWHPRSHUDWLRQDOPDWUL[
' 0DQXIDFWXUHUVKDOOSURYLGHFHUWLILFDWLRQWKDWWKHHTXLSPHQWVXSSOLHGXQGHUWKLV6HFWLRQ KDVEHHQUHYLHZHGDQGFHUWLILHGE\,%&WRPHHWWKHFXUUHQWFULWHULDIRUVSHFLDOVHLVPLF FHUWLILFDWLRQ,QFOXGHVHLVPLFFRPSDQLRQDQFKRUDJH UHTXLUHPHQWVIURPWKHWHVWLQJDQG DVDSSURYHGE\WKHPDQXIDFWXUHU7KHPDQXIDFWXUHUVKDOOSURYLGHDQDSSURYHGODEHO RQWKHHTXLSPHQWHQFORVXUHVWDWLQJWKDWWKHHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQDZDUGHGDFHUWLILFDWH RIFRPSOLDQFHIRUVSHFLDOVHLVPLFFHUWLILFDWLRQ
( 'DWD 6KHHWV
  6KRZ &DOLIRUQLD 6WDWH )LUH 0DUVKDO /LVWLQJ 8/ OLVWLQJ HTXLSPHQW UDWLQJVGLPHQVLRQVDQGILQLVKHV
) 0DQXIDFWXUHU
V &HUWLILFDWH
  1RWH ZKHWKHU WKH V\VWHP PHHWV RU H[FHHGV VSHFLILHG UHTXLUHPHQWV
* 2SHUDWLQJDQG0DLQWHQDQFH,QVWUXFWLRQ0DQXDO

 0DQXDOVKDOOLQFOXGHWKHIROORZLQJWDLORUHGWRWKLVVSHFLILFSURMHFW 
D 2SHUDWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ
E &RGHGFDEOLQJSODQ
F 7ZRZLUHFLUFXLWGLDJUDPV
G :LULQJGHVWLQDWLRQVFKHGXOH
H 6FKHPDWLFFRPSRQHQWGLDJUDPVDQG3&ERDUGOD\RXWV I 0DLQWHQDQFHDQGDOLJQPHQWSURFHGXUHV
J 9ROWDJHGURSDQGEDWWHU\FDOFXODWLRQV

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 944 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP  &225',1$7,21
$ 5HIHU WR WKH HOHFWULFDO DQG PHFKDQLFDO GUDZLQJV DQG VSHFLILFDWLRQV WR GHWHUPLQH TXDQWLWLHVDQGORFDWLRQRIGHYLFHVDQGUHTXLUHGVFRSHRIZRUNDQGFRRUGLQDWHZRUNZLWK PHFKDQLFDO DQG HOHFWULFDO LQVWDOOHUV  3URYLGH IXQFWLRQ GHVFULEHG XQGHU PHFKDQLFDO VHFWLRQ6HTXHQFHRI&RQWUROIRUILUH DQGRU HPHUJHQF\ FRQGLWLRQV6XEPLW SURSRVHG LQWHUFRQQHFWLRQ WR HOHYDWRU VXSSOLHU  6XEPLW FRQGXLW DQG SDWKLQJ UHTXLUHPHQWV WR HOHFWULFDOLQVWDOOHU)RUVHOIFRQWDLQHGGRRUUHOHDVHFRRUGLQDWHZLWKGRRUVXSSOLHU  6<67(0'(6&5,37,21
$ *HQHUDO
  6\VWHP WR EH OLVWHG E\ 8QGHUZULWHUV /DERUDWRULHV DQG WKH &DOLIRUQLD 6WDWH )LUH 0DUVKDO GHVLJQHG WR PHHW WKH IXQFWLRQDO UHTXLUHPHQWV RI 1)3$ $ % DQG '
 6<67(023(5$7,21
$ :LULQJHTXLSPHQWDQGGHYLFHVIRUDODUPLQLWLDWLRQDQQXQFLDWLRQDQGDXGLEOHVLJQDOLQJ WR EH FRQWLQXRXVO\ VXSHUYLVHG IRU RSHQV VKRUWV RU JURXQGV

WURXEOH
 (DFK DODUP
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
ZKHUHDSSOLFDEOH


 6RXQGDQDXGLEOHDODUPDQGLOOXPLQDWHWKHYLVXDOLQGLFDWRUIRU ]RQHDQGW\SHRI DODUPDWWKHILUHFRPPDQGFHQWHUWKHUHPRWHDQQXQFLDWRUDQGILUHDODUPFRQWURO SDQHO
 6RXQG DW EXLOGLQJ RI RULJLQ WKH DXGLEOH DODUP VLJQDO RYHU WKH V\VWHP DXGLEOH GHYLFH
V

 7UDQVPLW VLJQDO WR UHOHDVH WKH HOHFWURPDJQHWLF KROG RSHQ GHYLFHV RQ FRUULGRU GRRUV
 7UDQVPLWVLJQDOWRFORVHVPRNHGDPSHUV
 7UDQVPLWDODUPVLJQDOWRHQHUJ\PDQDJHPHQWV\VWHPIRUVKXWGRZQRIEXLOGLQJDLU KDQGOHU
 7UDQVPLWDODUPVLJQDOWRWKHFHQWUDOVWDWLRQRIILFH  5HOHDVHH[LWGRRUORFNV
' 6\VWHP VKDOO QRW LQFRUSRUDWH DWLPH GHOD\IRU DQ\ RIWKH DODUP LQLWLDWLQJ GHYLFHV$OO DODUPVVKDOOEHFRQVLGHUHGFRQILUPHGDODUPV
( 'HWHFWLRQVKDOOEHDGGUHVVDEOHDQGUHSRUWLQJRIILUHFRQGLWLRQVWREHDFFRPSOLVKHGE\ WKHIROORZLQJEDVLFPHWKRGV

 0DQXDOVWDWLRQV
 6PRNHGHWHFWRUV
 +HDWGHWHFWRUV

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 945 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP  'XFWGHWHFWRUV
 :DWHUIORZVZLWFKHV
 %HDPGHWHFWRUV
) $ODUPV\VWHPLQSXWVWREHIXUWKHUVXEGLYLGHGDVIROORZVIRUDPRUHGHILQHGLQGLFDWLRQ RIWKHORFDWLRQDQGQDWXUHRIWKHILUHRUWURXEOHFRQGLWLRQ 
 0DQXDOVWDWLRQE\GHYLFHDQGORFDWLRQ
 6PRNHKHDWGHWHFWRUE\GHYLFHDQGORFDWLRQ
 :DWHUIORZRUSUHVVXUHVZLWFKE\GHYLFHDQGORFDWLRQ  6SULQNOHUYDOYHSRVLWLRQLQGLFDWLRQE\GHYLFHDQGORFDWLRQ * $ODUPFRQGLWLRQVKDOORYHUULGHWURXEOHLQGLFDWLRQ7URXEOHLQGLFDWLRQVKDOOUHDSSHDUDIWHU DODUPUHVHW
 /2$'62)(48,30(17$1'&20321(176
$ )ROORZ,(((6WDQGDUGZKHUHDSSOLFDEOH
% 3URYLGHIXVHSURWHFWLRQIRUHTXLSPHQWDQGVSDUHIXVHV & 'HVLJQ V\VWHPVIRU RSHUDWLRQ DW  YROWV QRUPDO RU HPHUJHQF\ SRZHU DV LQGLFDWHG +]QRPLQDOLQSXW
' 2SHUDWLQJYROWDJHGLVVLSDWHGE\UHVLVWRUVVKDOOQRWH[FHHGRIUDWLQJV ( 2SHUDWLQJYROWDJHRIFDSDFLWRUVVKDOOQRWH[FHHGRIUDWHGYROWDJH ) 2SHUDWLQJ ORDGV DQG YROWDJHV RQWUDQVLVWRUV DQG VROLGVWDWHGHYLFHV VKDOO QRW H[FHHG

PDQXIDFWXUHU
VUHFRPPHQGDWLRQIRUQRUPDOIXOOORDGRSHUDWLRQ
* 8VH HOHFWURQLF FRPSRQHQWV RI W\SHV DQG UDWLQJ FRPPRQO\ DYDLODEOH IURP VWRFN RI HVWDEOLVKHGFRPPHUFLDOGLVWULEXWLRQ
 *8$5$17((
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
' $OOFRPSRQHQWIDLOXUHVVKDOOEHUHPHGLHGWRWKHVDWLVIDFWLRQRIWKH2ZQHU

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 946 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP ( $ FRQWLQXLQJ VHUYLFH FRQWUDFW VKDOO EH RIIHUHG DW WLPH RI ELG WR FRPPHQFH DW WKH H[SLUDWLRQRIZDUUDQW\LQFOXGHGZLWKWKHV\VWHP
3$57352'8&7
 0$7(5,$/6
$ $ODUP3DQHODQGV\VWHPVKDOOEH8/OLVWHGIRUSRZHUOLPLWHGDSSOLFDWLRQ DVGHVFULEHG
RQWKHSODQV
6\VWHPVKDOOEHDVPDQXIDFWXUHGE\)LUH/LWHRUDSSURYHGDOWHUQDWH % 3UHIHUUHG9HQGRULV3DFLILF$X[LOLDU\)LUH$ODUP&RPSDQ\ 3$57(;(&87,21
 *(1(5$/
$ &RPSO\ ZLWK DOO DSSOLFDEOH SDUDJUDSKV LQ 6HFWLRQ    &20021 :25. 5(68/76)25(/(&75,&$/DSSO\DVWKRXJKUHSHDWHGKHUHLQ % ,QVWDOOV\VWHP
V
LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKPDQXIDFWXUHU
VLQVWUXFWLRQV
& ,QFOXGHVHUYLFHVRIFHUWLILHGWHFKQLFLDQVWRVXSHUYLVHLQVWDOODWLRQSURYLGHDGMXVWPHQWV SURYLGHILQDOFRQQHFWLRQVV\VWHPWHVWLQJDQGV\VWHPWUDLQLQJWR2ZQHU5HSUHVHQWDWLYH  *5281',1*
$ $OOHTXLSPHQWWREHJURXQGHGE\PHDQVRIJUHHQJURXQGZLUHWR8FRQWDFWRIGXSOH[ UHFHSWDFOHV DQG ERQGHG WR JURXQG SURYLGHG XQGHU 6HFWLRQ    *5281',1* $1'%21',1*)25(/(&75,&$/6<67(06
 ,163(&7,21
$ 6\VWHPV WR PHHW DOO WKH UHTXLUHPHQWV RI WKH &6)0 DQG ,25 DQG $+- DQG VKDOO EH DSSURYHGWKHUHE\EHIRUHLQVWDOODWLRQDQGSULRUWRILQDODFFHSWDQFH  /2&$7,21
$ %HIRUHLQVWDOODWLRQYHULI\H[DFWORFDWLRQRIFRQWUROHTXLSPHQWDQGRXWOHWV7KH2ZQHU UHVHUYHVWKHULJKWWRUHORFDWHV\VWHPFRPSRQHQWVZLWKLQDUDGLXVRI DWQRLQFUHDVH
LQFRVWEHIRUHURXJKLQZRUNLVVWDUWHGIRUWKHUHVSHFWLYHFRPSRQHQW  :,5,1*
$ )XUQLVKDOOFRQGXFWRUVHTXLSPHQWWHUPLQDOVWULSVHWFDQGODERUWRLQVWDOODFRPSOHWH DQG RSHUDEOH V\VWHP  $OO FDEOH FRQGXFWRUV VKDOO EH FRORU FRGHG DQG QXPEHUHG IRU

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 947 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) 6+$+.$:$6$.,$5&+,7(&76 6$1&$5/26),5(67$7,21
 )LUH6SULQNOHU0RQLWRULQJ $ODUP6\VWHP LGHQWLILFDWLRQ DW DOOWHUPLQDOV*UHHQ VKDOO EHIRU JURXQGLQJFRQGXFWRU RQO\ 8VH UHG LQVXODWLRQDQGRUUHGMDFNHWLQJRQDOOILUHDODUPFDEOH  7(67,1*
$ $IWHU DOO HTXLSPHQW VSHFLILHG KHUHLQ IRU HDFK V\VWHP KDV EHHQ LQVWDOOHG DQG LV LQ RSHUDWLQJ FRQGLWLRQ FRQGXFW SHUIRUPDQFH WHVWV WR GHWHUPLQH LI WKH LQVWDOODWLRQ DQG FRPSRQHQWV FRPSO\ ZLWK WKHVH VSHFLILFDWLRQV )XUQLVK FRPSHWHQW SHUVRQQHO DOO WHVW PDWHULDO DQG DSSURYHG WHVW LQVWUXPHQWV DQG FRQGXFW WKH WHVWV XQGHU VXSHUYLVLRQ RI IDFWRU\ SHUVRQQHO LQ WKH SUHVHQFH RI WKH (QJLQHHU WKH EXLOGLQJ DQG ILUH LQVSHFWLQJ DJHQFLHV
 7KH FRQWUDFWRU¶V MRE IRUHPDQ LQ WKH SUHVHQFH RI D UHSUHVHQWDWLYH RI WKH PDQXIDFWXUHU D UHSUHVHQWDWLYH RI WKH RZQHU DQG WKH ILUH GHSDUWPHQW VKDOO RSHUDWHHYHU\LQVWDOOHGGHYLFHWRYHULI\SURSHURSHUDWLRQDQGFRUUHFWDQQXQFLDWLRQ DWWKHFRQWUROSDQHO
 $WOHDVWRQKDOIRIDOOWHVWVVKDOOEHSHUIRUPHGRQEDWWHU\VWDQGE\SRZHU  :KHUH DSSOLFDWLRQ RI KHDW ZRXOG GHVWUR\ DQ\ GHWHFWRU LW PD\ EH PDQXDOO\ DFWLYDWHG
 7KHVLJQDOLQJOLQHFLUFXLWVDQGQRWLILFDWLRQDSSOLDQFHFLUFXLWVVKDOOEHRSHQHGLQDW OHDVWWZR

ORFDWLRQVWRYHULI\WKHSUHVHQFHRIVXSHUYLVLRQ
 :KHQ WKH WHVWLQJ KDV EHHQ FRPSOHWHG WR WKH VDWLVIDFWLRQ RI WKH 2ZQHU¶V UHSUHVHQWDWLYHDOHWWHUDWWHVWLQJWRWKHVDWLVIDFWRU\FRPSOHWLRQRIVDLGWHVWLQJVKDOO EHIRUZDUGHGWRWKHRZQHUDQGWKHDXWKRULW\KDYLQJMXULVGLFWLRQ  7KHFRQWUDFWRUVKDOOOHDYHWKHDODUPV\VWHPLQSURSHUZRUNLQJRUGHUDQGZLWKRXW DGGLWLRQDO H[SHQVH WR WKH 2ZQHU VKDOO UHSODFH DQ GHIHFWLYH PDWHULDOV RU HTXLSPHQWSURYLGHGE\KLPXQGHUWKLVFRQWUDFWZLWKLQWZR\HDUVIURPWKHGDWHRI ILQDODFFHSWDQFHE\WKHDZDUGLQJDXWKRULW\
 7KH ORFDO UHVSRQGLQJ ILUH GHSDUWPHQW PXVW EH QRWLILHG SULRU WR WKH ILQDO WHVW LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK ORFDO UHTXLUHPHQWV DQG ZKHQ UHTXHVWHG SDUWLFLSDWH LQ V\VWHP WHVWLQJDQGHYDOXDWLRQ
 5(3257
$ 3UHSDUHZULWWHQUHSRUWRIILQDOWHVWUHVXOWVVLJQHGE\ZLWQHVVLQJSDUWLHV6XEPLWWRWKH (QJLQHHULQWULSOLFDWHIRUILQDODSSURYDO
(1'2)6(&7,21

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 948 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 10 00 - 1 Clearing and Grubbing
SECTION 31 10 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included:

Clear and grub the site to remove and dispose of all trash, debris, and natural growth which will interfere with new construction as shown on the Drawings and specified herein except such objects as are designated to remain or are to be removed in accordance with other sections of these specifications within designated limits of the project area. This work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain.

Strip topsoil from areas that are to be incorporated into the limit of project and storage of topsoil where it will not interfere with other work.

B. Related work:

1. Section 01 57 23: Temporary Storm Water Pollution

2. Section 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures as necessary per Section 01 57 23 and CASQA or ABAG storm water pollution prevention guidelines to prevent soil erosion and discharge of sediment laden water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and water resources.

B. Sitework Sub-Contractor shall be totally responsible to conduct inspections, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Sitework Contractor will be responsible to remove temporary erosion and sedimentation controls when site is re-stabilized and re-vegetated. Any areas disturbed during removal of temporary measures will be restored and stabilized within fourteen (14) calendar days.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 949 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 10 00 - 2 Clearing and Grubbing
A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, as selected by the contractor subject to the approval of the City of San Carlos Representative.

2.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Notify the City of San Carlos Representative of conditions which may be detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect existing utilities indicated or made known.

B. No vegetation shall be cut outside the limits of construction as determined by the grading requirements shown on the Drawings, unless approved by the City of San Carlos Representative.

C. Protection of persons and property:

1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as part of this Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

D. Use means necessary to prevent dust from becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site.

E. Maintain access to the site at all times.

F. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. If monuments need to be removed they shall be referenced by a Land Surveyor Licensed in the State of California. Same applies to property corners that are disturbed by site clearing operations.

G. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

3.3 CLEARING

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 950 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 10 00 - 3 Clearing and Grubbing
A. All stumps and root mat shall be thoroughly removed regardless of their depth and regardless of the proposed fill height. The area within the construction lines shall be cleared of all surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other objectionable obstructions resting on or protruding through the surface of the original ground not designated to be retained, unless otherwise noted.

3.4 CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL
A. After the area has been cleared of vegetation, strip the existing topsoil to the depth necessary to remove all organic material and reveal firm subsoil at the direction of the City’s Representative.

B. Topsoil to be respread shall consist of organic surficial soil reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

C. Stockpile topsoil in areas where directed by the City’s Representative. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles as required to prevent windblown dust. Install erosion control silt fence around perimeter of topsoil stockpile if there are no other measures between the stockpile and water resources.

3.5 DISPOSAL
A. General:

1. Disposal of structures, trash and debris resulting from clearing operations shall be off site. The Contractor shall submit, prior to beginning work, a plan for the satisfactory disposal of material and debris from the clearing and grubbing operations for approval of the City of San Carlos Representative. Said plan shall provide for the satisfactory disposal of perishable materials and rubbish within thirty (30) days after accumulation, unless a longer period is authorized in writing by the City of San Carlos Representative, to prevent infestation of pests.

3.6 UTILITIES
A. Coordinate with utility companies and agencies as required.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

C. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

D. Notify the City’s Representative not less than two (2) days in advance if there are any proposed utility interruptions.

E. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the City Representative’s written permission.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 951 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 1 Earthwork
SECTION 31 20 00

EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Rough Grading of site, Excavating, backfilling and grading, as required to obtain contours and elevations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Subgrade preparation for pavement areas.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 57 23 Temporary Storm Water Pollution Prevention

2. Section 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition

3. Section 31 22 19 Finish Grading

4. Section 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling

1.2 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1997.

B. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a.

C. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2000.

D. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2000.

E. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994.

F. ASTM D 2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregates; 1995.

G. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1996.

H. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1996.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 952 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 2 Earthwork
I. Project Geotechnical Report: “Geotechnical Engineering Report / San Carlos Fire Station 2 / San Carlos, Santa Clara County, CA, 95035,” prepared by Terracon Consultants, Inc., dated March 29, 2019.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: Earth excavation includes excavation of pavement and other obstructions visible on the ground surface; underground structures, utilities and other items to be demolished and removed; together with earth and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

B. Subgrade: Previously undisturbed material prepared, and compacted to required density and elevation to support a structure, or pavement system.

C. Subbase: Compacted layer of approved material used between the subgrade and the pavement.

D. Earth Excavation: Materials not otherwise defined as rock excavation including removal and disposal of pavements, visible on grade obstructions, underground structures, utilities and other items indicated to be removed.

E. Unauthorized Excavation: Includes removal and disposal of material beyond subgrade elevations, and dimensions indicated without prior approval of the City’s Representative.

F. Standard Specifications: Refers to the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), latest edition. In case of conflict between the Standard Specifications and these Specifications, the strictest Specifications shall govern.

G. Provisions for measurement and payment specified within the Standard Specifications shall be disregarded and the provisions of this Agreement shall govern.

H. Relative Compaction: Ratio, expressed as a percentage of field dry density as compacted to a maximum dry density of representative sample of the same material determined by ASTM D1557.

I. SUBMITTALS
J. Conform to the requirements in Section 5.6 of the City of San Carlos General Conditions.

K. Product Data: Provide data and test results for products and materials specified or proposed to be used.

L. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

M. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 953 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 3 Earthwork
N. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

O. Deliver samples of imported materials to City’s Representative in quantities sufficient for additional testing. Deliver at least 15 days prior to use.

P. Submit a Confined Space Emergency Plan prior to any personnel entering trenches or excavations greater than 5 feet in depth.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test reports: provide testing reports, including laboratory analysis and other information as required to demonstrate suitability of all materials used.

B. Testing and Inspection Service: engage soil testing and inspection service, for quality assurance testing during earthwork operations. Contractor shall provide compaction testing as directed by the City’s Representative, which at a minimum, shall include:

1. Contractor shall notify the City’s Representative of testing reports immediately upon completion, and shall provide certified results from the soils engineer within one week thereafter.

2. Testing shall be performed for each area of fill as defined by the City’s Representative.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials in approved location, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Do not store soil within drip line of trees indicated to remain.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Subsurface Conditions: the Contractor is responsible to determine the exact nature and extent of subgrade conditions.

1. Subgrade and geotechnical information provided by the City shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for being familiar with the character and extent of subsurface conditions that may be encountered during performance of the Work.

B. Do not use explosives.

C. The Contractor shall assess and evaluate all site conditions and layout the work before any earthwork shall begin.

1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Repair settlement at excavated areas for a period of one year following final acceptance at no additional cost to City. Remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment; restore

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 954 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 4 Earthwork
appearance, quality, and condition of surface and finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant the Work against settlement for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance, and shall repair damage caused by settlement within that time. For the purpose of this Specification, settlement will be deemed to have occurred if on paved surfaces, depressions greater than one half inch occur relative to paved surfaces outside the excavation area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fill Materials: Use only suitable fill except where sand is required. Do not use water saturated soil material or contaminated material.

1. On-site soils are considered suitable for use in engineered fill material, provided that they are at a workable moisture content and free of significant concentrations of organic materials, rubble or debris. The on-site clay soils located at an approximate depth of ten feet below existing site grades are not considered suitable for use in fill construction beneath at-grade structures, exterior slab-on-grade concrete or pavements.

2. If imported material is required for fill and backfill, the imported material must be granular soil, free of organic matter, which does not exhibit excessive shrinkage or swelling behavior when subjected to changes in water content. Imported fill shall contain no environmental contaminants or construction debris. a. Have 100 percent pass through a 3 inch sieve, 95 to 100 percent pass through a 1 inch sieve.
b. Be thoroughly compacted without excessive voids.
c. Have a maximum Plasticity Index of 15.
d. Have an Expansion Index less than 20.

B. Topsoil: Refer to Section 32 90 00 for requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Excavate by hand within drip-line of trees to remain. Do not damage trees or roots, prevent dehydration of exposed roots.

B. Surfaces to receive fill and soils to be compacted shall be free of standing water, and shall not be saturated with water.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 955 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 5 Earthwork
C. In asphalt concrete paved areas, neatly saw cut pavement 12 inches beyond the limits of excavations. If edge of pavement is located within 30 inches of limit of excavation, remove pavement to existing edge.

D. Remove existing utility lines that traverse the site as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 SITE CLEARING
A. Complete clearing and grubbing, including stripping of topsoil, as indicated on Drawings and in Section 31 10 00.

B. Scarify and compact the upper 12 inches of the exposed subgrade-to-receive-fill to 90 percent relative compaction.

3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevation shown on Drawings, notify City’s Representative who will inspect conditions. When unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and place excavated material as directed by the City’s Representative. Road base and smaller stones, rocks, etc. shall generally be used on site under paved areas and as required for engineered fill, as described in this section. Unsuitable materials are generally described as follows:

1. Areas to be planted:
a. Stones, rocks, or other deleterious materials not suitable for plant growth that are over 2” in diameter.
b. Existing Asphalt, Concrete, or road base.
c. Road base, gravel, or other material co-mingled with soil but comprising 50% or greater of the overall volume.

2. Areas to be Paved:
a. Stones, rocks, or other materials 4” or larger, or as otherwise defined in the project geotechnical report.

B. Stability of Excavations: Comply with OSHA regulations for slope requirements.

Provide shoring and bracing where required slope cannot be maintained.

C. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with pavement section shown on Contract Documents.

D. Coordinate excavation, preparation and backfill with Work of related Sections for Project Site utilities, drainage and irrigation systems.

E. Replace the excavated material or any approved supplementary import material in lifts not to exceed 8 inches in compacted thickness, moisture condition to at least two percent above the optimum moisture content, and compact each lift to a minimum 90 percent relative compaction.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 956 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 6 Earthwork
F. For areas within building pads and concrete flatwork areas, after stripping and any overexcavation, scarify exposed subgrade to a depth of at least 12”. Moisture condition to not less than the optimum moisture content, then compact to no less than 90 percent relative compaction. The upper 12-inches of fill shall be compacted to 90% relative compaction per the project geotechnical report.

G. Perform footing excavations after fill placement is complete.

3.4 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification as indicated below.

B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to no less than the following percentages of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

1. Building Slabs: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent relative compaction.

2. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent relative compaction.

3. Vehicular pavements: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent relative compaction. The upper 6 inches of pavement subgrade soils shall be compacted to at least 95 percent relative compaction.

C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

1. Remove and replace or scarify and air dry soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.

2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.

3.5 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. Place approved soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. Do not use water saturated soil material or contaminated material.

1. In excavations, use approved excavated or borrow material.

2. At planted areas, use any stockpiled topsoil, and in addition, place 6” approved imported topsoil. Roto-till into on-site topsoil or subgrade to a depth of 8”.

Compact to 85% relative density.

3. Under walks and pavements, use base material, approved excavated or borrow material, or combination of both to achieve required subgrade.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 957 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 7 Earthwork

4. Under steps, use approved subbase material.

5. Under building slabs, use approved drainage fill material.

B. Backfill excavation as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities.

3. Removal of concrete formwork, shoring and bracing: Prevent settling due to removal of materials from below structures.

4. Backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.

5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.

6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.

C. Place backfill and fill materials in uniform lifts not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures and displacement of piping and conduit.

3.6 GRADING
A. Provide smooth finished surfaces within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated on Drawings, or between such points and existing grades.

B. Grade areas outside of building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, within the following tolerances above or below required finish grade.

1. Lawn and Unpaved Areas to Receive Topsoil: 0.10 foot

2. Pavements and Walks: Line, grade and cross-section, 0.10 foot

3. Structures: 0.10 foot.

C. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification.

D. Grade fill under building slabs smooth and even, free of voids, to required elevation.

Provide final grades with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See the Section 1.5 and the General Conditions for requirements related to field inspection, quality control, and testing.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 958 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 20 00 - 8 Earthwork
B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D6938.

C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180.

D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the City.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Comply with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions.

B. Except for stripped topsoil or other material indicated to remain City property, cleared materials shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the Project site.

3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion.

Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F.

C. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.

D. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 959 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 22 19 - 1 Finish Grading
SECTION 31 22 19

FINISH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials, services and equipment indicated on Drawings and/or herein specified to complete all Landscape Grading Work.

B. Finish grading shall consist of scarifying and establishing finish grade to conform to the contours, grades, line and shapes as indicated on the Drawings, and insuring that all landscape areas are uniformly graded to an outlet.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Subgrade: Surfaces upon which additional specified materials are to be placed, prepared or constructed.

B. Rough grade: The establishment of grades to one-tenth (1/10) foot plus or minus tolerance of grades required to accomplish the Work described in other documents and drawings.

C. Finish grade: The establishment of grades to a plus or minus tolerance of final grades as indicated on Drawings. Tolerances are specified in applicable documents of the specifications (i.e. Planting, Pedestrian Concrete, Decomposed Granite, etc.)
D. Grading intent: Spot elevations (grades) and contours are indicated based on the best available data. Drawings are referenced to provide additional site grading data. The intent is to maintain constant slopes between spot elevations. If a spot elevation is determined to be in error, or the difference in elevation between points change, contact the City's Representative immediately for field adjustments of spot elevations.

1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Contractor is responsible to contact Underground Service Alert (USA North) at 811 and mark the location of all existing utilities before commencing Work.

B. Refer to the Drawings for information on proposed site utilities and their locations.

C. Retain and protect in operating condition all active utilities traversing the site designated to remain.

D. Where existing utilities not indicated on the Drawings are encountered, support, shore up, protect same and immediately contact the City's Representative for continuance and/or relocation of such services.

1.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ADJACENT PROPERTIES A. Use all means necessary to protect existing conditions designated to remain, newly constructed conditions and adjacent properties. Avoid any encroachment on adjacent properties.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 960 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 22 19 - 2 Finish Grading
B. Prevent damage to existing benchmarks, pavement and utility lines. In the event of damage or loss, immediately make all repairs and replacements required to the satisfaction of the City's Representative and at no additional cost to the City.

1.5 EXISTING TREES
A. The Contractor shall protect the tops, trunks and roots of all existing trees on/or near the project site that are designated to remain.

B. Do not permit the parking of vehicles, or storage of materials or equipment under the dripline of existing trees.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Finish grades shall conform to contours, grades, lines and shapes, as indicated on Drawings, with uniform slopes between finish grades or between finish grades and existing grades.

B. Establish finish landscape grades in a continuous, uniform line, resulting in a uniform surface with positive drainage and without ridges or water pockets.

C. Finish landscape grade tolerance shall be .04 feet plus or minus of final grades indicated on Drawings.

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall be responsible for bringing rough grades into conformity with finish grades as indicated on the plans. Comply with tolerances specified in this document and as specified in applicable documents of the specifications (i.e. concrete, asphalt, planting, etc.).

B. Conduct work in an orderly manner. Dirt shall not be permitted to accumulate on streets or sidewalks or washed into storm drains.

C. Use all means required to prevent the erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as proposed hard surfaces and landscaping have been constructed.

3.2 LAYOUT
A. Maintain all bench marks, control monuments and stakes. Protect from damage and dislocation.

B. If any discrepancies are found by the surveyor between the Drawings and actual site conditions, the City's Representative reserves the right to make minor adjustment in Work Specified as necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents without increased cost to the City.

3.3 FINISH LANDSCAPE GRADING

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 961 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 22 19 - 3 Finish Grading
A. Scarify or rototill to a 6” depth all planting areas prior to finish grade operations and work until uniform and free from large clods larger than one (1) inch in greatest dimension.

B. Finish grade shall conform, after compaction, to shapes, spot elevations and contours as indicated on Drawings, with uniform levels or slopes between finish elevations or between finish elevations and existing elevations.

C. Soil amendment and preparation shall comply with Section 32 90 00 Planting.

D. Spread excess soil material excavated from plant pits to establish subgrades in surrounding planting areas.

E. Top six (6) inches of all areas to be planted shall be free of stones, stumps or other deleterious matter one (1) inch in greatest dimension.

F. Compact soil in planting areas to 85% relative compaction in accordance with ASTM D1557-78.

G. Fine grade all planting areas to a smooth, loose and uniform surface. Eliminate uneven areas, ridges and depressions.

H. Shrub/ground cover planting areas shall be graded two and one-half (3-1/2) inches below adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, mow bands, drains, etc. in order to receive three (3) inch depth of mulch, establishing final grade one-half (1/2) inches below these surfaces.

I. Minor excess soil may be incorporated into planting areas to form minor berms not exceeding slopes of 12:1 without prior approval. Dispose of any unacceptable materials or excess soil legally at an offsite location at no additional expense to the owner.

3.4 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
A. Normal progress observations shall be requested by the Contractor from the City’s Representative as per observations listed in Sections: 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation, and 32 90 00 Planting.

3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all trash, excess soil, or rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condition throughout the site.

B. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom-clean and shall wash down all paved areas within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition acceptable to the City's Representative.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 962 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 1 Trenching and Backfilling
SECTION 31 23 33

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Trench, backfill, and compact as specified herein and as needed for installation of underground utilities associated with the Work.

B. Related work:

1. Section 01 57 23: Temporary Storm Water Pollution Control

2. Section 02 41 13: Selective Site Demolition

3. Section 31 10 00: Earthwork

4. Section 31 22 19: Finish Grading

5. Section 33 41 00: Storm Utility Drainage Piping
C. References:

1. California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, current Edition

2. City of San Carlos Standard Specifications, Current Edition

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work of this Section in accordance with the established schedule.

C. Comply with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with City of San Carlos General Conditions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Per Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 963 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 2 Trenching and Backfilling
A. Backfill materials:

1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, containing no rocks or lumps over 3 inches in greatest dimension, and with not more than 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 3 inches in their greatest dimension.

2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the City’s Representative, and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly non-expansive soil free from organics and other deleterious matter.

3. Do not permit materials having a dimension greater than 1 inch in the first 12 inches of fill.

4. Cohesionless material used for backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other foreign matter, and as approved by the City’s Representative.

Cohensionless material is used for backfill, it must be separated form surrounding subgrade by a non-woven geotextile fabric equivalent to Mirafi 140N.

5. Where aggregate backfill is called for provide aggregate complying with requirements in Section 19-3 of the California Department of Transportation Standard Specification, current Edition.

2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Subcontractor subject to the approval of the City’s Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES
A. Comply with City of San Carlos General Conditions.

3.3 PROCEDURES
A. Utilities:

1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the drawings or otherwise made known to the Subcontractor prior to trenching. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the City.

2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Subcontractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 964 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 3 Trenching and Backfilling

3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the City.

4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Section, immediately notify the City’s Representative and proceed as instructed.

5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are received from the City’s Representative.

6. Notify the City’s Representative not less than two days in advance if there are any proposed utility interruptions.

7. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the City Representative’s written permission.

B. Protection of persons and property:

1. Barricade and maintain protection in open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

C. Dewatering:

1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved methods.

2. Keep trenches and site construction area free from water.

D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site.

E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times.

3.4 TRENCHING
A. Provide sheeting and shoring necessary for protection of the Work and for the safety of personnel.

1. Prior to backfilling, remove all sheeting.

2. Do not permit sheeting to remain in the trenches except when, in the opinion of the City’s Representative, field conditions or the type of sheeting or methods of construction such as use of concrete bedding are such as to make removal of

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 965 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 4 Trenching and Backfilling
sheeting impracticable. In such cases, the City’s Representative may permit portions of sheeting to be cut off and remain in the trench.

B. Open cut:

1. Excavate for utilities by open cut.

2. If conditions at the site prevent such open cut, and if approved by the City’s Representative, tunneling may be used.

3. Short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the City’s Representative, the conductor can be installed safely and backfill can be compacted properly into such tunnel.

4. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the limits of normal excavation lines in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill the voids remaining after removal of the objects as directed by the City’s Representative.

5. When the void is below the subgrade for the utility bedding, use suitable earth materials and compact to the relative density as directed by the City’s Representative.

6. When the void is in the side of the utility trench or open cut, use suitable earth or sand compacted or consolidated as directed by the City’s Representative.

7. Remove boulders and other interfering objects, and backfill voids left by such removals, at no additional cost to the City’s Representative.

8. Excavating for appurtenances:
a. Excavate for maintenance holes and similar structures to a distance sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear between outer surfaces and the embankment or shoring that may be used to hold and protect the banks. b. Over-depth excavation beyond such appurtenances that has not been directed will be considered unauthorized. Fill with sand, gravel, or lean concrete as directed by the City’s Representative, and at no additional cost to the City.

C. Trench to the minimum width necessary for proper installation of the utility, with sides as nearly vertical as possible. Accurately grade the bottom to provide uniform bearing for the utility.

D. Where trenching occurs in existing lawns, remove turf in sections and keep damp.

Replace turf upon completion of the backfilling.

E. Cover:

1. Provide minimum trench depth indicated below to maintain a minimum cover over the top of the installed item below the finish grade:
a. Areas subject to vehicular traffic:
i. Sanitary sewers: 36";

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 966 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 5 Trenching and Backfilling
ii. Storm drains: 24".
b. Areas not subject to vehicular traffic:
i. Sanitary sewers: 30";
ii. Storm drains: 24”, unless noted otherwise.
c. All areas:
i. Water lines: 30";
ii. Natural gas lines: 30";
iii. Electrical cables: 42";
iv. Electrical ducts: 36".
d. Concrete encased:
i. Pipe sleeves for water and gas lines: 24";
ii. Sanitary sewers and storm drains: 12";
iii. Electrical ducts: 24".

2. Where utilities are under a concrete structure slab or pavement, the minimum depth need only be sufficient to completely encase the conduit or pipe sleeve, and electrical long-radius rigid metal conduit riser, provided it will not interfere with the structural integrity of the slab or pavement.

3. Where the minimum cover is not provided, encase the pipes in concrete to 6 inches from outside diameter. Fill void between outside wall of utility and concrete with fine sand or other material approved by the City’s Representative.

Provide concrete with a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 3500 psi. Place warning tape on top of concrete cap longitudinally with the buried utility.

3.5 BEDDING
A. Provide bedding as indicated on the Drawings.

3.6 BACKFILLING
A. General:

1. Do not completely backfill trenches until required pressure and leakage tests have been performed, and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified in the pertinent Sections of these Specifications.

2. Except as otherwise specified or directed for special conditions, backfill trenches to the ground surface with selected material approved by the City’s Representative.

3. Reopen trenches which have been improperly backfilled, to a depth as required for proper compaction. Refill and compact as specified, or otherwise correct to the approval of the City’s Representative.

4. Do not allow or cause any of the Work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of this Section prior to required inspections, tests, and approvals.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 967 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 6 Trenching and Backfilling

5. Should any of the Work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such Work and, after approvals have been made, refill and compact as specified, all at no additional cost to the City of San Carlos.

B. Lower portion of trench:

1. Deposit approved backfill and bedding material in layers of 6 inch maximum thickness, and compact with suitable tampers to the density specified in Sections 31 20 00, to achieve suitable bedding (shading) of pipe.

2. Take special care in backfilling and bedding operations to not damage pipe.

C. Remainder of trench:

1. Except for special materials for pavements, backfill the remainder of the trench with material free from stones larger than 3 inches or 1/2 the layered thickness, whichever is smaller, in any dimension.

2. Deposit backfill material in layers not exceeding the thickness specified in Section 31 20 00.

3.7 COMPACTION
A. Compact each 6 inch layer of backfill material as specified in Section 31 20 00.

B. Adjacent to buildings: Mechanically compact backfill within ten feet of buildings.

C. Consolidation of backfill by jetting with water may be permitted, when specifically approved by the City’s Representative, in areas other than building and pavement areas.

3.8 TEST FOR DISPLACEMENT OF STORM AND SANITARY SEWERS
A. Check sewers and storm drains to determine whether displacement has occurred after the trench has been backfilled to above the pipe and has been compacted as specified.

B. Flash a light between maintenance holes or, if the maintenance holes have not yet been constructed, between the locations of the maintenance holes, by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror.

C. If the illuminated interior of the pipe line shows poor alignment, displaced pipes, or any other defects, correct the defects to the specified conditions and at no additional cost to the City.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The City’s Representative will inspect and approve open cuts and trenches before installation of utilities, and will make the following tests:

1. Assure that trenches are not backfilled until all tests have been completed.

2. Check backfilling for proper layer thickness and compaction.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 968 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
31 23 33 - 7 Trenching and Backfilling

3. Verify that compaction test results conform to the specified requirements, and that at each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one (1) test for each 200 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two (2) tests are performed.

4. Assure that defective work is removed and properly replaced.

B. The City’s Representative will inspect all storm and sanitary sewers for displacement after completion of grading work in the immediate area.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 969 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 11 23 - 1 Aggregate Base Courses
SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Aggregate base courses.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 32 13 13 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

2. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the SandCone Method.

3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (6,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

4. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.

5. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

6. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

C. Caltrans Standard Specifications:

1. Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation, CALTRANS, latest edition.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide source and gradation from current testing (less than four months from date submitted).

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 970 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 11 23 - 2 Aggregate Base Courses
B. from single source throughout the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Coarse Aggregate Fill Type Class II: per Caltrans Standard Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify substrate is dry and has been inspected and verify gradients and elevations are correct.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting.

B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.3 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT
A. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to the total compacted thickness as shown on the plans.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 971 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 12 16 - 1 Asphalt Paving
SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Asphaltic concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course.

2. Surface sealer.

3. Aggregate subbase course.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Asphalt Institute:

1. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- Mix Types.

2. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.

2. ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.

C. Caltrans Standard Specifications:

1. Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation, CALTRANS, latest edition.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Paving: Designed in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product information and mix design.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

B. Mixing Plant: Conform to Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 972 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 12 16 - 2 Asphalt Paving

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

B. Aggregate for Base Course Mix: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

C. Aggregate for Wearing Course Mix: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

D. Tack Coat: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications.

E. Slurry Seal: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 37-3.

F. Aggregate for Slurry Seal: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 37-3.

2.2 ASPHALT PAVING MIX
A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

B. Base Course: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

C. Wearing Course: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify compacted subgrade subbase is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

D. Verify gutter drainage grilles and frames, manhole frames, and are installed in correct position and elevation.

3.2 SUBBASE

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 973 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 12 16 - 3 Asphalt Paving
A. Prepare subbase in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

3.3 PREPARATION – SURFACE
A. Clean surface free of dirt, water, and debris.

B. Fill cracks greater than 1/8 inch.

C. Correct areas of subgrade failure.

3.4 PREPARATION - PRIMER
A. Apply primer in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

3.5 PREPARATION - TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications.

3.6 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE
A. Install Work in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.

B. Place asphalt within twenty-four hours of applying primer or tack coat.

C. Place asphalt wearing course as shown.

D. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

E. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

3.7 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE
A. Place wearing course within twenty-four hours of placing and compacting binder course. When binder course is placed more than twenty-four hours before placing wearing course, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course.

B. Compact each course by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

C. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.

3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

C. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 974 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 12 16 - 4 Asphalt Paving
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 48 hours or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 975 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete
SECTION 32 13 13

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes site concrete, including but not limited to pavements, walls, footings and sub slabs.

B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services to complete the work as indicated on the drawings, and in accordance with these specifications. Work includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Concrete formwork

2. Concrete reinforcement

3. Cast-in-place concrete items:

4. Concrete paving, sidewalks, ramps, pads, curbs, mow bands, etc.

5. Miscellaneous concrete.

6. All imbeds including anchor bolts, tiedowns, hold downs with bolts, straps, and sleeves.

C. Related Sections

1. Section 12 93 00 Site Furnishings

2. Section 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Caltrans Standard Specifications - Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), latest edition.

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
C. ACI - American Concrete Institute, Manual of Concrete Practice.

D. CBC – California Building Code

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Percent Compaction: ASTM D1557, percentage as shown on the Drawings of the maximum in-place dry density of the same material.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 976 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 2 Cast-In-Place Concrete
A. Conform to the requirements Section 5.6 of the General Conditions.

B. Shop Drawings for Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures.

C. Concrete Design Mixes:

1. The preparation of design mixes will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Mix designs may be prepared by the supplier and shall be certified by a Civil Engineer registered in California. Mix designs will be designed by the supplier and approved by the City’s Representative.

2. Written reports will be submitted to the City’s Representative of each proposed mix for review. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the City’s Representative.

3. Adjustment of Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results and other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the City and as accepted by the City’s Representative. Provide submittals as in A above. Submit adjustment designs a minimum of 48 hours ahead of schedule for concrete production.

D. Product Data: Manufacturers' current catalog cuts and specifications for the following:

1. Expansion joint filler, sealant, backer rod and bond breaker, including manufacturer’s standard color chart for sealant

2. Air-entrainment.

3. Curing Compound.

4. Fly Ash or Slag

5. MDO plywood made for forming
E. Samples:

1. MDO plywood made for forming, one 6”x 6” piece
F. Certificates:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Certificate of compliance

2. Concrete Mix Design: Ticket for each batch delivered showing the following: Mix identification, weight of cement, aggregate, water, and admixtures, aggregate sizes/proportion, and air entrainment.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 977 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 3 Cast-In-Place Concrete
A. Comply with American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-615 "Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," and "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," publication American Concrete Institute (ACI) 315-65 of the American Concrete Institute.

B. Comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in ACI, "Recommended Practice of Concrete Formwork, ACI-347", and Section 2606, 1997 California Building Code (CBC).

C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions indicated on Drawings, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finish. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

D. Provide complete forms of such strength and construction as to prevent any spread, shifting, or settling when concrete is deposited, and tight enough to avoid any leakage or washing out of cement mortar.

E. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen concrete finishers.

F. Conform to Section 90 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

G. The Contractor shall contact City’s Representative of any discrepancies between field conditions and plans prior to proceeding with Work. The written dimension on Drawings shall supersede the graphic presentation. Dimensions are from back of curb, center line, base lines or as noted on the plans. All field adjustments must be approved by City’s Representative prior to installation.

H. All walks and curbs shall be established in the field for review and approval prior to concrete pours. The Contractor shall layout the area or form work for review by City’s Representative. If approval is not obtained, the Contractor is responsible for removal of any unauthorized field adjustments.

I. Transitions of curves to other curves, and curves to straight line tangents, shall be smooth and continuous.

J. Place expansion joint and score joints as shown on plan. Adjustments in the field shall be made only with the approval of City’s Representative.

K. Where new concrete paving is placed adjacent to curbs or existing concrete paving, a construction joint (cold joint) shall be provided between the new concrete paving and curbs or existing concrete paving.

L. Sleeving shall be coordinated with concrete work. Refer to plans for sleeving locations.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 978 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 4 Cast-In-Place Concrete
M. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing, at no additional cost to City, any disturbed existing landscape designated to remain which resulted from construction of this project.

N. Some materials may require a several week order lead time. Contractor is responsible for determining any and all ordering lead times, and providing required materials at the project site in a timely manner. No unapproved substitutions will be allowed.

Contact City’s Representative immediately if a specified material is not available.

O. Mock-ups:

1. One 4 foot square mock up for all poured in place finishes, including concrete paving and vertical walls, as shown on the drawings. Mock-ups shall also include finish, jointing, thickness, and edging.

2. Mock-ups shall be reviewed and approved by the City’s Representative prior to commencing full work. Approved mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality for judging the acceptance of paving on the Project and if approved, may remain as part of the finished work.

P. Lines and Levels: To be established by a licensed Surveyor or registered Civil Engineer.

Q. Mix Standards: Conform to the ACI Manual and the Portland Cement Association's "Design and Control of Concrete Mixes".

R. Design of Concrete Mix: Employ approved commercial testing laboratory to design concrete mixes as follows:

Item
Minimum
Cement
Content
28-Day
Minimum
Strength
Maximu
m
Slump
Aggregate
Size
Maximum
Water /
Cement
Ratio
Curbs and
Footings 517 lb/cu. yd 3,000 PSI 4 in. ¾ in 0.55
Exterior
Walkways 517 lb/cu. yd 3,000 PSI 4 in. ¾ in 0.45
Walls and
Paving 564 lb/cu yd. 4,000 PSI 4 in. ¾ in 0.45
S. Fly Ash:

1. Source Control: The following sources of ash are not to be used:
a. Ash from a peaking plant instead of a base loaded plant. b. Ash from plants burning different coals or blends of coal. c. Ash from plants burning other fuels (wood chips, tires, trash) blended with coal.
d. Ash from plants using oil as a supplementary fuel.
e. Ash from plants using precipitator additives, such as ammonia. f. Ash from start-up or shut-down phases of operation.
g. Ash from plants not operating at a "steady state."
h. Ash that is handled and stored using a wet system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 979 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 5 Cast-In-Place Concrete

2. Fly ash used in concrete should be as consistent and uniform as possible. Fly ash to be used in concrete should be monitored by a quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) program that complies with the recommended procedures in ASTM C311.(6) These procedures establish standards for methods of sampling and frequency of performing tests for fineness, loss on ignition (LOI), specific gravity, and pozzolanic activity such that the consistency of a fly ash source can be certified.

1.6 QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER
A. Installer shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, and shall be completely familiar with the products and their installation as specified on the Drawings and in this Section. Installer shall be present at all times during progress of Work of this Section and shall direct all Work performed.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivered Mixes: Coordinate delivery so that mixes may be immediately poured upon arrival at site.

B. Components and Accessories:

1. Fittings and Reinforcements: Protect from rust, soil and oil contamination at all times. Store on pallets above ground.

2. Templates: Protect from damage. Test accuracy prior to each use.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordination: Coordinate all items of other trades to be furnished and set in place.

Coordinate proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete and for the provision of holes, openings, etc., necessary to the execution of the work of the trades in ample time that progress of the work is not delayed.

1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

B. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 980 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 6 Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray form, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.

Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Secure all pipe sleeves, anchors and bolts, including those for angle frames, inserts, ties and other materials in connection with concrete construction, in position before concrete is placed.

B. Obtain information and instructions from other Trades and suppliers in ample time to schedule and coordinate the installation of items furnished by them to be embedded in concrete so provisions for their work can be made without delaying the project.

1.11 FORM CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Set form to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of Work so that forms can remain in place for twenty-four hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

C. Top of forms not more than one-eighth inch in ten feet vertical elevation.

D. Vertical face on longitudinal axis not more than one-fourth inch in ten feet horizontal width.

E. Circular or curved formwork shall be continuous, complete radii as indicated on Drawings. No straight segments in circular/curved formwork shall be accepted.

1.12 TESTS AND OBSERVATIONS
A. The following tests shall be made by a testing laboratory or by a certified Special Inspector as approved by the City. Costs for testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

Special inspections for Concrete Construction shall be in accordance with Section 1704.4 and Table 1704.4 of the 2010 CBC and as noted below:

1. Compaction testing of aggregate base, one test for each area of work, or as determined by the City’s Inspector.

2. Periodic Inspection of reinforcing steel and placement.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 981 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 7 Cast-In-Place Concrete

3. Cement: Mill analysis and test reports by supplier certifying cement conforms to Specifications is acceptable in lieu of tests at the discretion of City’s Representative.

4. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with testing laboratory.

5. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work.

6. Concrete Inspections:
a. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. b. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures.

7. Strength Test Samples:
a. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172.
b. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31, cylinder specimens.

8. Concrete cylinders: Make and cure in accordance with ASTM C31. a. Record shall be made of the time cylinders were made and of locations of concrete from which the cylinders were taken.
b. Three identical cylinders shall be taken from each pour of 25 cubic yards or part thereof, being placed each day.
c. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 5 sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 5 batches are used.
d. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field cure.

9. Field Testing:
a. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143.
b. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173.
c. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064.
d. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete sample.
e. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength concrete sample.

10. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing:
a. Test Method: ASTM C39.
b. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318.
c. Test one cylinder at 7 days.
d. Test two cylinders at 28 days.

11. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.

12. Should tests show that concrete is below specified strength; the Contractor shall remove all such concrete. Full cost of removal of inferior concrete, its replacement with concrete of proper specified strength and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.13 CODES AND STANDARDS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 982 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 8 Cast-In-Place Concrete
A. ACI 301 "Structural Concrete for Building"
B. ACE 305 “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting” C. ACI 306 “Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting”.

D. ACI 308 “Curing Concrete”
E. ACI 309 “Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete” F. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".

G. ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”.

H. ACI 605 “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting”.

I. ACI 614 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, and Placing Concrete".

J. ASTM C31 “Practices for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field”.

K. ASTM C33-86 "Specifications for Concrete Aggregate".

L. ASTM C94-89 "Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete".

M. ASTM C143 “Test Method for Slump Portland Cement Concrete”.

N. ASTM C150 “Portland Cement”.

O. ASTM C309 “Specifications for Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds for Curing Concrete”.

P. Western Concrete Reinforce Steel Institute (WCRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice".

Q. California Building Code (CBC), latest edition.

R. Section 90 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

S. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed Billet Steel Bars, ASTM A-615, Grade 40 or 60, containing a minimum of 70% total recycled content, clean and free from rust, scale, or coating that will reduce bond.

B. Smooth Dowels for Joints: ASTM A615, Grade 40 smooth, billet-steel bars, shop painted with iron-oxide zinc-chromate primer.

C. Welded Wire Mesh: ASTM A-185 plain type and uncoated finish.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 983 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 9 Cast-In-Place Concrete

2.2 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Mix:

1. Ready-mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94 and with aggregates comply with ASTM C-33 and Portland Cement ASTM C-150, Type II.

2. All mixes shall conform to applicable building code requirements listed herein or on the Drawings. All mix designs shall be submitted to the City’s Representative for approval before being used. Mix design shall show proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, and water and graduation of combined aggregates.

Calcium chloride shall not be added at any mix.

3. Concrete shall be Class B per Caltrans Standards.

4. Cement: All cement shall be Portland cement Type II, and shall be the product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 degrees Fahrenheit.

5. Aggregates
a. Coarse aggregate shall have a minimum cleanliness value of 75. b. Fine aggregate shall have a minimum of sand equivalent of 75. c. Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregates may be used.

6. Water: All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter.

7. Admixture: No admixture of any type shall be used without prior approval of the City’s Representative.

8. Concrete shall be as specified: Class B
a. 28-Day Minimum Strength: Refer to Table in Paragraph 1.5(R) above b. Concrete slump: Refer to Table in Paragraph 1.5(R) above c. Air Content: No air entrainment
B. Fly Ash: Pozzolanic admixtures, conforming to ASTM C618, Class C, with weight loss of ignition limited to not exceed 3 percent shall be used in mix designs to replace Portland Cement up to 15% by weight, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

1. Reference: ACI 211.4R-93.

C. Aggregate base for on-grade slabs:

1. As specified in the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Department of Transportation, Section 26, for “Class 2”
D. Water: Clean, potable (domestic) free from injurious amounts of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials or other deleterious matter. Available from source determined by City’s Representative.

E. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

F. Admixtures: Admixtures containing chlorides are not permitted. All admixtures shall be mixed in accordance with manufacture’s written recommendations.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 984 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 10 Cast-In-Place Concrete

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Tie Wires: Black annealed, ASTM A-82, minimum 16 gauge.

B. Chains, Bolsters, Bar supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete.

C. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A-82.

D. Snap Ties: Snap-off metal of fixed length capable of leaving no metal within one and one-half (1 1/2) inches of surface nor causing fractures, spall or other defects larger than one (1) inch in diameter.

E. Expansion Joint Materials:

1. Premolded Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, non-extruding and bituminous type resilient filler, compatible with sealant, and having a "guide strip" removable depth gauge.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C290, non-snag sealant "Dynatred" by Pecora Corporation, [214] 278-8158 or "Sonolastic Sealant Two-Part" by Sonneborn, [415] 889-9899, or equal.
a. Color shall be selected by the City’s Representative from the manufacturer’s full color selection.

3. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

F. Forms:

1. Steel or wood of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal.

2. Use forms that are straight and free of distortions and defects.

3. Use flexible spring forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.

G. Form Release Agent: Colorless non-staining, free from oils. Chemical agent shall not impair bonding of paint or other proposed coatings.

H. Form-Facing Materials:

1. All Surfaces: of sufficient strength to hold concrete properly in place and prevent leakage of water from forms.

2. Exposed Surfaces: Matte finish, coated, medium density overlay plywood made for forming. No wood-textured finish will be permitted on exposed concrete unless specified as such.

I. Wood Headers:

1. Wood: Construction Heart grade rough Redwood header and stake or pressuretreated rough Douglas Fir stake.

2. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 985 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 11 Cast-In-Place Concrete
J. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I-D, Class A. (omit where surface retardants are specified)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that subgrade preparation for concrete paving has been completed prior to commencement of work.

B. Surface Drainage:

1. Report in writing conflicts discovered on the site or prior work, which would prevent positive drainage. Correct prior to performing concrete work.

2. Do not permit finished paving surfaces to vary more than 1/4 in. measured with a 10 ft. metal straightedge, except at grade changes. No "birdbaths" or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Properly correct irregularities.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Templates: Use templates for all anchor plates, bolts, inserts and other items embedded in concrete. Accurately secure so that they will not be displaced during placing of concrete.

B. Piping and Conduit: Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. Locate conduit to maintain strength of structures at maximum. Verify size, length and location of electrical conduit.

C. Aggregate Base Course: Compact base course to thicknesses and relative compaction shown on Drawings.

3.3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
A. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with ACI-315, providing a minimum concrete cover of three inches or as specified in UBC, latest edition.

B. Place all reinforcement in the exact position shown on the Drawings and secure in position during the placing and compacting of concrete. Wire bars together with No.16 gauge wire with ties at all intersections except where spacing is less than twelve inches in each direction, in which case tie alternate intersections.

C. Place all sleeves, inserts, anchors and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support prior to concreting. Fill voids in embedded items temporarily with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete.

D. Give all contractors and subcontractors whose work is related to concrete or supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before concrete placement.

E. Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the Shop Drawings and the original design.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 986 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 12 Cast-In-Place Concrete
F. Verify score joints in sidewalk slabs are constructed at 5-foot maximum intervals.

G. Bending:

1. Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the reviewed Shop Drawings.

2. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not indicated on the Drawings or on the reviewed Shop Drawings.

3. Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material.

4. Bend all bars cold.

5. Make all bends for other bars, including hooks, around a pin having diameter not less than six times the minimum thickness of the bar for number 8 and smaller and eight times the thickness for number 9 and larger.

H. Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by concrete blocks, metal chairs or spacer, or by metal hangers.

I. Clearance:

1. Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one time the normal diameter of round bars.

2. In no case let the clear distance be less than 1 inch or less than 1-1/3 times the maximum size of aggregate.

3. Provide the following minimum concrete covering of reinforcement:

4. Concrete below ground deposited against forms: 3 inches.

5. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 inches.

6. Concrete elsewhere: as indicated on Drawings.

J. Splicing:

1. Horizontal bars:

2. Place bars in horizontal members with minimum laps at splices sufficient to develop the strength of the bars. Splice 40 bar diameters minimum.

3. Bars may be wired together at laps.

4. Wherever possible, stagger the splices of adjacent bars.

5. Wire fabric: Make all splices in wire fabric at least 1-1/2 meshes wide.

6. Other splices: Make only those other splices that are indicated on the approved Shop Drawings or specifically approved by City’s Representative.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 987 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 13 Cast-In-Place Concrete
K. Dowels/Anchor Bolts: Place all required steel dowels/anchor bolts and securely anchor them into position before the concrete is placed. Bending the dowels after placement of concrete will not be permitted.

L. Obstruction: In the event conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, or any other items interfere with placing reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings, or as otherwise required, immediately consult City’s Representative and obtain review of new procedure before placing concrete.

3.4 CONCRETE FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete.

B. Contractor assumes full responsibility in the removal of forms. The length of time forms must remain in place depends on the rate of time required for concrete to obtain a proper strength. Remove forms after the concrete is sufficiently hard to prevent damage to concrete.

C. Circular or curved formwork shall be continuous, complete radii as indicated on Drawings. No straight segments in circular/curved formwork shall be accepted.

D. Reuse of Forms:

1. Do not reuse forms if there is any evidence of surface wear or defect which would impair quality of surface.

2. Thoroughly clean and properly coat forms before reuse.

3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Notification: Notify the City’s Representative at least 48 hours before placing concrete.

B. Placing Concrete:

1. Unless otherwise indicated or required by the Drawings, concrete paving shall be placed on compacted subgrade to thicknesses indicated on the Drawings to 95 percent compaction.

2. Place concrete in accordance with ACI-304 and Section 2605 of the California Building Code. Immediately after depositing, compact concrete thoroughly by mechanical vibration. No vibrating of form is allowed. Mixing shall be continuous, with no interruptions from the time the truck is filled until the time it is emptied. Concrete shall be placed within one and a half hours from the time water is first added.

3. Insure anchors, seats, plates, and other items to be cast into concrete are placed, held securely and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

4. Insure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, etc. are not disturbed during concrete placement.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 988 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete

5. Pour concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

6. Lines and Grades: Elevations requiring accurate placement shall be set by a competent instrument man, using a professional type instrument.

7. For all concrete placed on soil, the subgrade shall be wet and compacted prior to placing.

8. Before placing concrete mixing, conveying and finishing equipment, forms and reinforcing shall be well-cleaned. Wet form before placing concrete, unless oiled forms are used.

3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, from excessively hot or cold temperatures, and from mechanical injury. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for a period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. In hot, dry and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation – control material. Apply according to manufacturer’s instruction.

B. As soon as building flat work has hardened sufficiently to prevent injury to finish, apply an approved concrete curing agent in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

C. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days.

D. Excessive cracking as determined by the City’s Representative which is aesthetically unacceptable or which will result in premature disintegration of paving shall result in replacement of concrete.

E. Removal of Forms: Remove no sooner than at seven days after each pour.

F. Conform to all applicable requirements for curing and protection of concrete, Sections 90-7 and 90-8 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

G. Spraying: Spray concrete during the curing period as frequently as drying conditions may require.

H. Curing: Cure concrete in accordance with the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. During curing period, maintain concrete above 70 degrees F. for at least 3 days or above 50 degrees F. for at least 5 days.

I. Damage and Defacement: Protect all concrete work against damage and defacement during subsequent construction operations until final acceptance.

3.7 CLEANING AND PATCHING
A. Removal: Remove all projecting fins, bolts, wire, nails, etc., not necessary for the work, or cut them back 1 in. from the surface and patch in an inconspicuous manner.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 989 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 15 Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Snap Ties: Immediately after removal of forms, cut off snap ties extending from the face of concrete to at least 1 in. deep in the concrete. Fill or plug as detailed in Drawings.

C. Voids: Fill holes with a 1:3 cement/sand mortar with the same color as the adjoining concrete. Mix and place the mortar as dry as possible and finish flush with the adjacent surface.

D. Corrective Patching: Correct all defects in concrete work. Chip all voids to a depth of at least 1 in. with the edges perpendicular to the surface and parallel to form markings. Fill all voids, surface irregularities, or honeycombing by patching or rubbing. Ensure that all concrete surfaces so repaired duplicate the appearance of the unpatched work.

E. Finishing: Work finish surface texture as specified below.

3.8 FINISHES
A. Light Broom Finish:

1. Floating: Float surface once it has sufficiently stiffened. Check planeness of surface with a 10 ft. straightedge in all directions. Cut down high spots and fill lows.

Immediately refloat to a uniform non-directional sandy texture.

2. Obtain by drawing a stiff bristled broom across a floated finish.

3. Direction of brooming to be perpendicular to direction of paving.

3.9 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints:

1. Locate and install joints as indicated on the Drawings so they do not impair strength or appearance of slab.

2. All joints and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression.

B. Score Joints:

1. Locate and install joints as indicated on the Drawings so they do not impair strength or appearance of slab.

2. Score joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete using a jointer to cut the groove so that a smooth uniform impression is obtained. All joints shall be struck before and after sandblast.

3. Locate and form joints with 1/4 inch radius edges and 1 inch to 1-1/4 inch deep score at the location as shown on the Drawings.

4. All joints and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression.

C. Expansion Joints:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 990 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 13 13 - 16 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1. Locate and install joints as indicated on the Drawings so they do not impair strength or appearance of slab.

2. Expansion joints shall be provided at the location and 40-foot maximum intervals as shown on the plans, and at all locations where concrete paving abuts buildings, curbs or other proposed or existing structures. Install as per detail on the Drawings.

3. All joints and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression.

4. Install backer-rod and joint sealant as indicated on the Drawings.

5. Sealing of Expansion Joints: After the curing period, strip out all depth gauge strips and carefully clean expansion joints. Fill with joint compound as shown on Drawings. Avoid spilling compound on paved surfaces or overflowing from joint.

6. Protect expansion joints from damage until placement of filler or caulk.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Samples: Contractor shall coordinate with the City to select a qualified testing laboratory to take samples for testing during the course of the work as described in the General Conditions.

B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by a qualified testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318 and shall conform to the General Conditions.

C. Cost of Testing: Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with testing.

D. Rejected Materials: Remove off the site all concrete below specified strength.

E. Cost of Removal and Retesting: Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with removal and costs associated with retesting.

F. Defective Work: Remove in its entirety and replace all defective concrete work which after corrective patching, rubbing, etc., fails to duplicate the appearance of unpatched work and/or conform to the standards set forth in these Specifications.

G. Observe formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to see that there are no deviations from desired elevation, alignment, plumbness or camber.

H. If during construction any weakness develops and falsework shows undue settlement or discoloration, stop work, remove affected construction if permanently damaged, and strengthen falsework.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 991 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 14 13 - 1 Pavers
SECTION 32 14 13
PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work consists of furnishing and construction of an Interlocking Concrete Pavement System in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, design, and dimensions shown on the plans.

B. Installation work includes:

Verifying Subgrade is to the lines, grades and density shown on the construction drawings;
Furnishing and installing Geotextile (where required), Base Course, Bedding Course, Edge Restraint, Pavers and Joint Filling Sand to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
B. Section 31 22 19 Finish Grading
C. Section 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling
D. Section 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses
E. Section 32 13 13 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM C-33 Concrete Aggregates

2. ASTM C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete

3. ASTM C-131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Sized Course Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

4. ASTM C-136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Grained Aggregates

5. ASTM C-140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units

6. ASTM C-144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

7. ASTM C-936 Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units

8. ASTM C-979 Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 992 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 14 13 - 2 Pavers

9. ASTM C-1645 Freeze-thaw and De-icing Salt Durability of Solid Interlocking Paving Units

10. ASTM D-698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort

11. ASTM D-1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

12. ASTM D-1883 CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils

13. ASTM D-2488 Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)

14. ASTM D-4873 Identification, Storage and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples

15. ASTM D-7428 Resistance of Fine Aggregates to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit to the owner for approval, and retain for the balance of the project, a minimum of two full size samples of each Paver type/size/thickness/color/finish specified; the samples shall represent the range of shape, texture and color permitted for the respective type. Color(s) will be selected by the Landscape Architect/Owner from Manufacturer’s standard colors.

B. Prior to delivery of the associated material to the site, the Contractor shall submit the following product specific documentation for approval:

1. Aggregates
a. Sieve analysis per ASTM C-136
b. Durability of aggregates using Micro Deval Degradation using ASTM D6928. c. Percentage of angular and sub-angular particles per ASTM D-2488.

2. Pavers
a. Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance to ASTM C-936 or other applicable requirements.
b. Warranty documentation
c. Close out Operations and Maintenance program.
d. Material Safety Data Sheets

3. Geotextiles
a. One 18 inch x 18 inch panel of each Geotextile material for inspection and testing. The sample panels shall be uniformly rolled and shall be wrapped in plastic to protect the material from moisture and damage during shipment. Samples shall be externally tagged for easy identification.

External identification shall include: name of manufacturer; product type; product grade; lot number; and physical dimensions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 993 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 14 13 - 3 Pavers
b. Material Safety Data Sheets.

4. Written Method Statement and Quality Control Plan that describes material staging and flow, paving direction and installation procedures, including representative reporting forms that ensure conformance to the project specifications.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall submit a list of five (5) previously constructed projects of similar size and magnitude prior to bid date to be qualified. Contact names and telephone numbers shall be listed for each project with date of completion.

B. At a minimum, the Contractor’s Site Foreman shall hold current Basic Level Certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI) contractor certification program. The Site Foreman is expected to be onsite for the entire installation.

C. Contractor shall conform to all local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements.

D. Contractor will hold a mandatory pre-construction meeting with Design Engineer, Owner, and affected sub-trades accessing the paver work area to review method statement and quality control plan and communicate to all parties a work flow that is most desirable to meet the construction schedule as set forth by the General Contractor. Additional details of Pre-Construction meeting are outlined in Article 3.01.

1.6 MOCK-UPS
A. Install a 5 ft x 5 ft paver area following the installation practices described in Article

3.02. B. This area will be used to verify: surcharge of the Bedding Course; joint sizes; lines; laying pattern(s); color(s); and, texture of the job.

C. To provide a proper representation of color blend, a minimum of 3 cubes for manual installation, and 6 cubes for mechanical installation, will be pulled from.

D. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged.

E. Subject to approval by the Owner, the mock-up may be retained as part of the finished work. If mock-up is not retained, remove and dispose of mock-up at the completion of the project.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 994 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 14 13 - 4 Pavers
C. Contractor shall check all materials upon delivery to assure that the proper materials have been received and are in good condition before signing off on the manufacturer’s packing slip.

D. Contractor shall protect all materials from damage or contamination due to jobsite conditions and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged or contaminated materials shall not be incorporated into the work.

E. Deliver Pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload and store Pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.

F. Handle and transport aggregates to avoid segregation, contamination and degradation. Keep different materials sufficiently separated as to prevent mixing. Do not dump or store one material on top of another unless it is part of the installation process. Cover material with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind – secure the covering in place.

G. Geotextiles shall be delivered, stored and handled in accordance with ASTM D-4873.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not install during heavy rain, freezing conditions or snowfall.

B. Do not install on frozen soil subgrade or aggregates.

C. Do not install frozen Bedding Course sand, Joint Filling Sand or Base Course material.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide 500 square feet additional paver material for use by Owner for maintenance and repair as attic stock.

B. Pavers to be from the same production run as installed materials.

C. Store paver materials in Owner designated location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Base Course – within the context of this specification, a dense graded free draining aggregate material of a designed thickness that provides structural support over the subgrade. Other Base Course options include cement-treated aggregate, limetreated aggregate, bituminous (asphalt)-stabilized aggregate, asphalt or concrete; a Base Course can also be augmented with a sub-base layer, being a second layer of dense graded free draining aggregate material.

B. Bedding Course – within the context of this specification, a one-inch thick layer of course, washed sand loosely screeded smooth for bedding of the Pavers. Other Bedding Course options include bituminous setting bed or mortar bed.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 995 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 14 13 - 5 Pavers
C. Pavers – individual paving units manufacturing from concrete. Pavers are shipped in clusters called bundles or cubes, which consist of several layers of pavers strapped or wrapped together.

D. Edge Restraint – within this specification, a cast in place concrete curb, building or other stationary object that prevents the lateral movement of the sand and pavers so they do not spread and loose interlock. Other Edge Restraints options include plastic, steel or aluminum edging, cut stone, precast concrete and submerged concrete edge complete with mortared pavers.

E. Geotextile – Woven or non woven fabrics made from plastic fibers used primarily for separation between pavement layers.

F. Interlocking Pavement System – a system of paving consisting of Pavers placed in an interlocking pattern, compacted into the Bedding Course, the joints filled with Joint Filling Sand, and compacted again to initiate interlock. The Pavers and Bedding Course are placed over the Base Course, and are confined on the edges by Edge Restraints.

G. Joint Filling Sand – sand used to fill spaces (joints) between pavers, used to create interlock between the individual Pavers. Stabilizers (Dry Mix Joint Sand or Liquid Penetrating) can be added to the sand to provide early stabilization, reduce the permeability, reduce sand loss and help prevent weeds.

H. Laying Face – the working edge of the pavement where the laying of pavers is occurring.

I. Mechanical Installation - The use of specialized machines to lift whole layers of pavers from the bundles and place them on the prepared bedding course. These specialized machines are designed specifically for this application.

J. Subgrade – the soil upon which the pavement structure and shoulders are constructed.

2.2 PAVERS
A. Paver product required:

1. Permeable Brick Pavers, see project plans
B. Pavers shall conform to the following requirements set forth in ASTM C-936:

1. Measured length or width of test specimens shall not differ by more than +/-

0.063 in, while measured thickness shall not differ by more than +/- 0.125 in.

2. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C-140.

3. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance with ASTM C-140.

4. Where freeze-thaw testing is required, the average mass loss of all specimens tested shall not be greater than (A) 225 g/m2 when subject to 28 freeze thaw

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 996 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION #16
32 14 13 - 6 Pavers
cycles, or (b) 500 g/m2 when subject to 49 freeze thaw cycles. Testing shall be conducted using a 3% saline solution in according to ASTM C-1645.

5. Efflorescence shall not be a cause for rejection.

C. Pigment in Pavers shall conform to ASTM C-979.

2.3 EDGE RESTRAINTS
A. Edge restraints shall be cast in place concrete curbs constructed per plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
A. Prior to commencement of any work, the Contractor shall conduct a pre-construction meeting with the Owner, Design Engineer and affected sub-trades. The preconstruction meeting should, at a minimum, verify:

1. The location of the Mock Up, and whether it will be part of the final construction or need to be removed.

2. The site layout conforms to the Site Plan.

3. The excavation work conforms to the specified lines, elevations and compaction densities of the subgrade soils. Subgrade shall be trimmed to within 0 and ½ in of the specified grades. The surface of the prepared Subgrade shall not deviate by more than 3/8 in from the bottom edge of a 10 foot straight edge laid in any direction.